^s 


F 


^2 


F 




c 


coc/) 






c 


CO 


c 


0) 


c 




^ 




L 


Crt 




rt 






c 


lie 


c 






^ ^ 




C3 rt 




!±lt5 






c 


■^ 


u 







aassT4^ 



CO 



CD 



s 

CO 



en r- 



3 

C 

> 

< 



0) 






5 S 



c/) 



BooKILlS: 






Jewel * * 
Gasolene Stoves 



ARE... 
UNEQUALED. 



14 Years Experience. 
Endless Variety. 



Prices from 

$3,50 to $26,00. 




The most perfect 
Gasolene stoves 
on the market 
at 

$11.00 
and $13.00. 

Full size and 
very handsome. 



Write for Catalog. 



The 1896 Production of Jewels is superior to 
any other make. 

NE\N FEATURES GALORE. 



George in. GiarK & companu, 

MAKERS OF 

Jewel Gas, Gasolene and Oil Stoves, 

CHICAGO. 



■ %1^ 



fiEblABb 





Gas 
and Gasolene 
Stoves 

for HEATING 
and COOKING 

MRe THe eesT. 



100 STYLES AND SIZES. 



SEflD FOR 

IliliOSTJ^HTED 

CATflliOGUE. 





^^^^m 


^^ 






^S 




^^^^^^^^s 


n 




^^75" «^i^-^^^l 


MhHKb . ^. 




^ , ■■/■'■':-:■•' V 






--C-' ^?<Li-:v^;,^ 



Schneider S^ Trenkamp Co. 

0€V€lanc(, Ohio. 



I/I^e carry in Stock the largest number of well known 
brands of ROOFING PLATES of any house in the United 
States. 



Our own private Brands of 

Old Style Roofing- 
Each Sheet squared and 
stamped with orand and thick- 
ness— 



The following well known- 
maker's brands 

Old Style Roofing 

always in stock. Prices as 
low as if bought direct from 
them — 



Our own brands 

Roofing Plates. 

Each sheet stamped and 
squared — 



Osborn's Guaranteed 

Hand Dipped. 

Coated by hand with a mixture rich in tin on 
special quality soft steel sheets. Best plate 
ever made. 

Golden Star Old Style. 

Strictly hand made of best American Soft 
Steely heavily and evenly coated through 
Palm Oil. 

Osborn's Old Process. 

Soft working plate, heavily coated, beautifully 
mottled.' 

O sbo r n ' s 1 d M eth o d , 

Made from same quality of soft-steel, evenly 
coated, richly mottled. 

N. G. Taylor's Old Style. 

Scott's Extra Coated. 

Hamilton's Best Redipped. 

U. S. Redipped. 

Gilbertson's Old Method. 

M. F. 

Old Style Pontymister. 

The Osborn Roofing. 
Best medium priced roofing on the market. 
Rich coating and nicely mottled. 

Star 

15 lbs. coating, nicely mottled. 

Nava, Eureka. 



Not Stamped— 

Well known Maker's Brands. 
Each sheet stamped and 
squared — 



Osborn, J. L. O., Atlas. 

The Taylor Roofing. 

Alderly. 

Monongahela. 

A fine assortment to choose from in bright tin plates. 
GRADES OF CHARCOAL ONE OF COKE, 



FOUR 

INCLUDING 

Boiler Sizes, Pipe Sizes, and Twentij Odd Sizes m Cokes. 

tJ. M. & L. A. OSBORN, 

JOBBERS OF 

Tin Plate, Tinware and Tinners' Supplies. 

Correspondence Solicited, CLEVELAND OHIO. 

3 



\hZ International 
Correspondency Schools 

INCLUDING 

THE SCHOOL OF PLUMBING, HEATING AND VENTILATION 

The School of Mines, 

The School of Mechanics, 

The School of Steam Engineering:, 

The School of Electricity, 

The School ot Architecture, 

The School of Bridge Engineering:, 

The School of Railroad Eng:ineering, 

The School of Municipal Engineering, 

The School of Hydraulic Engrineering, 

The School of Civil Engineering, 

The School of English Branches. 

TWENTY-SIX TECHNICAL COURSES, 

INCLUDING 

THE HEATING and VENTILATION SCHOLARSHIP, 

The Sanitary Plumbing and Gas Fitting Scholarship, 

The Sanitary Plumbing, Heating and 

Ventilation Scholarship. 

Also Courses in Mechanics, Steam Engineering, Electricity, 
Coal and iletal Mining, Architecture, Etc. 

MECHANICAL DRAWING, the most important subject for every 
mechanic to learn, is included in every course, and we meet with the greatest 
success in teaching the subject. Our method is original and practical and 
superior to any other of which we know. In a few months students learn to 
make neat and well lettered drawings. 

PAYMENTS MAY BE MADE BY INSTALLMENTS. 
Prices are moderate and Scholarships are not forfeited upon failure to pay 
promptly. 

We teach by means of specially prepared Instruction and Question Papers, 
written by our own Instructors and illustrated by our own draughtsmen, at 
great expense, solely tor this work. Students do not need to purchase any 
books. When they need aid they write to us on blanks which we furnish. All 
their work is carefully examined and corrected. The most painstaking fidelity 
is directed to the aid of our students by our instructors, who are the best we 
can secure. 

IF YOU CAN READ AND WRITE you can enroll with us and we 
will guarantee you instruction until you have earned a Diploma for proficiency 
in all the subjects of your course, if it takes twenty years or only one. 

NINE THOUSAND STUDENTS are taking advantage of the 
opportunities for education which we offer to those who are willing to devote a 
few evenings each week to study. 

IF YOU WISH TO LEARN how you can obtain the gist of a tech- 
nical education in the iDriefest space of time, at the least expense and without 
leaving home or stopping work for a day, send to us for a FREE Circular of 
Information, stating the subject you wish to study. 

The International Correspondence Schools 

SCt^flr^TOfi, PR. 



THE 



Workshop Manual 



AND 



Compendium of Useful Information 



COMPILED BY 

JOHN J. DAVIES 



FOR 



Sheet Metal Workers and Mechanics of all kinds, 
Business Men, Manufacturers, Etc. . 



CHICAGO, 

THE AMERICAN ARTISAN PRESS, 

1896. 






^/f 



Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1895, by 

DANIEL STERN, 

In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington, D. C. 

3 G OS '^ 



- . *.; 



i '• •'« 



/ 



PREFACE. 

nPHERE is nothing new under the sun. Every 
month sees thousands of books ushered 
into the world that merely flail again the thor- 
oughly threshed straws of the ages. In a work 
of the character of this one, originality is not, of 
course, looked for. Judicious or injudicious 
selection from the masses of Gradgrindian fact 
left us from the labors of generations of calcu- 
lators, statisticians and compilers, is the only 
factor in determining its success or failure. A 
furniture worker, a^ doctor of veterinary science, 
and a sheet metal worker all need books of ready 
reference to aid them in a thousand odd ways 
in their daily toil, but the data each would post 
himself upon are radically different. It is for 
the last class and those in kindred lines, such as 
hardware, heating, or roofing, that this book is 
specially intended. The greatest care has been 



taken to make this Manual comprehensive with- 
out being voluminous, and compact without be- 
ing at all incomplete. Its contents are in the 
main of a technical nature, and the few depart- 
ures made into the field of general information 
will, it is trusted, increase the helpfulness of this 
little book to those for whom it was written. 

The Author. 
Chicago, Nov. i8, 1895. 



TABLE OF CONTENTS. 



CHAPTER I. 

Workshop Receipts 9-29 

Babbitt Metal, 9; Blue Prints, 9; Cleaning Brass, 10; Cutting 
Brass Chemically, 10; Cold Brazing, 10; Enameling Castings, 
10; Mending Cast Iron, 11; Cements, 11-15; Tinning Cloth, 15; 
Hardening Files, 15; Fire Grenades, 15; Stamp Ink, 16; Lacquer 
for brass, 16 — colorless, 16; Lead Coating for Iron or Steel 
Plates, 16; Lubricant, 17; Metal Pohsh, 17; Mucilage, 17; 
Nickel Plating, 17; Nickel Polish, 18; Oxidizing, 18; Trans, 
parent Paper, 18; Paint for galvanized iron, 19 — for sheet 
iron, 19— for tin or iron roofs, 19 — lead colored, 19; Rust, 
19-21 — to prevent iron work from, 19 — 10 prevent iron and 
steel from, 20 — to remove from iron or steel, 20 — to remove 
from nickel plate, 20 — to prevent sheet iron pipes from, 21 — 
to keep tools from, 21; Cleaning Silver, 21; Soap for Metal 
Work, 21; Solders, 21-25; Stove Polish, 25; Tin Bronzing, 25; 
Tin Foil, 25; Varnishes, 26-29. 

- CHAPTER II. 

Pattern Cutting 30 76 

Cone with Oval Base and Round Top, 30-32; To Describe an 
Ellipse, 32-35; Pattern for an Oval Tapering Article, 35-37; 
Pattern for Hopper by Triangulation, 37-40; Pattern for Cir- 
cular Top Boiler Covey, 40-42; Grecian Mouldings, 42-45; 
Patterns for a Smoke Stack, 45-49; "String and Nail" Oval, 
4q; The Side of an Octagon, 50; To Describe Patterns for 
Flaring Vessels, 50-52; Pattern for a Wash Boiler Cover, 52; 
Pattern for a Can Breast or Pitched Cover, 52-54; Pattern for 
a "Y," 54-55; Chimney Top Pattern, 56-57; Rule for Obtaining 
the Side of an Octagon of Any Given Square, 57; To Describe 
an Oval of Any Length or Width, 58; Pattern for a Prairie 



6 CONTENTS. 

Chimney, 59; Pattern for a Measure Lip, 60; Pattern for a 
Pitched Cover, 62; Method of Describing an Ellipse, 63; 
Roman Mouldings, 63-66; Gothic Profiles, 66-68; Tee Pipe 
Pattern, 68-70; To Describe a Pattern for a Four-Piece Elbow, 
70-71; A Tapering Round-Cornered Square Reservoir, 72-73; 
Rule for Round Elbows, 74-75; Pattern for a Metal Ball, 76. 

CHAPTER III. 

Miscellaneous Tables 77-88 

Number Bricks Required to Construct any Building, "]"]', Interest 
Table, 78; Equivalent of British Money in American Money, 
78; Weight, Stature, etc. of Man, 79; Carrying Capacity of a 
Ten Ton Freight Car, 79; Population of the Larger Cities, 80; 
Relative Weights of Metals, 81; The English Mile Compared 
with Other European Measures, 82; Weight of a Cubic Foot 
of Various Substances, 82-83; Melting Temperature of Alloys, 
83; U. S. Mineral Statistics, 1890, 84; Weight of Liquids per 
Gallon, 84; The Effect of Heat on Various Substances, 84; 
Weight of Water at Different Temperatures, 84; Weight and 
Specific Gravities of Liquids, 85; Specific Gravities and 
Weights of Stones, etc., 86; Population of the United States 
by States, 87; Twelve O'Clock Noon, Greenwich Mean 
Time, 88. 

CHAPTER IV. 

Tables of Measures, Etc 80-102 

Dimensions of One Acre, 89; To Compute Jhe Volume of Bricks 
and the Number in a Cubic Foot of Masonry, 89; Rule to Find 
the Number of Gallons Contained in a Can, 90; Rule to Find 
the Horse-Power of a Stationary Engine, 90; Board and Timber 
Measure, 90; Estimates of Materials, 91; Tables Convenient 
for Taking Inside Dimensions, 91; Land Measure, 91; Circular 
Measure, 92; Carpenters', Bricklayers' and Builders' Measure- 
ments, 92; Ear Corn Measure, 92; Measures of Length, '93; 
Water, 93; Comparative Table of Weight, 93; Cistern 
Measure, 94; Grain Measure, 94; Hay Measure, 94; To Find 
the Contents of a Corn Crib, 95 ; Cubic or Solid Measure, 95 ; 
Liquid Measure, 95; Measure of Weigkt, 95; Metric System, 
95-98; Ancient Weights, 98-99; Useful Rules in Mensura- 
tion, 99-102. 



CONTENTS. 7 

CHAPTER V. 

Useful Tables for Tinners and Sheet Metal 

Workers 103-128 

Weight of a Lineal Foot of Flat Bar Iron In Pounds, 103; Bar and 
Sheet Brass Weight In Pounds, 104; Sheet Copper, 104-105; 
Marks and Weights'of Tinplate, 106: Sheet Iron, 106-107; Net 
Cost and Weight of Galvanized Sheet Iron, 108- 113; Weight 
of One Foot of Bar Steel, 113; Number Pounds of Round and 
Square Bar Iron Per Foot, 114; Internal Areas of Wrought 
Iron Pipe, 1 14; Wilson's Table of Dimensions of Chimneys, 115; 
Cost of Tin Roofing Per Square and Square Foot, 116-117; 
Slate Table, 118; Weight of Lead Pipe and Tin Lined Lead 
Pipe, 118; Registers and Ventilators Vertical Wheel, 119; 
Weight of One Foot of Bar Steel, 120; Useful Tables for Tin 
Plate Workers, 120-123; Tin Plate, 124-125; Weight Per Foot 
of Galvanized Sheet Iron Pipe, 126 127; Weight of Metals, 128. 

CHAPTER VI. 

Miseellaneous Information 129-146 

Legal Holidays in the Various States, 1 29-131; Antidotes to Poi- 
sons, 131-132; Useful Suggestions in Cases of Accidents to 
Mechanics, 132-135; Useful Shop Hints, 135-137; To Attach 
Labels to Tin, 137-138; Simple Tests for Impure Water, 138- 
139; Alloys, 139; Nickel Alloys, 139-140; Cost of a Patent in 
Different Countries, 140; Weight of Metals, 140; To Calcu- 
late Radiating Surfaces, 141; Shrinkage of Castings, 141; 
Wear and Tear of Building Material, 142; A Quick Method of 
Finding Interest, 143; Weight of Buildings, 143; Cost of Pub- 
lic Buildings, 143-144; Relative Holding Power of Cut and 
Wire Nails, 144-145. 

CHAPTER VII. 

Metals. 147-170 

Metals and Their Properties, 146-15 1; Iron and Steel, 151- 155: 
Copper, 155-156; Zinc, 156-157; Lead, 157; Alloys, 157-159; 
Alloys of Copper and Tin, 159; Alloys of Copper and Brass; 
159-162; Solders, 162-163; Soldering Metals, 163-168; Seams or 
Joints, 168-170. 



8 CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER VIII. 
Mouldings 171-202 

Given Shape and Length of Moulding to Draw Pattern, 172-174; 
Given Shape of Moulding to Drav^^ Shape at Any Angle 9f 
Section of Moulding, 174- [79; The Shape of a Moulding 
Being Given, to Draw the Pattern for Joining Two Pieces of 
It at Any Angle, 179-180; To Draw Pattern for Aquarium, 
180-184; Aquarium Pattern, 184-188; Pattern for Raking 
Moulding, 188-194; Pattern for Lobster-Back Cowl, 194-198; 
Pattern for a Tapering Circular Bend, 198-202. 

CHAPTER IX. 
Slate 203-229 

Pitch of Roofs, 204; Sheathing Boards, 204-205; Comparative Size 
and Strength of Slate, 205-207; Slate Roofs Damaged by Care- 
lessness, 207; Ornamental Slate, 207; Cut Slate, 208; Piling 
Slate, 208-210; Selecting Slate, 210; Punching Slate, 210; Ma- 
chine Punched Slate, 211-213; Slating Nails, 213-214; Meas- 
uring Roofs, 214; Rules for Measuring Roofs,. 2 14-2 16; Laying 
Slate and Felt, 216-218; Flashing and Counter-Flashing, 218- 
220; Ridge and Hip Rolls, 220-221; Ridging, 221; How to Use 
Several Sizes of Slate, 221-223; Repairing Slate Roofs, 223- 
226; Spire Slating, 226-228; The German Style, 228-229. 



CHAPTER I. 
WORKSHOP RECEIPTS. 

For Cementing:, Soldering, Varnishing, Painting Metals, 
Preventing Rust, Etc. 

In the following pages will be found a condensed 
and carefully compiled list of receipts. The lists of 
solders, varnishes and cements are unusually complete, 
and it has been the aim of the author of this work to 
furnish those receipts that are more commonly used, 
rather than the vara avis which one sheet metal worker 
or storekeeper in 500 may have an occasion to employ 
once in a lifetime. 



Babbitt fletal — Melt four pounds copper, add by 
degrees twelve pounds best Banca tin, eight pounds 
regulus of antimony and twelve pounds more of tin. 
After four or five pounds tin have been added, reduce 
the heat to a dull red, then add the remainder of the 
metal as above. This composition is termed ''harden- 
ing." For lining, take one pound of this hardening 
and melt with it two pounds Banca tin, which produces 
the lining ready for use. The proportions of Babbitt 
metal ready for use are, therefore, four pounds copper, 
eight pounds regulus of antimony, and ninety-six 
pounds tin. 

Blue Print — Formula for — (i) i oz. of red pot- 
ash, I oz. of citrate iron of ammonium, i pint of water. 

*(2) I oz. of red potash, \% oz. of citrate iron of 
ammonium, i^ pint of water. 

*No. 2 gives the clearer print 



10 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

Brass — Formula for Cleaning — ( i ) Venetian 
red finely powdered, 3 troy ozs.; oil of turpentine, 12 
fluid ozs.; oleic acid, i fluid oz.; ammonia water, half 
fluid oz; alcohol, i fluid oz.; oil of sassafras, 10 min- 
ims; mix, shake on using. Apply with rag and clean 
off, when dry, with whiting. 

(2) Oxalic acid dissolved in soft water, say half an 
ounce to a pint, is one of the best known means for 
cleaning and brightening brass work. 

Brass — Cut Chemically — To cut sheet brass chem- 
ically the following method meets with success: 
Make a strong solution of bichloride of mercury in 
alcohol. With a quill pen draw a line across the brass 
where it is to be cut. Let it dry on, and, with the same 
pen, draw over this line with nitric acid. The brass 
may then be broken across like glass cut with a dia- 
mond. 

Brazing — Cold Without Fire or Lamp — Fluoric 
acid, i; oxymuriatic acid, i; mix in a lead bottle. Put 
a chalk mark each side where you want to braze. This 
mixture will keep about six months in one bottle. 

Castings — Formula for Enameling — Treat the 
castings with dilute hydrochloric acid, which dissolves 
a little of the metal, and leaves a skin of homeogene- 
ous graphite holding well to the iron. The article is 
then washed in a receiver with hot or cold water, or 
cooked in steam, so as to remove completely the iron 
chloride that has been formed. Finally, the piece is 
allowed to dry in the empty receiver, and a solution of 
india rubber or gutta percha, in essence of petroleum, 
is injected, and the solvent, afterward evaporating, 
leaves a hard and solid enamel on the surface of the 
iron work. Another plan is to keep the chloride of 



t^r: 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 11 

iron on the metal instead of washing it off, and to 
plunge the piece into a bath of soda silicate and borate. 
Thus is formed a silico-borate of iron, very hard and 
brilliant, which fills the pores of the metal skin. As 
for the chlorine disengaged, it continues with the 
soda to form sodium chloride, which remains in the 
pickle. 

Cast Iron — Mending — Take two ounces of sal 
ammoniac, one ounce of sublimed sulphur and one 
pound cast-iron fillings; mix in a mortar and keep the 
powder perfectly dry. When it is to be used mix it 
with twenty times its weight of clean iron fillings, grind 
the whole in a mortar, wet with water until it becomes 
a paste and apply to the parts to be mended. 

Cement — For Castings — Eighty parts of sifted cast 
iron turnings, two parts of powdered sal-ammoniac, and 
one part sulphur made into a thick paste with water and 
mixed fresh tor use, makes a good cement for stopping 
holes in castings. 

Cement — For Celluloid — A good cement for cellu- 
loid is made from one part shellac dissolved in one part 
of spirits of camphor, and three to four parts of 90 per 
cent alcohol. The cement should be applied warm, 
and the broken parts securely held together until the 
solvent has entirely evaporated. 

Cement — For Glass Letters — To fasten glass let- 
ters, figures, etc., on glass (show windows), so that even 
when submerged in water for several days they will not 
become detached, use an India rubber cement. The 
best for this purpose consists of one part India rubber, 
three parts of mastic and fifty parts chloroform. Let 
it stand for several days at a low temperature to dis- 



12 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

solve the cement. It must be applied very rapidly, as 
it becomes thick very soon. 

Cement — For Iron — Take ten parts of steel filings, 
3 parts sal-ammoniac, and 2 parts flowers of sulphur. 
This mixture can be preserved any length of time in 
dry packages. In order to lute with it, add to one part 
of the mixture I2 parts of iron filings, and enough 
water, previously acidulated with sulphuric acid, to 
form a paste. This is now ready to be applied to the 
perfectly clean surfaces of the metal to be luted. For 
fine castings and small holes, the pulverized iron {Fer- 
rum Pulveratum of apothecaries) can be substituted for 
iron filings. 

Cement — For Iron — Take equal parts of sulphur and 
white lead, with about a sixth of borax; incorporate the 
three so as to form one homogeneous mass. When 
going to apply it, wet it with strong sulphuric acid and 
place a thin layer of it between the two pieces of iron, 
which should then be pressed together. In five days it 
will be perfectly dry, all traces of the cement having 
vanished, and the iron will have the appearance of hav- 
ing been welded together. 

Cement — For Joints — Paris white, ground, four 
pounds; litharge, ground, ten pounds; yellow ochre, 
fine, half a pound; half ounce of hemp, cut short; mix 
well together with linseed to a stiff putty. This 
cement is good for joints on steam water pipes. It 
will set under water. 

Cement — For Kerosene Lamps — Rosin three parts, 
caustic soda one part, water five parts, mixed with half 
its weight of plaster of paris. This cement sets firmly 
in about three-quarters of an hour and has great adhe- 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 1 3 

sive power. It is not permeable to kerosene, and is a 
low conductor of heat. 

Cement — Metals to Glass — Take 4 ounces thick 
solution of glue, 2 ounces linseed oil varnish, i ounce 
pure turpentine. Mix and boil them together in a 
close vessel. When the cement is applied the metal 
and glass to be joined should be clamped and permitted 
to remain so for 48 hours, so as to allow the cement to 
take strong hold and to harden. 

Cement — Rubber to Wood or Metal — As rubber 
plates and rings are now almost exclusively used for 
making connections between steam and other pipes and 
apparatus, much annoyance is often experienced by the 
impossibility or imperfections of an air-tight connection. 
This is avoided entirely by employing a cement which 
fastens alike well to the rubber and to the metal or 
v/ood. Such cement is prepared by a solution of shellac 
in ammonia. This is best made by soaking pulverized 
shellac in ten times its weight of strong ammonia, when 
a shiny mass is obtained, which in three or four weeks 
will become liquid without the use of hot water. This 
softens the rubber, which becomes, after the volatiliza- 
tion of the ammonia, hard and impermeable to gases 
and fluids. 

Cement — Steam Fittings — Take 6 parts of finely 
powdered graphite, 3 parts of slacked lime, and 8 parts 
of sulphate lime, and mix them well with 7 parts of 
boiled linseed oil. The mass must be well kneaded so 
as to become perfectly homogeneous. This cement is 
impermeable by air and steam, and is therefore valua 
ble to steam and gas fitters. 

Cement — Steam Pipes — Take 2 parts of litharge, i 
part dry-slacked lime, and i part fine dry sand. Com- 



14 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

bine them thoroughly, and add enough hot linseed oil 
varnish to form a paste-like mass. This will be found 
an excellent cement entirely to be depended upon, for 
iron steam pipes. It sets hard quickly, and must be 
freshly prepared every time it is required for applica- 
tion, which application must be made only when the 
cement is quite hot. 

Cement — Submarine — Take 2 gills litharge, 2 gills 
plaster of paris, 2 gills fine dry white sand, two-thirds 
of a gill of finely-powdered resin. Sift and keep them 
until required for use, when they should be made into 
a putty by mixing them with boiled linseed oil, to 
which a little dryer has been added. It should be used 
within 12 hours after being mixed. 

The above cement is the one employed in con- 
structing the tanks of the Zoological Gardens in Lon- 
don, and is perfectly free from anything that will injure 
animal or vegetable life. It is but little known, but is 
entirely reliable. It adheres firmly to glass, metal, 
wood, stone, etc., and hardens under water. It can be 
used for marine as well as fresh water aquaria, as it 
resists the action of salt water. Three or four hours 
should be given it to dry before being subjected to the 
water. 

Cement — Transparent — To make a perfectly white, 
transparent and very adhesive cement, mix in a well- 
stoppered bottle ten drachms of chloroform with twelve 
and a half drachms of non-vulcanized caoutchouc, in 
small pieces. When the caoutchouc is dissolved, add 
two and a half drachms of mastic, and let the whole 
macerate from eight to ten days, shaking the mixture 
occasionally. 

Cement — Wood Roofing — This composition is 
formed of the following materials, viz.: — Mineral coal 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. I 5 

tar, pulverized coal (charcoal is esteemed the best) and 
fine well-slacked lime; the coal and lime to be well 
mixed together, proportioned at about four-fifths coal, 
and one-fifth lime; the tar to be heated, and, while hot, 
thickened with the mixture of coal and lime, until it 
becomes so hard that it may be easily spread upon the 
surface of a board, and not run when hot. The cement 
most be applied warm, and should be used with a 
trowel. 

Cement — Zinc and Glass — An inexpensive cement 
for uniting zinc with glass may be made as follows: i 
pound of shellac dissolved in I pint alcohol, with one- 
twentieth its volume of a solution of gutta percha in 
bisulphide of carbon, will dry quickly. A slow-drying 
one may be made thus: 2 ounces of thick glue solution, 
I ounce linseed oil varnish, or % ounce Venice turpen- 
tine; boil together. 

Cloth — To Tin — A mixture of finely pulverized 
metallic zinc and albumen, of about the consistency of 
a thin paste, is spread with a brush upon linen or cot- 
ton cloth, and by means of hot steam coagulated. The 
cloth is now immersed in a bath of stannic chloride, well 
washed and dried. Running the cloth through a roller 
press, the thin film is said to take metallic luster. 
Designs cut in stout paper letters, numbers, etc., when 
laid between cloth and roller, are impressed upon it. It 
can also be cut in strips, corners, etc. 

Files — Hardening— Rub a little hard soap across 
the teeth to keep from scaling; heat to a cherry red, and 
dip endwise in salt water; then dip in hot fresh water 
to remove any salt on the teeth, dry over the fire, and 
wet slightly with linseed oil on a rag. 

Fire Grenades— Solution for — Bicarbonate of am- 



l6 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

monia and sulphate of soda in strong solution is the 
best solution for hand grenades to extinguish fire. This 
compound will keep indefinitely without losing its act- 
tive properties if the bottle is kept well corked. 

Ink — For Rubber Stamps — For blue ink: Aniline 
blue, water sol. i B, 3 parts; Pyroligneous acid, 10 parts; 
Glycerine, 70 parts; Distilled Water, 10 parts; Alcohol, 
10 parts; Mix them intimately by trituration in a mor- 
tar. (The blue should be well rubbed down with the 
water, and th^ glycerine gradually added. When solu- 
tion is effected, the other ingredients are added.) 

Other colors are produced by substituting for the 
blue any one of the following: Methyl violet, 3 B, 3 
parts; Methyl green, yellowish, 4 parts; Nigrosin W, 
(blue black), 4 parts; Diamond fuchsin I, 2 parts; Ve- 
suvin B (brown) 5 parts. 

If a bright red ink is required, 3 parts of eosin BBN 
are used, but the pyroligneous acid must be omitted, as 
this would destroy the eosin. Other aniline colors, 
when used for stamping ink, require to be acidulated. 

Lacquer — For Brass — One quart of alcohol, 98 per 
cent., one and one-half ounce of best orange shellac, 
one-quarter ounce gum sandarach, one-quarter ounce 
gum elemi. Mix and keep gently warm for two or 
three days, stirring occasionally, and strain; give it a 
wine color with dragon's blood. Warm the articles be- 
fore applying the lacquer. 

Lacquer — Colorless— For a colorless lacquer dis- 
solve bleached shellac in pure alcohol, settle and de- 
cant. Make the laquer very thin. The usual lacquer for 
brass is made with ordinary shellac and alcohol made 
very thin, settled and decanted. 

Lead Coating — For Iron or Steel Plates— Th^ 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. I7 

material to be treated is subjected to a series of five 
baths. The first is in a pickel, through which a weak 
current of electricity is passed. This bath removes the 
scales from the surface of the metal, and the electricity 
is said to greatly expedite matters. The second bath 
is in lime water, which neutralizes the acid. Then comes 
the bath in clear water. The fourth bath is in a neutral 
solution of zinc and stannic chlorides. The drying pro- 
cess, which follows^ leaves on the surface of the plates a 
deposit of the mixed metallic chlorides, which protects 
the plate from oxidation. The next process consists in 
passing the plates through a bath of molten lead, and 
when taken from here the metal is found to be coated 
with an adherent layer of lead, which, though thin, is 
uniformly spread. It is said this process has no de- 
creasing effect on the ductility or strength of the iron, 
and that a plate may be bent, closed and opened again 
without cracking the coating. 

Lubricant — Put pure olive oil into a clear glass bottle 
with strips of sheet lead and expose it to the sun for 
two or three weeks, then pour off the clear oil and the 
result is a lubricant which will neither gum nor corrode. 
It is used for watches and fine machinery of all kinds. 

fletal Polish— Paste — A **paste" metal polish for 
cleaning and polishing brass is thus made: Oxalic acid 
I part, iron peroxide 15 parts, powdered rotten stone 20 
parts, palm oil 60 parts, petrolatum 4 parts. See that 
solids are thoroughly pulverized and sifted, then add 
and thoroughly incorporate oil and petrolatum. 

MuciJage — Here is the formula for preparing muci- 
lage such as is sold in stationery stores: Dextrine 2 
parts, acetic acid I part, water 5 parts, alcohol i part. 

Nickel Plating— The following process of nickel plat- 



1 8 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

ing trailing wheel parts and similar articles, is said to 
have given excellent results. The bath is composed of 
1,000 g. of pure nickel sulphate, 750 g. of neutral tar- 
taric acid-ammonia, 5 g. of gallic acid (tannin), and 20 
1. of water. The neutral tartaric acid-ammonia is ob- 
tained by saturation of a solution of tartaric acid with 
ammonia. The nickel salt must be neutral. For this 
purpose the whole is dissolved in 3 to 4 of water, and 
allowed to boil a quarter of an hour. Then as much 
water is added as will produce altogether 20 1. of fluid, 
which is filtered. The precipitate obtained is very white, 
soft and uniform, and bears no traces 'of roughness on 
the surface. On the crude or polished castings very 
heavy deposits can be obtained, and at a price which 
scarcely exceeds that of copper plating. Galvanoplas- 
tic impressions may also be obtained in this bath. The 
current need only be weak. 

Nickel Polish — Take one ounce of oxalic acid, one 
pound tripoli and one-half gallon of water, (soft water 
preferable). Shake once or twice a day and let stand 
until dissolved. Apply with woolen cloth and polish 
with woolen cloth or chamois. 

Oxidizing — Silver or Copper — To make a liquid 
that will oxidize silver a glossy black by dipping small 
silver articles in the liquid: Use a solution of sulphide 
of potassium; polish metal before, and rub with a soft 
rag or chamois after immersion. To make a liquid that 
will oxidize copper or oroide by dipping to imitate 
bronze: Use the same bath, but have it quite dilute. If 
for outside work simply oil with olive oil, and let the 
weather do the rest. 

Paper — Transparent — To make paper transparent 
for copying, drawing, etc. Place a blank sheet of paper 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. I9 

over the drawing and rub it lightly with pure benzine. 
The tracing can then be readily made, and the benzine, 
upon evaporation, leaves the paper as opaque as be- 
fore. 

Paint — For Galvanized Iron — The best paint where 
a dark color is not objectionable is common asphalt 
dissolved in turpentine or benzine. It is extremely ten- 
acious, dries soon and becomes very hard and insol- 
uble by the action of sunlight. It is flexible and very 
durable. 

Paint — For Sheet Iron — Good varnish, one-half 
gallon; boiled linseed oil one-half gallon; add red lead 
sufficient to bring to the consistency of common paint. 
Apply with brush. Applicable to any kind of iron 
work exposed to the weather. 

Paint — For Tin or Iron Roofs — Ten pounds Vene- 
tian red, one gallon common asphaltum; mix thor- 
oughly and when required take whatever quantity de- 
sired and thin with benzine to consistency of cream. 

Paint — Lead Colored — Take any sufficient quan- 
tity of common litharge, and place it over a fire in a 
shovel; afterwards w^hen sufficiently warm scatter over 
it a little flour of brimstone, which will instantly con- 
vert it into a blackish color, and which, when ground in 
oil, makes a good dark lead color. It dries quickly, 
gets remarkably hard and resists the weather better 
than any lead color. 

Rusting— Preserving Iron Work From — ( i ) The 
material required is a cow's horn (the toy trumpets sold 
in the shops will answer the purpose). Heat the iron 
and rub the edge of the horn over it. If the horn 
smokes a little as you rub it on you will know that the 
iron is hot enough. This will cause the horn to melt, 



20 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

and an imperceptible coating will be left upon the iron 
that will afford complete protection from the damp for 
a year or more on out-door work. On in-door iron 
work it will last indefinitely. 

(2) Iron or steel immersed warm in a solution of 
carbonate of soda (washing soda) for a few minutes 
will not rust. 

Rusting — To Prevent Iron and Steel From— The 
following mixture forms an excellent brown coating for 
preventing iron and steel from rust: Dissolve two 
parts crystallized iron chloride, two antimony chloride 
and one tannin in four of water, and apply with sponge 
or rag and let dry. Then another coat of paint is ap- 
plied, and again another if necessary, until the color 
becomes dark as desired. When dry it is washed with 
water, allowed to dry again, and the surface polished 
with boiled linseed oil. The antimony chloride must 
be as nearly neutral as possible. 

Rust — Removing From Iron or Steel — Cover with 
sweet oil well rubbed on. In 48 hours use unslacked 
lime powdered very fine. Rub it till the rust disap- 
pears. To prevent rust, mix with fat oil varnish four- 
fifths of well rectified spirits of turpentine, Apply the 
varnish by means of a sponge. Articles varnished in 
this manner will retain their brilliancy, and never con- 
tract any spots of rust. It may be applied to copper 
philosophical instruments, etc. 

Rust — Removing From Nickel Plate — To remove 
rust stains from nickel plate, grease the rust stains with 
oil, and after a few days rub thoroughly with a cloth 
moistened with ammonia. If any spots still remain, 
remove them with dilute hydro-chloric acid and polish 
with tripoli. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 21 

Rusting — Preventing Sheet Iron Pipes From — 
The sections should be coated with a coal tar and then 
filled with light wood shavings, and the latter set on 
fire. It is declared that the effect of this treatment 
will be to render the iron practically proof against rust 
for an indefinite period, rendering future painting un- 
necessary. 

Rusting — Keeping Tools From — Take >^ oz. cam- 
phor, dissolve in i lb. melted lard; take off the scum 
and mix in as much black lead (graphite) as will give 
it an iron color. Clean the tools and smear with this 
mixture. After twenty-four hours rub clean with a soft 
linen cloth. The tools v/ill keep clean for months 
under ordinary circumstances. 

Silver — Wash for Cleaning — Take one pound of 
common hard soap, three tablespoonfuls of spirit of 
turpentine, and half a tumblerful of water. Allow the 
soap to dissolve; then boil ten minutes, and before it 
cools add six tablespoonfuls of hartshorn. Make a 
suds of this preparation and wash the article to be 
cleaned with it. 

Soap — For Metal Work — The basis is cocoanut 
oil. Its ingredients are stated to be cocoanut oil 2.05 
kilos, chalk 180 grms., and alum, cream of tartar, and 
white lead, of each 87.5 grms. The oil is melted in an 
iron vessel containing a little water and the other in- 
gredients are added in the order named, while con- 
stantly stirring the mixture. The mixture is then 
decanted into molds wherein it solidifies. In use it is 
made into a paste with water and applied either by 
cotton waste or a rag. 

Solder — Aluminum — Copper 56 parts, zinc 46 parts 
and tin 2 parts, applied with borax. Some tests made 
at Neuhausen showed that with these solders plates of 



22 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

aluminum soldered together, edge to edge, required a 
tractive effort of from i6j^ to i8 tons per square inch 
to pull them asunder, if the edges overlapped, 22% 
tons per square inch were required. Pieces of cast 
aluminum bronze, if placed in sand molds, can be joined 
together autogenously by running in some of the molten 
metal. If this operation is properly carried out the 
joint is indistinguishable from the rest of the casting. 
Thin cylinders of aluminum are made in this way by 
bending the sheets round end to end, and soldering 
with molten aluminum. 

Solder — Aluminum — For sheet aluminum an iron- 
tin solder m.ay be used with a flux composed of resin, 
neutral chloride ^ zinc, and grease. The metal should 
not be cleaned or scraped unless it is absolutely neces- 
sary to do so, in which case alcohol, or essence of tur- 
pentine should be used for the purpose. For 5 per 
cent, aluminum bronze tin solder m.ay be employed, 
but this is not possible with the 10 per cent, alloy, in 
which case a preliminary copper plating is to be re- 
commended. If it is difficult to dip the ends to be 
plated directly into the solution pieces of blotting 
paper soaked in a solution of CuS04 may be laid on 
them and a current passed. The flux mentioned above 
may be used. 

Solder — Aluminum — Cadmium, zinc, and tin mixed 
in substantially the following proportions: Cadmium, 
50 per cent.; zinc, 20 per cent.; tin, the remainder. The 
zinc is first melted in any suitable vessel, when the cad- 
mium is added, and then the tin in pieces. The mass 
must be well heated, stirred, and then poured. 

Solder- — Bismuth — Tin, i; lead, 3; bismuth, 3. 

Solder — Black — Copper, 2; zinc,' 3; tin, 2. Another — 
Sheet brass, 20; tin, 6; zinc, i. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 23 

Solder — Brass — ( i ) Copper, 3 ; zinc, i ; with borax. 

(2) Copper, 6iji(, zinc, 3834. 

Solder — Brass — that will stand hammering. Brass, 
78.26; zinc, 17.41; silver, 4.33; add a little chloride of 
potassium to your borax for a flux. 

Solder — Brass, White — Copper, 57.41; tin, 14.60; 
zinc, 27.99. 

Solder — Brass, Yellow— Copper, 32; zinc, 30; tin, i. 
* (2) Copper, 45; zinc, 55. 

Solder — For Brittania Ware — Hardening — (To 
be mixed separately from the other ingredients) — Cop- 
per, 2; tin, I. 

Solder — For Brittania Ware — Soft — Tin, 8; 
lead, 5. 

Solder — For Raised Brittania Ware — Whited — 
Tin, 100; hardening, 8; antimony, 8. 

Soldering — Cold Without Fire or Lamp — Bis- 
muth, % oz.; quicklime, % oz.; block tin filings, i oz.; 
muriatic acid, i oz.; all mixed together. 

Solder— Copper — (i) Tin, 2; lead, i. When the 
copper is thick heat it by a naked fire; if thin, use a 
tinned copper tool. Use muriate or chloride of zinc as 
a flux. The same solder will do for iron, cast iron or 
steel; if the pieces are thick heat by a naked fire, cr 
immerse in the solder. 

(2) Copper, 10; zinc, 9. 

(3) Brass, 6; zinc, i; tin, i. Melt together well, 
and pour out to cool. 

(4) When it is desired to solder bright copper and 
to have the solder the same color as the copper surface, 
it may be done in this way: Moisten the solder with 
a saturated solution of vitriol of copper and then 
touching the solder with an iron or steel wire, a thin 



24 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

skin of copper is precipitated, which can be thickened 
by repeating the process several times. 

To make the solder brass-colored, if it is desired to 
gild the soldered spot, it is first coated with copper in 
the manner indicated above, and then with gum or is- 
inglass and powdered with bronze powder. The sur- 
face thus obtained may, after drying, be brightly pol- 
ished. 

Solder — Glaziers — Tin, 3; lead, i. 

Solder — Hard — Copper, 2; zinc, i. Melt together. 

Solder — Iron — The best solder for iron is good 
tough brass with a little borax. In soldering, the sur- 
faces to be joined are made perfectly clean and smooth 
and then covered with sal ammoniac, rosin, or other 
flux; the solder is then applied, being melted and 
smoothed over by a tinned soldering iron. 

Solder — Iron to Steel or Either to Brass — Tin, 
3; copper, 39>^; zinc, 7^. When applied in a molten 
state it will firmly unite metals first named to each 
other. 

Solder — Pewter — Lead, i part; bismuth, i to 2 
parts. 

Solder — Pewterer's Soft — Bismuth, 2; lead, 4; 
tin, 3. 

Solder — Platinum — Gold with borax. 

Solder — Plumbers — (i) Bismuth, i; lead, 5; tin. 
3; is a first-class composition. 

(2) Lead, 2 parts; tin, i part. 

Solder — Spelter — Equal parts copper and zinc. 

Soldering — Flux for Steel — Chloride of zinc (mu- 
riate of zinc, killed spirit, made by putting ordinary 
zinc in spirits of salts — hydro-chloric or muriatic acid — 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 2^ 

till action ceases) for use with soldering bit. The above, 
or sai-ammoniac (chloride of ammonia), if the job can 
be heated and rubbed. 

Solder — Steel Joints — Silver, 19; copper, i; brass, 
2. Melt all together. 

Solder — Tinners — Lead, i part; tin, i part. 

Solder — Zinc — Tin, i part; lead, i to 2 parts. 

Stove Polish — Grind any non-combustible black 
pigment with a sufificient quantity of silicate of potash, 
or 'liquid glass,' to make it of a proper consistency for 
application. When the polish becomes dry, it will be 
found to be smooth and shining, wholly without odor, 
and very durable, v/hile it will not soil the whitest cam- 
bric if applied to it. The materials are easily obtained, 
inexpensive, readily mixed and applied, and the article 
will amply repay one for the small amount of trouble 
and outlay it involves. 

Tin»Bronzing — Tin and tin alloys, after careful 
cleansing from oxide and grease, are handsomely and 
permanently bronzed if brushed over with a solution of 
one part of sulphate copper (bluestone), and one part 
of sulphate of iron (copperas) in twenty parts of water. 
When this has dried, the surface should be brushed with 
a solution of one part of acetate of copper (verdigris) 
in acetic acid. After several applications and dryings 
of the last named, the surface is polished with a soft 
brush and bloodstone powder. The raised portions are 
then rubbed off with soft leather moistened with wax 
and turpentine, followed by a rubbing with dry leather. 

Tin Foil — Crystalline Surface for — Take of 
chloride tin, 2 parts; hot water, 4 parts; uriatic 
Acid, 2 parts; nitric acid, i part. Mix. The tin foil 
is dipped in this mixture and left until the crystals ap- 



26 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

pear. Small crystals are obtained when the solution is 
applied cold — large when used hot. The most beauti- 
ful specimens of this kind are produced with varnishes 
colored with the aniline dyes. 

Tinning — Copper, Brass and Iron in the Cold 
Without Apparatus — Carefully clean the article to be 
tinned, seeing that it is free of oxide and grease-spots. 
Chemical or mechanical means may be employed in 
cleaning. Then take the best zinc powder, which may 
be readily obtained by melting zinc and pouring it 
slowly into water in a thin stream, when it can be easily 
pulverized after solidification. It should be about as 
fine as writing sand. Next have ready a solution of 
prolochloride of tin containing about 5 to 10 percent, 
of tin salt, to which as much pulverized cream of tar- 
tar must be added as will go on the point of a knife. 
The object to be tinned may now be moistened with the 
tin solution, after which it should be rubbed hard with 
the zinc powder. The tinning appears at once. The tin 
salt is decomposed by the zinc, metallic tin being de- 
posited. When the article tinned is polished brass or 
copper, it appears as beautiful as if silvered, and retains 
its lustre for a long time. The process is an excellent 
one for preserving iron, steel, copper, and brass instru- 
ments and apparatus from rust. 

Varnish — Black, for Gasolene Stoves — Asphalt- 
um, two pounds; boiled linseed oil, one pint; oil of 
turpentine, two quarts. Fuse the asphaltum in an iron 
pot; boil the linseed oil and add while hot. Stir well 
and remove from the fire. When partly cooled add 
the oil of turpentine. 

Varnish — For Brass — A coat of varnish made in 
the proportion of two ounces of shellac to nine ounces 
of alcohol, will prevent brass from tarnishing. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. ^7 

Varnish — For Bright Iron Work — Dissolve three 
pounds of resin in ten pints boiled linseed oil, and add 
two pounds of turpentine. 

Varnish — Brilliant Black — For cooking and gas- 
olene stoves: asphaltum, two pounds; boiled linseed 
oil, one pint; oil of turpentine, two quarts. Fuse the 
asphaltum in an iron pot, boil the linseed oil and add 
while hot; stir well and remove from the fire. When 
partially cooled add the oil of turpentine. Some 
makers add driers. 

Varnish — Coating Metals — One part of copal, one 
part of oil of rosemary, in two or three parts of ab- 
solute alcohol, supplies a clear varnish as limpid as 
water. It should be applied hot. When dry it will 
prove hard and durable. 

Varnish — Colored for Tin — Thirty grammes of 
acetate of copper are ground into fine powder in a mor- 
tar, then spread out in a thin layer on porcelain plate 
and left for a few days in a moderately warm place. By 
this time the water of crystallization, and most of the 
acetic acid will have escaped. 'The light brov/n powder 
that is left is triturated with some oil of turpentine in 
mortar, and then stirred into one hundred grammes of 
fine fatty copal varnish warmed to 75 degrees C. If 
the acetate of copper is exceedingly fine, the greater 
part of it will dissolve by a quarter hour's stirring. The 
varnish is then put in a glass bottle and placed for a 
few days in a warm place, shaking frequently. 

The small quantity of acetate of copper that settles 
can be used in making the next lot. This varnish is 
dark green, but when applied to tin it requires four or 
five coats to get a fine lustre, but two coats are suffi- 
cient if heated in a drying closet, or on a uniformly 



28 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

heated plate to produce a great variety of shades of 
gold, a greenish gold, a yellow or dark yellow gold, 
then an orange 

Varnish — Durable Black for Iron — Mix with a 
small quantity of oil turpentine, drop by drop, oil of 
vitriol, until it forms a syrupy precipitate which no 
longer increases in bulk. The m.ass is then poured over 
with water, stirred well, the water removed, and repeat- 
ed as often as it shows trace of acid on litmus paper. 
The remaining precipitate is then strained dry, and 
when required for use a portion of it is placed on the 
iron (stove, etc.) and the stove heated and the powder 
burned. If too thick a layer, it must be thinned and 
spread out with more turpentine, so as to give a uni- 
form coating to the metallic surface. The residue left 
after burning is then rubbed in with a rag dipped in 
flax-seed oil, until the proper polish has been acquired. 

Varnish— Gilded Articles — Gum-lac ingrain, 125 
parts; gamboge, 125; dragon's blood, 125; annotto, 125; 
saffron, 32. Each resin must be dissolved in 1,000 
parts by measure of alcohol of 90 per cent; a separate 
tincture must be made of dragon's blood, another of 
annotto in 1,000 parts of such alcohol, and a proper pro- 
portion of each added to the varnish according to the 
shade of golden color wanted. 

Varnish — Gold — Turpentine varnish, 2 gallons; tur- 
pentine, I gallon; asphaltum, i gill; umber, 8 ounces; 
yellow aniline, 4 ounces; gamboge, i pound. Boil and 
mix for 10 hours. 

Varnish — For Iron and Steel — The following var- 
nish will maintain its transparency and the metallic bril- 
liancy of the articles will not be obscured: Dissolve 
ten parts of clear grains of mastic, five parts of cam- 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 2g 

phor, five parts of sandarach and five parts of elemi in 
a sufficient quantity of alcohol, and apply without heat. 

Varnish — Mordant — One of the simplest of these 
varnishes which are chiefly used when a coating of 
some other substance, such as gold leaf, is to be entire- 
ly or in part laid over them, is that procured by dissolv- 
ing a little honey in thick glue. It has the effect of 
greatly heightening the color of the gold. 

Varnish — Smoke Stack — One of the best varnishes 
for smoke-stacks or steam pipes, is good asphaltum 
dissolved in oil of turpentine. 

Zinc — To Blacken — Zinc may be given a fine black 
color by first cleaning its surface with sand and sul- 
phuric acid, and afterward immersing it for a moment 
in asolutiDn composed of 4 parts each of sulphate of 
nickel and ammonia, and 40 parts of water, acidulated 
with I part of sulphuric acid, washing and drying it. 
The black coating adheres firmly, and becomes a bronze 
color under the burnisher. 

Zinc — To Color — A mode of coloring articles of 
cast zinc in black is to take a solution of i*8 oz. chloride 
of antimonyin a pint of alcohol; add to it i'2 oz. hydro- 
chloric acid, and apply with a brush to the zinc which 
is to be blackened. Now dry the object, and, should 
the color not be sufficiently uniform, apply a second 
coat, and again dry as rapidly as possible by the aid of 
heat. The color is permanent and may be improved 
by rubbing with a little linseed oil, which preserves the 
object and" gives it a beautiful polish. 



CHAPTER II. 

PATTERN CUTTING. 

In the following pages will be found several patterns 
for articles in common use, as well as those for rare 
and graceful designs. In selecting this list frequent 
reference has been made to the Tinshop Department of 
The American Artisan and those patterns have been 
selected from its pages which have been most fre- 
quently requested by its readers in the past. 

CONE WITH OVAL BASE AND ROUND TOP. 




Fig. I is the plan, or ellipse; this we divide into 
equal spaces, not necessarily the entire circumference, 
as one-quarter is sufficient. These vre number from i 
upward. 

Fig. 2 is the elevation, which may be as high as cir- 
cumstances require, but the higher it is the less of the 
arc of blank will be taken up, and the lowxr the eleva- 
tion the more will be required. Fig. 3 is_a triangle that 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



31 



is required. From A' to B' is equal to A — B Fig. 2, 
or elevation of cone. Line B', Fig. 3, to C is extended 
indefinitely. We now set dividers at B, Fig. I and 
carry distances the number on circumference is located 
to line B' C, Fig. 3; and number correspondingly. 
Then the distance from A', Fig. 3, to each of these 



23i5ci 




numbers on line B' C, Fig. 3, equals, the distance from 
apex of cone to base after being formed up. 

Fig. 4, or blank, we find by setting dividers at A' 
and 9, Fig. 3, and with A" as a radius strike arc d e; on 
this arc we space on as many spaces as we have in Fig. 
I. If we have only one-quarter of Fig. i spaced off, 
we space off the remaining three-fourths of blank, and 
number accordingly (see Fig. 4); then we carry each 
line numbered from i to 9 in Fig. 3, to corresponding 
numbers in Fig. 4, ueing A', Fig. 3, and A\ Fig. 4, as 
radii. Then by tracing through each of these lines at 
points of cutting, we have the pattern in its entirety. 
Should the cone be a large one, of necessity we should 



32 



WORKSHOP MANUAL." 



be obliged to divide our blank into two or four pieces; 
if the latter, and we have already spaced our plan only 




one-fourth, then the same number of spaces need only 
be observed in blank. 



TO DESCRIBE AN ELLIPSE. 

Let a b, be the given major axis; bisect a b, at e; 
through e, draw c d, at right angles to a b, equal to the 
semi-major axis; place one point of dividers at e, the 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



33 



other at c, and transfer on line e b, which is f; then di- 
vide the space between e f in three equal parts, and add 
one of the parts which is g, the centre of end radius, by- 
placing the dividers at g a, and transfer it to line c d. 
We have the side radius with h as center, and g as cen- 
ter of end; we mark line h k, and treat the others in the 
same manner; this enables us to find the exact section 
of end and side circle by placing foot of compasses on 




h and c; describe side circle and with the foot at g, de- 
scribe end circle. The dotted lines represent the bot- 
tom for a pan. In describing the body, Fig. 2, let a b 
be the given center-line; at right angles to a b, mark a c, 
equal to one-half the diameter of side circle, which is 
from h, to d; Fig. i, the bottom line e'd, Fig. 2, is equal 
to m n, Fig. i. From the point c d, mark radius line 
c d b, w^ith foot of compasses at b. We describe circle 
h a f, equal in length to q r, Fig. t, and having thus 



34 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



found side section we mark f g b, Fig. 2» with f g b, as 
center line, and at right angles to it mark f i and g j, 
equal to g p, and g b, Fig. i, and from the points found, 
mark radius line k s m, with m as center mark circle 







equal in length to section of circle r b, Fig. i; this 
gives one half of body, all edges to be allowed. In Fig- 
ure 3, the cover, it is necessary to find the pitch, which 
is from e, to 8, and e, to 3. Set compasses at 5, and 4, 
Fig. I, in Fig. 3, with 5 as center, describe circle 4, to 4, 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 35 

equal to end circle of Fig. i, and through 5, mark 451; 
set compasses from i, to 2, Fig. i, in Fig. 3, set com- 
passes one foot at 4, and the other i, and describe side 
circle equal in length to q r, Fig. i. Again set com- 




. Fig. 3 

passes for end circle and we describe one half of end 
section with one foot of compasses at 4; we divide the 
distance betvyeen 4, and b, which is the center, then 
mark lines 4, 4, to c; add locks and the pattern is found. 

PATTERN FOR A TAPERING OVAL VESSEL. 

Describe the bottom, the height and breadth as in 
Fig. 14: describe the body as in Fig. 15 and 16; describe 
the right angle A B C Fig. 15; make B E the altitude; 
draw the line D E at right angle to B C; make F E 
equal to G H in Fig. 14; make G B equal to F E and 
the taper required on a side; draw a line cutting the 
joints G and F and the line B C. On any right line as 
A B in Fig. 16, with the radius H F and H G, describe 
the arcs C D and E F; set off C D equal to I G F in 
Fig. 14; draw the lines E C and F G cutting the center 
at G Fig. 15, make D E equal to A B in Fig. 14; make 



36 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



A B equal to D E and the taper required on a side; 
draw a line cutting the points A and D and the line B 
C with the radius C D and in Fig. i6, with I and H as 
centers, cut the lines G L and G M asat M and L; with 
M and L as centers describe the arcs H I and H I also 
the arcs J K and J K; set off H I and H I equal to I B 
in Fig. 14; draw the lines J H and K I cutting the cen- 
ters L and M Fig. 1 5 ; make I E equal to C D in Fig. 14; 




make J B equal to I E and the taper required on a side; 
draw a line cutting the points J and I and the line B C 
with the radius K I, and in Fig. 16, O and N as centers, 
cut the lines L B and M B as at B and S with R and S 
as centers; describe the arcs N O and N O also the arcs 
P O and P Q; set off N O and N O equal to B D in 
Fig. 14; draw the lines Q O and P N, cutting the cen- 
ters at S and R, 



WORiCSHOP MANUAL. 



37 



The taper must be equal on all sides* Edges to be 
allowed. The pattern can be cut in any number of sec- 
tions. 

PATTERN FOR HOPPER BY TRIANGULATION. 




JmnNo,l 






The first 'step in developing the form is to draw a 
plan as No. i, a, b, c, d, which represents the top of the 
hopper. The ellipse E represents the outlet. In order 
to determine their relative positions it is necessary to 
draw the front and side elevations; having done this 
we drop lines x, y, z, x' y' z' x" y" z" at points of in- 
tersections. In a' b' c' d' we have the position of 
our ellipse; lines z and y" cut and divide the ellipse 
into quarters; these we divide into any desired number 
of spaces and number as shown by Figs, i, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. 
We are now ready to construct our triangles on plan, 
and by looking over our work and considering our ele- 
vations and form of same, we find that points a, b, c, d 
are the only proper points at which to concentrate our 
lines. We accordingly drop lines from these points to 
figures on oval, as shown on plan No. i. For conven- 
ience in developing pattern we number our triangles as 



38 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



shown, I, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8;these numbers also show the 
relative position the triangles bear to one another (the 
form of hopper we see calls for 8 triangles and every 
one is of a different form; these 8 are divided into 4 
upper and 4 lower triangles, or 4 with their base down 
and 4 up. The base of the 4 upper correspond with the 
sides of the article; the hypothenuse corresponds with 
those of the adjoining lower triangle; and since the 
upper triangles are perfectly flat, and their bases form a 




rectangle, we only have use for 4 triangles to work 
from. To show to those who are studying pattern 
drafting that this is the case, and to avoid confusion I 
draft plans No. 2 and triangle No. 5, which if they take 
dividers and carry lines 1,2, 3, 4, 5, 6 to triangle No. 5 
in pattern, they will find that the numbers correspond. 
I might add that if the top of the hopper were round or 
oval then we would be obliged to make use of this sec- 
ond set of triangles). We are now ready to form our 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



3Q 



triangles. We take the depth of the article for the 
length of the perpendicular line; draw a line at right 
angle to this indefinitely. These triangles we number 
2, 4, 6, 3 respectively, or a, b, c, d, which show us where 
they belong and their respective positions. We then 
set dividers at a in plan and extend to Fig. i, as indi- 
cated by line running from a to i. Carry this to tri- 
angle numbered or lettered accordingly, and all the dis- 






O 



tances to figures on oval we carry to triangles, as ^hown; 
having done this we are ready to describe our pattern. 
For this purpose we must determine our starting point, 
and there are none better than line y in our plan and 
elevation. We will also place our seam on this line; we 
draw line y and with our dividers on c extended to n' ; 
this gives us the base of the left portion of triangle No. 
I ; this we carry to and at right angles to line y in pat- 



40 WORKSHOP MANUAL* 

tern; ilow we set dividers at n in triangle No. 2 and ex- 
tend to Fig. I ; carry this to pattern set at c6 and at 
point of intersection on line y is the depth of pattern at 
this point. We now carry all the remaining lines in 
triangle No. 2 to pattern and space to correspond with 
Spaces in oval. We are now ready for triangle No. 3. 
Line 6 in triangle No. 2 is the length of one side; from 
c to a in plan the length of base and line 6 in triangle 
No. 4 the other side, or from a' back to 6. We pro- 
ceed from this point on with each of the triangles, in 
the same manner, and finish up right portion of triangle 
No. I in same manner as the left portion and the pat- 
tern is the result, 

PATTERN FOR A CIRCULAR TOP BOILER COVER. 

A B C D, Fig. I, represents the boiler for which 
cover is required, G E the height it is to have when 
made. With dividers sweep circle that will touch 
points C E D. 

At right-angles to A B (which is center line through 
the boiler) draw A I — Q 4 — and G G' indefinitely. At 
the point G', Fig. 2, erect the line G' I which will be 
parallel with the center line of boiler. With the divid- 
ers set as G to E, Fig. i, place one leg on G' and sweep 
the quarter-circle as shown on Fig. 2. Divide same 
into equal parts (in this case four) and erect lines from 
the points thus established till they touch the line 
G' E'. Now divide the quarter-circle A, in Fig. i, 
into four equal parts and carry lines parallel with A I 
until they meet the line G' I, Fig. 2, and from there to 
the points previously obtained on the line G' E, all as 
shown in diagram. Now take the distance O 4, Fig. 2, 
and transfer same to Fig. i, as presented by G F, and 
sweep circle to strike points C F D as shown. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



41 



On the line A I, which has been continued indefi- 
nitely, and at any convenient point, as at H, drop the 
perpendicular line H K, Fig. 3. Divide the segment 
of circle D E, Fig. i, into four equal parts and transfer 




same to Fig. 3, spacing and marking the points on each 
side of K. Likewise with the chord of circle repre- 
sented by D T, Fig. i, transferring same distance on 
each side of P, Fig. 3, establishing the points Q and R. 



45 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



Now sweep a circle which will strike Q H R. Draw 
the side lines Q S and R M. Return again to Fig. i 
and set dividers same as in spacing off the one-fourth 
circle from A to N and on the circle just struck in Fig 
3. Commencing at H, mark on each side the points 
1234; draw lines from these points on circle to dotted 
marks on line S K M indefinitely. Take the distance 
from I, to E\ Fig. 2, and with one point of dividers on 
H, Fig. 3, mark point X, take distance from i to corre- 
sponding number on line G' E\ Fig. 2, and transfer- 
ing to Fig. 3, mark point i on each side of X continu- 
ing till all these triangular distances, as also 4 G', are 
thus taken from Fig. 2 and marked on Fig. 3, A free- 
hand line drawn through the intersecting points com- 
pletes the required pattern. Add for seams. 

GRECIAN MOULDINGS. 





Ho, 1 No. 2 

It will be seen that these are sections of mouldings 
produced in a perfect form and when combined with a 
tasteful selection of others a perfect mould is the re- 
sult. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



43 



Let A B be the height and B D be the projection; 
the point C is one-sixth of A B, the point H is two- 
thirds of the distance from C to B. The distance H B 
is transferred to H E, a line is drawn from C to E 
which is divided into five equal spaces, from C to H is 



Cyma recia 
d 




No. 3 



divided into five equal spaces, and the space is also 
placed. From E to F lines are drawn as indicated. 
A C G represents a square. Use G as center and strike 



Cyma recta 



Cyma reverea 





quarter circle. The profile line from C to D is traced 
through the intersection of the other lines. 

No. 2 — Ovolo is on nearly the same principle as 
No. I with the exception that A C is divided in half 
and the distance C D is the same as B E. 



44 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



Let A B be the height and B C the projection. Di- 
vide A D into four equal parts; the line A F into four 
equal parts, and lines are drawn as shown by drawing. 
The point E is equal to A D from F. The profile line 
is drawn, free hand, through the points of intersec- 
tion. 

Scotia 




No. 6 



No. 4 — Cyma recta is on the same principle as No. 3, 
it being shown on a smaller scale. 

Let A B be, say, on 30 degrees. A C is very nearly 
the width of mould. We proceed as in the third and 
fourth ones. The distance C D is merely an extension 
of profile line. 

A E and C B are on 60 degrees and the distance 
apart of the projection of mould. Now divide EC 
and A B into four equal parts each, and the line A E 
into eight equal parts. The point D is the same dis- 
tance from the mould as the line A B. Then draw 
lines as shown. Draw the profile line, free hand, 
through the points of intersection, which finishes the 
mould. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



45 



PATTERNS FOR A SMOKE STACK. 

Figure l shows a view of the base for a stack de- 
signed according to common-sense principles. The flat 




bottom part of the base is made of a size that will fit the 
top of a chimney snugly; then to this part is attached 
the tapering part b, and to the top of part b the round 
pipe can be extended to any height desired. Fig. 2 
shows the relative positions that a base made after 
the usual style as shown in the figure by dotted line§ 



46 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



has to one made after the style shown by Fig. i. It will 
be seen at a glance wherein the style Fig. i shows many 
points that would recommend it over the old style. A few 
of these are that this design leaves no dead space on 
the inside of a base, as Fig. 2 shows at a a \ as is the 
case with the style shown by the dotted lines. 

This dead space generally fills up with cold air, which 
in turn tends to retard the smoke ascending through 









s 








/ \ 




I ^ 


£ 








4 


C 


\ 




/ 


di 








/ 




\ 


4/ 




4 


\' ' 'J 




\. , Tj 








A 









the^chimney by creating eddies and cooling the hot 
gases and smoke passing up. None of these disturban- 
ces are present in a stack like Fig. i. Instead, an even 
draught is the result, by reason of the smooth surface 
which it presents to the ascending column of smoke. 
Then this style cap does not require half as much iron 
to construct it as one of the other kind does; conse- 
quently it can be made cheaper. The base or bottom 
part of the joint C, as shown by Fig. 2, should be made 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



47 



a trifle wider and longer than the inside of the flue of 
the chimney is into which the base is to fit. This will 
give a solid bearing for it to rest upon in case the height 
and weight of the joints above this joint should demand 
a more substantial rest than the square base a, Fig. I, 
could give to the same. 

The base a of Fig. i can be cut of one piece, as shown 
by Fig. 3. From a to b is the size of the top of the 
chimney. The square opening, c o d, is cut somewhat 




smaller on the four sides, as shown; these are turned'up 
and the tapering stack is riveted to them. The sides 
of the base are to be cut wide enough so as to cover the 
bricks down to the first projection, as shown by X X of 
Fig. 2. The four sides are shown in the pattern, Fig.3, 
by e, f g and h; e and f have laps allowed at the ends of 
each to rivet the sides g and hto when the base, Fig. 3, 
is formed up to shape. 

Fig. 4 shows one-half of the tapering first-joint laid 



48 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



out after the usual methods used for a joint round at 
one end and square or rectangular at the other. The 
entire tapering joint can for most cases be laid out in 
one piece. The dotted lines shown in Fig. 4 are where 
the break occurs between the rounding and flat surfaces 
of this stack. A, b, c and D is one of the sides; if a 
common tinners' square is taken and laid even with the 





k \/ 


\->S 


\l 






1 


1^^^^^^^^ \ 




rj^f. \ 




^— -r=^^ 




X 



line b d of Fig. 4, or as shown more plainly by Fig. 5, 
at line b d, then the blade of the square cutting the 
center line X X at V establishes V, the point where the 
sweep or curve b k cuts the center line X X. This point 
is just one-half the distance between points S and P of 
line X X. The correct points of intersection of the ra- 
dius once established for one side, it becomes a very 
simple matter to join the other sides to it. The distance 
from point k to point ni or n is one quarter the distance 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



49 



around the circumference which the round pipe that 
fits the tapering joint has. The size that the round pipe 
is made usually for ordinary chimneys is from 6 to g'' 
in diameter, 7'' being the size most used. Allow forall 
locks or laps. 



'STRING AND NAIL" OVAL. 




Let A C be the long axis; set compasses on A; open 
until its radius exceeds one-half the length of long axis. 
Mark i 2. Set compass on C and cross i to 2; extend 
a line through from i to 2 and you have your position 
for short axis, which is B E. The distance from B to 
L and O and E to L and O is one-half the long axis. 
Drive small wire nails in at L and O, over which loop a 
string of the exact length of long axis, as shown by 
the dotted lines; H is pencil and shows different posi- 
tions of string as it is being moved around the oval. 



50 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 
THE SIDE OF AN OCTAGON. 




Let the outlines of Fig. i represent the given square. 
To find one side of octagon: First describe a circle 
touching the lines of the square as shown in diagram. 
Then with the square or straight edge placed at cor- 
ners A B mark line C B running from corner to and 
touching circle at C. Next measure line C B, and make 
line E D from C to D and from C to E equal to C B in 
length; which will make the whole line E D as long 
again as line C B. Each corner measured as above 
described will form a perfect octagon. 



TO DESCRIBE PATTERNS FOR FLARING VESSELS. 

Lay off Fig. i, distance from A to B equal to diam- 
eter of top, H to F, the height D E diameter of bot- 
tom. Draw lines from A B, touching D E till they in- 
tersect, which is marked C. Stretch compass from C 
to A; with compass thus set, draw part of circle and 
measure off with a piece of tin bent to suit circle the 
required circumference. Draw lines from these points 
(i, 2) of measurements to where leg of compass was 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



51 



placed, which is- marked 4; stretch compass from C to 
D and draw circle between lines 3, 5. 




If desired to make in pieces divide the circumfer- 
ence of top by the number of pieces wanted. 



52 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 
PATTERN FOR AWASH BOILER COVER. 

B 




Draw circle the size of boiler body measured outside 
of rim. Erect line A B. Let the distance from center 
C to D be equal to half-length of cover, or body. Mark 
off from D, on line toward B, the pitch intended for 
cover. Then with corner of square on horizontal line 
D, and the blades touching circle and point E, draw 
lines, which gives the pattern. 



PATTERN FOR A CAN BREAST OR PITCHED COVER. 

The enclosed pattern is my rule for a pitched cover 
or can breast, of any given size or pitch, which may be 
a somewhat longer way of attaining it, but is much 
more simple than any other rule I have seen to produce 
this. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



53 



To develop this pattern proceed thus: 

Draw A (B, A, C) indefinitely. 

Make (A B)= to J^ diam. of can or article you wish 
breast or cover for. 

Make (A C)= to height of pitch you wish for either 
breast or cover. 

Draw (ED) indefinitely and at (R) angles to (a c,) 




and distance from (C) to be y^ diameter of opening 
you wish for can breast or (C E.) 

Set compasses on points (C and B) and produce 
the circle (B. I. J.) complete to (B) again. 

Draw line connecting (B and C) intersecting the line 
(E D) atJD.) 

Set compasses on points (C and D) and produce the 
article (D. F. G. H.) complete to (D) again. 

Set compasses on points (A and B) and from the 



54 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

point (B), step off six times this space from (A to B) 
(or y^ diam. of can), as Figs, (i) (2) (3) (4) (S) (6); 
at the point (6) (J) draw the line (J C), allow for locks 
as dotted line is, cut out circle (D F G A H) when for 
a can breast, and omit this when a pitched cover is 
wanted, also omit line (E D) and circle (D F G H) in 
pitched covers, (B. I. J. H. G. F. D.) to (B) again, is 
the pattern for can breast. 

(B. I. J. H. C. D.) to (B) again, is pattern for 
pitched cover. 

PATTERN FOR A ''Y." 

A, D, E, I, K, S and B, Fig. i, represent the Y and 
are shown by the heavy lines. In I is the line dividing 
the Y into equal parts and where they are to be joined. 
Protract the lines A D and I E upward indefinitely; 
span the dividers from D to M and with one leg on D 
mark the point G, and also on E mark the point H and 
draw a line across. Now continue the lines I E and A 
D in the other direction until they meet at the point X, 
which will be the center from which to construct the 
pattern. With the point C as a center describe a semi- 
circle (to touch the points H and G), which divide into 
equal parts (in this case eight) and number the same 
as in diagram. Drop perpendicular lines from the 
points thus established until they strike the line G H 
and from thence to the center X. From the points 
where these lines cross I M and M A draw lines par- 
allel with G H until they meet the line GAD. 

On any right line, as X, H, Fig. 2, with the compasses 
spanning from Xto G, Fig. i, sweep a circle indefinitely. 
With the compasses set as in dividing the semi-circle 
H and G in Fig. i, and commencing at H, Fig. 2, mark 
sixteen spaces on the circular line just struck (or eight 
if the pattern is to be made into two pieces). In this 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



55 



Case it IS marked to be in one piece. Draw the line X 
H and also from the points thus established to the cen- 
ter X and mark and number as in Fig. 2 Now sweep 
circles from all the points established on the line D G 
in Fig. I, as well as the circle D N, continuing until 




they intersect the line X H''. A free-hand line drawn 
through the intersection of these lines will be the pat- 
tern for one-half of Y. The same pattern will answer 
for the other half. Seams to be allowed as shown by 
the dotted lines. 



56 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 
CHIMNEY TOP PATTERN. 




Make the horizontal line c d equal to the longest 
side of base. Make the line a b at right angles to a d; 
let a e be the height minus the flange. Draw the line 
f g parallel to c d; let f g be equal in length to one- 
fourth the circumference of top. Draw the lines g d 
and c e. Make the line k g parallel with a e; make a j 
equal to one-half the shortest side of base. Now with 
the radii k j describe the arcs 1 and m with f and g as 
centers. Draw the lines i d n and h c o and set off d n 
and o c equal to a j ; make b n and b o at right angles 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



S7 



to d n and o c. With the radii b c describe the arc per 
using b as center. Extend s o, t c, x d and n y on lines 
with o b, c h, i d and n b; make s o, t c, x d and n y 
equal to height of flange (usually four inches). Make 
V c and w d at right angles to c d; make v c and w d 
equal to height of flange. Draw the lines s t, v w and 
X y. All edges on this pattern are to be allowed. 



RULE FOR OBTAINING THE SIDE OF AN OCTAGON 
OF ANY GIVEN SQUARE. 




Let the outlines of Fig. i represent the given square. 
To find one side of octagon: First describe a circle 
touching the lines of the square as shown in diagram. 
Then with the square or straight edge placed at cor- 
ners A B mark line C B running from corner to and 
touching circle at C. Next measure line C B, and make 
line E D from C to D and from C to E equal to C B in 
length, which will make the whole line E D as long 
again as line C B. Each corner measured as above 
described will form a perfect octagon. 



S8 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

TO DESCRIBE AN OVAL OF ANY LENGTH OR WIDTH. 

K 




Make the line A A the desired length of oval. Bi- 
sect this with the indefinite line K, and on this line 
make B B, the desired width. Then with one point of 
dividers at O, the center of oval, mark the C C equal to 
three-fourths of the difference between the two diame- 
ters; then with one point of compass on points C C with 
the radius C A describe the circle R R. Now with A A 
as center and the same radius cut these circles at V V 
V V, then the V's will be points in the curves. Take 
the distance from center O to circle R on line A A and 
set off one each side of oval on line K this distance as 
X X, then will from the points X X to the opposite B 
B be the radius for the sides of the oval. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 59 

PATTERN FOR A PRAIRIE CHIMNEY. 

1st. Draw elevation as indicated in Fig. i. A rep- 
resents pitch of roof for chimney on side of roof. B 
represents pitch for chimney on comb of roof; strike arc 
as shown from C to D, or from o to lo; divide this arc 




into equal spaces; draw lines and number as shown in 
plan of elevation. 

For the blank, since our elevation shows by its di- 

18" 




mensions that the arc in blank is greater than our divid- 
ers will strike, we will take our diameters 6 and 7x3 = 
i8 and 21. We strike line E, and with a square strike 
ines F G and H I at right angles with line E and 9 and 



60 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

lOJ^ inches on either side of line E, which equals i8" 
and 21 '' as shown in blank. Strike lines connecting F 
H and G I: place square on these latter lines and strike 
lines I J — H J — F Kand G K; at right angles to do with 
G I and F H; bisect distance between K L and J M. 
This gives the point cut by arc, which may be made by 
placing a rule, either wood or steel, on F G and spring 
to N, and describing along the same H I and springing 
to O and describing complete arcs of blank. (If we 
take line H I and add thereto M O we find it equal H 
O I or7x 3. 1416 approximately, ornear enough to work 
by.) Now divide this blank into twice as many spaces 
as arc in Fig. i and number as shown in Fig. 2. With 
dividers carry distance from lines X Yto A B; pitch of 
roof respectively to blank and on lines that correspond 
in number, trace through these points and we have A', 
Fig. 2, for pattern for chimney for side of roof and B' 
for pattern for comb of roof. A collar for corner of 
chimney may be described in the same manner as the 
latter pattern above. 

PATTERN FOR MEASURE LIP. 




WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



6l 



Fig. I represents the measure with lip. Fig. 2. Draw 
X Y and lines A B and C P at right angles to it, mak- 
ing distance A C equal to dotted line A B, Fig. i. On 
line A B, Fig. 2, lay off from A to M one-half diameter 
of top of lip, which is distance C B, Fig. i. On line C 
P lay off from C to M one-half diameter top of measure, 
which is distance C G, Fig. i. Draw line through M 




and N until it intersects X Y at L. Now with L as cen- 
ter and radii L N strike arc G H I. Span dividers C N 
and span twice on arc each side of point H, which will 
locate points G and I. Make G D and I T equal to E 
D, Fig. I. Span dividers M N and from H locate 
point E. Draw line D E, Fig. 2, and through its cen- 



62 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



ter at right angles draw line R K until it intersects X Y 
at K. Now with K as center and K E radii strike arc 
D E T and you have it. This will give strainer pail lip 
by spanning three times each way from point H. 

PATTERN FOR A PITCHED COVER. 




Draw circle the size of rim; then place square in cen- 
ter and draw ABC. If for a two-inch pitch measure 
two inches from B down (D represents two inches), 
then place one leg of dividers at C and the other at D 
and draw line E. Then span dividers from E to B and 
space three times on each side of A; mark lines F L 
and the pattern is done. Allow for all locks and edges. 
Dotted lines show them. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 
METHOD OF DESCRIBING AN ELLIPSE. 



63 



To develop an ellipse of any given length and width 
desired: The outer, or larger circle is the length; the 




inner, or smaller, the width. Space off each of the cir- 
cles in as many spaces as may be desired. 



ROMAN MOULDINGS. 

Five methods for obtaining profiles of the simplest 
of Roman mouldings. 

Divide line a, b into three equal parts; divide one- 
third into five equal parts, place two-fifths to the right 
and three-fifths to the left of line a, b on c, d; with d 
as center, strike arc a, e. 



64 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



Fig. 2 IS square; with a as center the arc b, c is made; 
it can be seen that by joining the two together it pro- 
duces a correct O, G profile. 




Make the square a, b, c, d; mark line a, e, c with e 
as center; mark circle touching the four corners with a 

Cyma recta 

H 




Jig. 3 



as center; mark section of circle g, e, h with c as cen- 
ter; mark section of circle k, e, f; mark line g, e, f; 
with g, and f as center mark the profile line a, e, a. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



65 



Mark the line n, c the required height and the line 
a, b at 45 degrees passing through f the center from c, 





Cvma 


reversa 




/ 


-^TK 




/ 


^ 


N 1 


'\ 



Fig. 4 

d; with f as center mark the large circle; with a, and b 
as center mark the section of circles g, f, h and k, f, s; 



A < 


•» 







J 


Torus 


r, 


M 


L 




bl 





Pig. 5 
mark the lines g, h and k, I; with c and n as centers 
mark the profile line b, f, a. 



66 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



Mark the line a, b, divide it into three equal parts: 
divide one of the thirds into five equal parts; lay off on 
)ine b, e one of the thirds which will produce the line 
c, d; mark the line f, g and h, k; with 1 as center mark 
profile line d, m; with c as center mark profile line, n. o 



GOTHIC PROFILES. 

Fig. I — Let A B, be the height and C D the pro- 
jection. Draw the lines A E, C F, B G and C H 
all on a 45 degree from centers to intersect theJine as 
indicated; the lines C H and C I are the same length 
as C G, which produces the two squares. With A as 
center strike arc D B and witlf B, as center the arc D 
A. A profile line is marked from A to D and from 





D to E. With F as center strike the dotted line. Di- 
vide E B into one-half and strike profile line, E B. 

It will be understood that the two squares are pro- 
duced in the same manner through all of them, the 
height and projection are also known and it is needless 
to explain so clearly in the other seven of them. 

Fig. 2 — Draw the profile line, A B and B C; use H 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



67 



as center and strike arc, C D. Divide I J into one-half; 
lay off from E to F that distance and strike the circle 
DE. 





Fig. 3 — Strike the section of circle which is pro- 
duced by spacing up the line A B three times the 
height of mold C D. Mark the line I J; use J as center 



68 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

and strike the circle L M, which passes through E and 
extends down, which produces the center for the circle 
M N; the distance O K is the same as K L. With F as 
center strike the circle C P. 

Fig. 4 — The profile circle A B is produced in the 
same way as (No. 3) the point, E is half of B C, a line 
drawn from it to point D. The point G is half the dis- 
tance of E C. A line drawn to F at 45 degrees, with 
D as center strike the circle F H; with L as center 
strike the circle F I parallel line D E; mark the line N 
M touching the circle F I; now mark the circle from 
the point N passing through point O which, when 
carried down, gives the center for the circle J C. 

Fig. 5 — Mark the profile line A B, touching the 
square at C, prolong the line J to I; use I as center and 
strike the circle which will touch the line at O; extend. 
A R which will produce the center for the circle E F 
The horizontal line is marked from the point R to cut 
the circle E F. From R is measured down the radius 
of the xjrcle E F; mark the line S H, and where the line 
R cuts the circle, drop the line which produces the 
center for the circle F G. 

Fig. 6 — The lines A B and C are at right angles. 
Divide the distance from Dto E on blue line, into one- 
half which is the center for the profile [circle D E, 
which is extended down O, which is half the distance 
AD. 

TEE PIPE PATTERN. 

To describe a pattern of a T pipe at any angle: 
Draw the line A E; erect the line A B, the angle re- 
quired; also the line E D parallel to A B. Make B D 
equal to the diameter of the pipe; describe the semi- 
circle BCD; draw the line F G parallel to B D; divide 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



69 



the semi-circle into any number of equal parts; from 
the points draw lines parallel to A B, as i, 2, 3, etc. 

Set off the line ABC equal in length to the circum- 
ference of the pipe, and the lines A F, B D and C F at 




right angles to A C. Set off on each side of B D the 
same number of equal distances as in the semi-circle 
BCD, and from the points draw lines parallel to B D, 
as I I, 2 2, 3 3, etc. Make B D equal to A B, and E A 
and C F equal to to E D; also each of the parallel lines 




{196765 t3^ 



bearing the same figures, as i i, 2 2, 3 3,etc. Then a 
line traced through the points will form the required 
pattern. 

Allow for edges, 



;o 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



TO DESCRIBE A PATTERN FOR A FOUR-PIECe 

ELBOW. 




'tA98 7 6 



3 2\8 



Three and four piece elbows have very largely taken 
the place of the old right-angled elbow, on account of 
their better appearance, and also because they lessen 
obstruction to draft. The machine-made article is kept 
in stock for all common sizes, but the tinner is liable to 
be called upon at any time to make such an elbow, on 
account of stock being sold that is of unusual size, or 
other cause. Herewith are given diagrams and explana- 
tions which will enable any tinner to construct a pattern 
for any desired size. 

Let ABED, Fig. i, be the given elbow; draw the 
line FC; make FM equal in length to one-half the 
diameter of the elbow, with F as a center; describe the 
arc KL; divide the arc KL into three equal parts; draw 
the lines FH and FI; also the line IH; divide the sec- 
tion HK into two equal parts, and draw the line FG; 
draw the line AB at right angles to BC; describe the 
semi-circle ANB; divide the semi-circle into any num- 
ber of equal parts; from the points draw lines parallel 
to BC, as I, 2, 3, etc. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



71 



Set off the line ABC, Fig. 2, equal in length to the 
circumference of elbow AB; erect the lines AF, BD 
and CE; set off on each side of the line BD the 
same number of equal distances as in the semi-circle 
ANB; from the points draw lines parallel to BD as i, i, 
2, 2, etc.; make BD equal to BG; make AF and CE 
equal to AJ; also each of the parallel lines, bearing the 
same number as i, i, 2, 2, 3, 3, etc.; then a line traced 




987664324 6l2d466789Q 



through the points will form the first section; make FG 
and EJ equal to HI; reverse section No. i; place E at 
G and F at J; trace a line from G to J; make GH and 
JI equal to PO, Fig. 67, or to DK, Fig. 6S, take Sec. 
No. I, place F at H and E at I, and trace a line from H 
to I; this forms Sec. No. 3 and 4, 
Edges to be allowed. 



72 



WORKSHOP MAI^UAL. 



A TAPERING, ROUND-CORNERED SQUARE RESER- 
VOIR. 

Diagrams and rules for constructing pattern for a 
tapering round-cornered square reservoir are herewith 
given: 
Fig. I the upright height. Take the perpendicular 

Fig. I is the size, top and bottom. ( A C F H D B G 
E is the top, and IKNPLJOMis the bottom), and 
height ad, Fig. I, and mark it off from h to k. Fig. III. 



Fig- /^i 



^ 



Take the radius for the corners dC, Fig. I, and mark it 
off from h to i, Fig. Ill, also the radius dK; mark off 
from K to 1, drawing a line from il to cut the line hK, 
which gives the slanting height and the radius required 
for striking the corners. Draw the lines IK and AC, 
Fig. IV, the same length as IK, Fig. II, and the same 
distance apart as 1 to i. Fig. Ill, prolong the lines AI 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



71 



and CK, Fig. IV, till Ac and Cd equals to i m, Fig.III 
With radius dC, Fig. IV, using d and c as centers, strike 
the curves CF and AE, and with radius dK, Fig. IV, 
using the same centers, strike the curves KN and IM. 
Take the length of the large quarter circle DH, Fig. II, 
and dot off the same distance from C to F, Fig. IV; 
make AE equal to CF, and draw lines from E and Fto 
the centers c and d; draw EG and MO at right angles 
with Ec. Take the distance from A to C and make the 
same distance from E to G and M to O, Fig. III. Draw 



Fig.n y 



^g m 




Ge parallel to Ec. From G mark off point e, the same 
length as E to c, then using e as center, strike the curves 
GB and OJ, making the curve GB equal to AE; draw 
the line from B to center c draw BT and JR at right 
angles to Be, taking the distance from B to S, Fig. II, 
mark off the same distance from B to S, and J to R, 
draw SR parellel with Be, and proceed in the same 
manner with the other end; adding on the laps, as shown 
will make the pattern complete in one piece, being 
joined together at RS. 



74 



WORKSHOP Manual. 



RULE FOR ROUND ELBOWS. 



A quick rule for striking a round elbow pattern with 
three or four pieces. 

Fig. I represents a three-piece elbow. It is cut the 
following way: First divide your circumference into 



1 

1 

1 

k 






E 




1 
1 


1 
1 

1 










1 
1 


( 


Jf? 








1 


• 




c 




^ 




1 












^\ 


1 
1 




ct 








\ 

1 



/^ 



^^/. 



four equal parts E and C C, then draw line D. Set di- 
viders from A to B, which is i in. more than one-half 
the circumference. For instance, we will take a 6 in. 



^c^ ^, 



2^<g 3 



elbow. The circumference is l8;^ in. (not including 
locks), one half of same is 9 7-16 in.; we set dividers 
10 7-16 in. Then set on line and describe from C to C 
and from C to B, which gives the pattern; or you can 
make a pattern after having the dividers set as Fig. 2 



I 



WORKSHOP MANOAL. 



75 



and cut in half gives you Fig. 3. You can lay on line 
D and describe. For a four piece elbow you set divid- 
ers I in. more than three-fourths the circumference, and 



f 
1 

1 

1 
1 






E 






s 

• 

1 
I 

1 
1 


1 








^^^ 




A 
1 

1 


1 

r 




^ 


' 






1 

1 


:> 

1 


— -^ 


C 




^- 






1 
1 












M 


1 
1 


1 


a 












1 


I 














U 



tin 



7^€g. ^ 



proceed the same as for three-piece as in Fig. 4. This 
rule is very handy for all sizes of pipe and very handy 
for hot air pipes, etc. 



76 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



PATTERN FOR A METAL BALL. 

Take a 3 in. ball; draw a circle 3 inches in diameter 
(Fig. i), with T as center. Divide it into as many 




^S'Jt 



IS 

parts as desired. This is divided into thirds. Raise 
pieces to fit your drawing; allow edges for laps. 



I 



CHAPTER III. 

niSCELLANEOUS TABLES. 



NUMBER BRICKS REQUIRED TO CONSTRUCT ANY 

BUILDING. 

(Reckoning 7 Bricks to each superficial foot.) 



Superficial ft. 
of wall. 



I. 
2. 

3. 
4. 
5. 
6. 

7. 
8. 

9- 

10. 

20. 

30. 

40. 

50. 

60. 

70. 

80, 

90, 
100 
200 
300 
400 
500 
600 
700 
800 
900 
1000 



Number of Bricks to Thickness of 



4 inch. 8 inch. 12 inch. 16 inch. 30 inch. 24 inch, 



7 
15 
23 
30 
38 
45 
53 
60 
68 

75 
150 
225 
300 

375 
450 

525 
600 

675 
750 
1,500 
2,250 
3,000 
3.750 
4,500 
5.250 
6,000 
6,750 
7,500 



15 
30 

45 
60 

75 

90 

105 

120 

135 

150 

300 

450 

600 

750 

900 

1,050 

1,200 

1.350 

1,500 

3,000 

4,500 

6,000 

7,500 

9,000 

10,500 

12,000 

13,500 

15,000 



23 

45 

68 

90 

113 

135 

158 

180 

203 

225 

450 

675 

900 

1,125 

1.350 

1.575 

1,800 

2,025 

2,250 

4,500 

6,750 

9,000 

11,250 

13,500 

15.750 

18,000 

20,250 

22,500 



30 

60 

90 

120 

150 

180 

210 

240 

270 

300 

600 

900 

1,200 

1,500 

1,800 

2,100 

2,400 

2,700 

3,000 

6,000 

9,000 

12,000 

15,000 

18,000 

2 1 ,000 

24,000 

27,000 

30,000 



38 

75 

113 

150 

188 

225 

263 

300 

338 

375 

750 

1,125 

1,500 

1,875 
2,250 
2,625 
3,000 

3.375 
3.750 
7,500 
11,250 
15 000 
18V50 
22,500 
26,250 
30,000 
33.750 
37.500 



45 
90 

135 
180 

225 
270 

360 
405 

450 

900 

1.350 

1,800 

2,250 

2,700 

3.150 

3,600 

4,050 

4,500 

9.000 

13,500 

18,000 

22,500 

27,000 

31,500 

36,000 

40,000 

45,000 



78 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



INTEREST TABLE, 

At six per cent., in dollars and cents, from one dollar to ten 
thousand: 





I DAY. 


I MO. 


3 MOS. 


6 MOS. 


12 MOS. 


$ 


$ c. 


$ c. 


$ c. 


$ c. 


$ c. 


I 


00 


ooK 


oi>^ 


03 


06 


2 


00 


01 


C'3 


06 


12 


3 


00 


01/2 


04^ 


09 


18 


4 


00 


02 


06 


12 


24 


5 


00 


02 K 


07 >^ 


15 


30 


6 


00 


03 


09 


18 


36 


7 


00 


03>^ 


io>^ 


21 


42 


8 


00 


04 


12 


24 


48 


9 


00 


04K 


13^ 


27 


54 


10 


00 


05 


15 


30 


60 


20 


ooX 


10 


30 


60 


I 20 


30 


ooK 


15 


45 


90 


I 80 


40 


00^ 


20 


60 


I 20 


2 40 


50 


01 


25 


75 


I 50 


3 00 


100 


01^ 


50 


1 50 


3 00 


6 00 


200 


03 


I 00 


3 00 


6 00 


12 00 


300 


05 


I 50 


4 50 


9 00 


18 00 


400 


07 


2 00 


6 00 


12 00 


24 00 


500 


08 


2 50 


7 50 


15 00 


30 00 


1,000 


17 


5 00 


15 00 


30 00 


60 00 


2,000 


33 


10 00 


30 00 


60 00 


120 00 


3,000 


50 


15 00 


45 00 


90 00 


180 00 


4,000 


67 


20 00 


60 00 


120 00 


240 00 


5,000 


83 


25 00 


75 00 


150 00 


300 00 


10,000 


1 67 


50 00 


150 00 


300 00 


600 00 



EQUIVALENT OF BRITISH MONEY IN AMERICAN 

MONEY. 



W3 

be 


CO 


(A 

bXI 


C/3 


02 


(A 


c/j 


(A 


Cfi 


(A 


c 


SiG^' 


.S 




.s 




:3 




T3 

:3 


5 ^ 


^ 


(L) ;^ 




5 ^5 


^ 
(n 







<u 
P U 





QJ 

Q u 


I 


$ 24 2 


7 


$1 69 4 


n 


$3 14 6 


I 


$4 84 


15 


g 72 60 


2 


48 4 


8 


I 93 6 


14 


3388 


2 


9 68 


20 


96 80 


3 


726 


9 


2 17 8 


vs 


3 63 


3 


14 52 


25 


121 00 


4 


96 8 


10 


2 42 


16 


3 872 


4 


19 36 


30 


145 20 


S 


I 21 


II 


2 66 2 


18 


4 35 6 


5 


24 20 


35 


169 40 


6 


1 I 45 2 


12 


2 90 4 


20 


4 84 


10 ' 48 40 


50 


242 00 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



79 



WEIGHT, STATURE, ETC., OF MAN. 

The mean weight and stature of the human body at birth, and 
at every subsequent age, together with the expectancy of life 
from 20 to 70 years of age, is as follows: 



MALES. 


YEARS. 


YEARS. 


Age. 


Feet. 


Lbs. 


Age. 


Expec- 
tancy. 


Age. 


Expec- 
tancy. 





1.64 


7.06 


20 


Ai'A 


46 


24 


2 


2 


60 


25.01 


21 


A0% 


47 


23X 


4 


^ 


04 


31.38 


22 


40 


48 


22>^ 


6 


3 


44 


38.80 


23 


39^ 


49 


22 


9 


4 


00 


49-45 


24 


Z^H 


50 


21^ 


II 


4 


36 


59.77 


25 


38 


51 


20X 


13 


4 


72 


75.81 


26 


37 X 


52 


19^ 


15 


5 


07 


96.40 


^Z 


36^ 


53. 


19 


17 


5 


36 


116.56 


28 


35M 


54 


18X 


18 


5 


44 


127.59 


29 


35 


55 


171^ 


20 


■S 


49 


132.46 


30 


3^y^ 


56 


17 


30 


5 


52 


140.38 


31 


33^ 


57 


16X 


40 


5 


52 


140.42 


32 


33 


58 


iS'A 


50 


s 


49 


139.96 


33 


32^ 


59 


15 


60 


5 


3« 


136.07 


34 


31I4: 


60 


14K 


70 


S 


32 


131.27 


35 


31 


61 


14 


80 


5 


29 


127.54 


36 


30 >^ 


62 


13K 


90 


5 


29 


127.54 


I 


29I4: 
29 


64 


13 








\2]i 








39 


28X 


65 


llU 








40 


2711: 


66 


iiX 


Mean 




. . .103.66 


41 


27 


67 


10^ 








42 


26;!^ 


68 


loX 








43 


25^ 


69 


9^4: 








44 


25X 


70 


93^ 








45 


24 J^ 







CARRYING CAPACITY OF 

Whiskey 60 barrels 

Salt 70 barrels 

Lime 70 barrels 

Flour 90 barrels 

Eggs 130 to 160 barrels 

Flour 200 sacks 

Wood 6 cords 

Cattle 18 to 20 head 

Hogs 50 to 60 head 

Sheep 86 to 100 head 



i TEN TON FREIGHT CAR. 

Lumber 6,000 feet 

Barley 300 bushels 

Wheat 340 bushels 

Flax Seed 360 bushels 

Apples 370 bushels 

Corn 400 bushels 

Potatoes 430 bushels 

Oats 680 bushels 

Bran i,ooo'bu5hels 

Butter 20,000 pounds 



8o 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



POPULATION OF THE LARGER CITIES. 

OFFICIAL CENSUS OF 189O. 

Lincoln, Neb 

Charleston, S. C 

Hartford, Conn 

St. Joseph, Mo 

Evansviile, Ind 

Los Angeles, Gal 

Des Moines, la 

Bridgeport, Conn 

Oakland, Cal 

Portland, Ore 

Saginaw, Mich 

Salt Lake City, Utah. . 

Lawrence, Mass 

Springtield, Mass 

Utica. N.Y 

Manchester, N. H 

Seattle, Wash 

Hoboken, N. J..., 

Savannah, Ga 

Peoria, 111.. 

New Bedford, Mass.. ., 

Harrisburg, Pa 

Somerville, Mass 

Erie, Pa 

San Antonio, Tex 

Kansas City, Kan 

Dallas, Tex 

Sioux City, la 

Elizabeth, N. T 

Wilkesbarre, Pa 

Covington, Ky 

Portland, Me 

Tacoma, Wash 

Holyoke, Mass 

Fort Wayne, Ind 

Norfolk, Va 

Binghamton, N. Y 

Wheeling, W. Va 

Youngstown, O , 

Augusta, Ga 

Duluth, Minn 

Springfield, 111 

Lancaster, Pa 

Yonkers, N. Y 

Mobile, Ala 

Topeka, Kan 

Quincy, 111 

Salem, Mass 



New York, N.Y 


.1,513,501 


Chicago, 111 


. 1,098,576 


Philadelphia, Pa 


. 1,044,894 


St. Louis, Mo 


. 460,357 


Brooklyn, N. Y 


. 806,343 


Boston, Mass 


. 446,507 


Baltimore, Md 


. 434,151 


San Francisco, Cal... 


• 297,990 


Cincinnati, O 


. 296,308 


Cleveland, 


. 251,546 


Buffalo, N. Y 


. 254,457 


New Orleans, La 


. 241,995 


Pittsburg, Pa 


. 238,473 


Washington, D. C... 


. 229,796 


Detroit, Mich 


. 205,669 


Milwaukee, Wis 


. 204,150 


Newark, N. J 


. 181,518 


Minneapolis, Minn. . . 


. 164,738 


_ ersey City, N. J 


. 163,987 


Louisville, Ky 


. 161,005 


Omaha, Neb 


. 139^526 


Rochester, N. Y 


. 138,327 


St. Paul, Minn 


. ^33, '56 


Kansas City, Mo 


. 132,416 


Providence, R. I 


. 132,043 


Indianapolis, Ind.... 


• 107.445 


Allegheny, Pa 


. 106,967 


Denver, Col 


. 106,760 


Albany, N.Y 


. 94.640 


Columbus, 


• 90.398 


Syracuse, N. Y 


. 87,877 


Worcester, Mass. . .^. 


. 84,536 


Scranton, Pa 


.. 83,450 


New Haven, Conn. . . 


. 81.451 


Richmond, Va 


. 80,838 


Paterson, N. J 


. 78,358 


Toledo, 


. 78,358 


Lowell, Mass 


• 77.635 


Nashville, Tenn 


. 76,309 


Fall River, Mass 


.. 74.351 


Cambridge, Mass 


. 69,837 


Atlanta, Ga 


. 65,514 


Memphis, Tenn 


. . 64,586 


Grand Rapids, Mich. 


. 64,147 


Wilmington, Del 


.. 61,437 


Troy. N.Y 

Reading, Pa 


. . 60,605 


. 58.926 


Dayton, 


. 58,868 



55491 
54.592 
53,182 
52,811 
50,674 
50,394 

50,067 

48,856 

48,590 
48,294 

46,169 

45,025 

44, 164 
44,164 
44,001 

43,983 
43,914 
43,561 
41,762 

40,758 
40.705 
40, 164 
. 40,117 
39.699 
38,681 
38,170 
38,140 
37,862 
37,670 
37,651 
37,375 
56.608 

35,858 
35,528 
35,349 
35,154 
35.093 
35,052 
33,199 
33,150 
32,725 
32,135 
32,090 

31,945 
31,822 
31,809 
31478 
30,735 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



8i 



Trenton, N.J 58,488 

Camden, N. J 58,274 

Lynn, Mass 55,684 



Long Island City, N. Y 30,396 
Terre Haute,- Ind 30,287 



Geographical Div. 1890. 1880. 1870.. 

The United States. 62,622,250 50,155,783 38,558,371 

North Atlantic Division 17,401,545 14,507,407 12,298,730 

South Atlantic Division 8,857,920 7,597,197 5,853,610 

Northern Central Division 22,362,279 17,364,111 12,981,111 

Southern Central Division 10,972,893 8,919,371 6,434,410 

Western Division 3,027,613 1,767,697 990,510 



RELATIVE WEIGHTS OF METALS. 

The weight of Bar Iron being , i. 

Cast Iron = .95 

Steel r= 1.02 

Copper = 1. 16 

Brass = i .09 

Lead = 1.48 

The weight of Cast Iron being i. 

Bar Iron = 1.07 

Steel = 1 .08 

Brass = i . 16 

Copper = 1.21 

Lead ,.= 1.56 

The weight of Yellow Pine being i. 

Cast Iron = 16. 

Steel -= 1 7.2 

Copper = 19.3 

Brass = 18.4 

Lead = 24. 

The weight of Brass being i. 

Bar Iron = .92 

Cast Iron = .86 

Steel = .93 

Copper = 1.05 

Lead = L35 

The weight ot Copper being i . 

Bar Iron = .87 

Cast Iron = .82 

Steel = .88 

Brass = .93 

Lead = L28 

The weight of Lead being i. 

Bar Iron = .68 

Cast Iron = .64 

Steel = .69 

Brass = .74 

Copper..., ...,,,,,,,,,.,,•.• = .78 



82 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



THE ENGLISH MILE COMPARED WITH OTHER 
EUROPEAN MEASURES. 



English Statute Mile 
English Geog. Mill. 

Kilometre 

German Geog. Mile. 

Russia Verst 

Austrian Mile 

Dutch Ure 

Norwegian Mile 

Swedish Mile 

Danish Mile 

Swiss Stunde 






I '000 

0*621 
4'6io 
0*663 
4-714 
3-458 
7*021 
6 644 
4*682 
2*987 



.-is 

Wo 



0*867 

1*000 

0*540 
4 000 

0-575 
4*089 
3*000 
6*091 

5-764 
4*062 

2-592 



•S F 


§S 


s ° 


B bh 


QJ , — 1 

£5 


V 8 


1*609 


0*217 


1*855 


0*250 


1*000 


0*135 


7*420 


1*000 


1*067 


0*144 


7-586 


1*022 


5-565 


0*750 


11*299 


1-523 


10*692 


1*441 


7-536 


1*016 


4 -808 


0*648 



0) 

> 



508 
738 

937 
953 
000 
112 
■215 
•589 
019 
•078 
505 



1^ 

0*212 

0*245 
0*132 

0978 
OI4I 
1*000 

0734 
1*489 
1*409 

0*994 
0.634 



English Statute Mile 
English Geog. Mile. 

Kilometre 

German Geog. Mile 
Russian Verst. . . 
Austrian Mile... 
Dutch Ure.... .. 

Norwegian Mile. 
Swedish Mile. .. 

Danish Mile 

Swiss Stunde 



U 1) 




.52 6 - 




5 ^ 


^ t2 


'O .t: 


C -^ 


^^ 


g ^ 

^ 




c^S 

Q^ 


0*289 


0*142 


0*151 


0*213 


0-333 


0*164 


0*169 


0*246 


0*180 


0*088 


0*094 


0-133 


1-333 


0*657 


0*694 


0*985 


0*192 


0*094 


0*100 


0*142 


1.363 


0*672 


0*710 


1*006 


I'OOO 


0-493 


0*520 


0*738 


2*035 


I'OOO 


i*c57 


1*499 


1*921 


0*948 


I'OOO 


1*419 


I '354 


0*667 


0*705 


1*000 


0*864 


0*425 


0*449 


0*638 



W5 ^ 
CO 73 

'5 § 

0335 
0*386 
0*208 

I 543 
0*222 
1*578 
1*157 
2*350 
2*224 
1*567 
[ 000 



WEIGHT OF A CUBIC FOOT OF VARIOUS 
SUBSTANCES. 



METALS. 



Platinum lbs., 1,218 — oz., 12 



Pure gold*. 

Mercury 

Lead 

Pure silver!.. 
Steel 



1,203 
848 

709 
625 

487 



10 

12 

8 

13 
12 



Tin 

Cast iron. 
Copper. . . 

Brass 

Zinc 



.lbs., 



455- 


-oz. 


II 


450 


n 


7 


547 


a 


4 


543 




12 


428 


i( 


13 



*The value of a ton of pure gold is $602,799.21. $1,000,000 
gold coin weighs 3,685.8 pounds avoirdupois, f The value of a ton 
of silver is $37,704.84. $1,000,000 silver coin weigh 58,929.9 
pounds avoirdupois. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



83 



MISCELLANEOUS. 



Indian rubber. . .lbs., 56— oz., 7 | Pressed cotton. ..lbs., 25 
Pressed hay *' 25 | 



EARTH, STONE, ETC. 



Italian marble, .lbs., 169 — oz., 4 

Vermont marble " 165 " g 

Window glass. . " 165 " 2 

Common glass.. " 157 " 8 

Moist sand " 128 " 2 

Clay " 120 ** 10 

Brick '' 118 ^' 12 



Mortar lbs., 109- 

Mud " loi 

Loose earth " 93 

Lehigh coal, 

loose " 56 

Lackawanna, 

loose " 48 



-oz. 



, 6 
12 



10 



WOODS. 



Lignum vitas lbs., 83 — oz., 5 



Ebony. 
Boxwood . . . . 
Mahogany. . . 
White oak. . . 

Ash 

Red hickory. 

Apple 

Maple 

Cherry 



83 
75 
66 

53 
52 
52 
49 
46 
44 



5 
2 

7 
12 

13 
6 

9 
14 
II 



Shellbarkhick'ry. lbs., 43— oz., 2 

'4 



Pitch pine. 

Chestnut , 

Birch 

Cedar 

White poplar 

Spruce , 

Yellow pine , 

Butternut 

Cork 



41 
38 

35 
35 
33 

28 
23 
15 



2 

7 
I 

I 

4 

13 



GROCERIES. 



Sugar lbs., 100 — oz., 5 

Beeswax " 60 "5 

Lard " 59 " 3 



Butter lbs., 

Tallow " 

Castile soap ** 



58— oz., 14 
58 " 13 
56 " 15 



MELTING TEMPERATURE OF ALLOYS. 

Lead i. Tin i, Bismuth 4, melts at 155 degrees 

Lead 3, Tin 5, Bismuth 8, " 208 " 

Lead i. Tin 3, Bismuth 5, " 212 " 

Lead I, Tin 4, Bismuth 5, " 240 " 

Tin I, Bismuth I, " 286 " 

Lead 2, Tin 3 « 334 " 

Tin 2, Bismuth I, " 336 " 

Lead I, Tin 2, « 360 " 

Tin 8, Bismuth I, " 392 « 

Lead 2, Tin I, ** 475 ** 



84 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

U. S. MINERAL STATISTICS. 1890. 



METALLIC PRODUCTS. 



Pig iron, long tons 

Silver; troy ounces 

Gold, troy ounces 

Copper, pounds 

Lead, short tons 

Zinc, short tons 

Quicksilver, flasks 

Nickel, pounds ,. 

Aluminum, and aluminum 

pounds 

Antimony, short tons 

Platinum, troy ounces 

Total 



in alloys, 



QUANTITY. 



9,202,703 
54,500,000 

1,588,88c 
265,115,133 

i6i,7S4 
63,683 
22,926 

223,488 

61,281 
129 
600 



VALUE. 



$151,200,410 

70,454,645 

32,845,000 

30,848,797 

14,266,703 

6,266,407 

1,203,615 

134,093 

61,281 

40,756 
2,500 



• $307,334,207 



WEIGHT OF LIQUIDS PER GALLON. 



Sulphuric acid in lbs. 18 

Nitric acid " 12 

Muriatic acid " 12 

Alcohol of commerce " 8 

Alcohol proof spirit. ** 9 

Naphtha « 8 

Linseed oil " 9 



Whale oil in lbs. 9 . 2 

Oil of turpentine... " 8.7 

Petroleum " 8.8 

Tar " 10. 1 

Vinegar " 10. i 

Water distilled " 10. 

Salt water ** 10.3 



THE EFFECT OF HEAT ON VARIOUS SUBSTANCES. 



Antimony melts at 

Bismuth " 

Brass 

Copper " 

Glass " 

Gold 

Cast Iron " 

Lead " 



. 951. 


deg. 


. . 476. 


a 


. .1900. 


u 


..2548. 


u 


••2377. 


u 


..2590. 




..3479- 




.. 594. 


a 



Zinc melts at 740. deg. 

Ice " 32. " 

Mercury boils at 662. ^ 

Naphtha « ^ 186. " 

Fresh water boils at . . 2 1 2 . " 

Sea water " . .213.2 " 

Ether " ..100. * 



WEIGHT OF WATER AT DIFFERENTTEMPERATURES. 



Temperature, 
Fahr. 



32 
40 
50 
60 



Wfight in Pounds 
per Cubic Foot 

62.417 

62.423 

62.409 

62.367 



Temperature, 
Fahr. 



Weight in Pounds 
per Cubic Foot. 

70 62,302 

80 62.218 

90 62.119 

212 59-/00 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



85 



WEIGHT AND SPECIFIC GRAVITIES OF LIQUIDS. 



Liquids at 32 deg. Fahr. 



Mercury ' 

Bromine 

Sulphuric acid, max. con- ) 
centratn. ) 

Nitrous acid 

Chloroform 

Water of the Dead Sea 

Nitric acid, of commerce 

Acetic acid, maximum con- 
centratn 

Milk 

Sea water, ordinary 

Pure water (distild.) at 39 o i. F 

Wine of Bordeaux 

Wine of Burgundy 

Linseed oil 

Poppy oil. 

Rape seed oil 

Whale oil 

Olive oil 

Turpentine oil 

Potato oil 

Petroleum 

Naphtha 

Ether, nitric 

" sulphurous 

" nitrous 

" acetic 

" hydrochloric 

** sulphuric 

Alcohol, proof spirit 

Alcohol, pure 

Benzine 

Wood spirit 



s^ 


S^ 


CTQ C/} 


^n a> 


n> n> 


^,"^ 


Qcfq' 


cgcf^- 




r^ C tr" 


P j^" 




• cr^ 




S ^ 


o'o 


S 


7^ o 




P M.* 




Pounds. 


Pounds. 


Water=i 


848.7 


136.0 


13.596 


185. 1 


29.7 


2.966 


1 14.9 


18.4 


1.84 


96.8 


15.5 


1-55 


95.5 


15-3 


1.53 


774 


12.4 


1.24 


76.2 


12.2 


1.22 


67.4 


10.8 


1.08 


64.3 


10.3 


1.06 


64.05 


10.5 


1.026 


62.425 


lO.O 


1. 000 


62.1 


9.9 


0.994 


61.9 


99 


0.991 


58.7 


94 


0.94 


58.1 


9-3 


0.93 


57.4 


9.2 


0.92 


57.4 


9.2 


0.92 


57.1 


9.15 


0.915 


54-3 


8.7 


0.87 


512 


8.2 


0.82 


54.9 


8.8 


0.88 


53-1 


8.5 


0.85 


693 


1 1. 1 


I. II 


67.4 


10.8 


1.08 


55.6 


8.Q 


0.89 


•55.6 


8.9 


0.89 


54-3 


8.7 


0.87 


44.9 


7.2 


0.72 


57.4 


9.2 


0.92 


49-3 


7.9 


0.79 


53.1 


8.5 


0.85 


49-9 


8.0 


0.80 



86 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



POPULATION OF THE UNITED STATES BY STATES. 



Maine 

New Hampshire 

Vermont 

Massachusetts 

Rhode Island 

Connecticut 

New York 

New Jersey 

Pennsylvania 

Delaware 

Maryland 

District of Columbia 

Virginia 

West Virginia 

North Carolina . 

South Carolina 

Georgia 

Florida 

Ohio 

Indiana 

Illinois 

Michigan 

Wisconsin 

Minnesota 

Iowa 

Missouri 

North Dakota 

South Dakota 

Nebraska 

Kansas 

Kentucky 

Tennessee 

Alabama 

Mississippi 

Louisiana 

Texas 

Oklahoma 

Arkansas 



o 

> 

O 



in 
o 

> 



1890. 



661,086 
376,530 
332,422 

2,238,943 
345,506 
746,258 
5,997,853 
1,444,933 
5,258,014 



! 168,493 
1,042,390 

230,392 
1,655,980 

762,794 

1,617,947 
1,151,149 

1,837,353 
391,422 



3,672,316 
2,192,404 
3,826,351 
2,093,889 
1,686,880 
1,301,826 
1,911,896 
2,679,184 
I 182,719 
328,808 
1,058,910 
1,427,096 



648,936 

346,991 

332,286 

1,783,085 

276,531 

622,700 

5,082,871 

1,131,116 

4,282,891 



146,608 

934,943 
177,624 

1,512,565 
618,457 

1,399,750 
995,577 

1,542,180 

269,493 



1870. 



626,915 
318,300 
330,551 
1,457,351 
217,353 
537,454 

4,382,759 
906,096 

3,521,951 



125,015 
780.894 
.131,700 

1,225,163 
442,014 

1,071,361 
705,606 

1,184,109 
187,748 



3,198,062 

1,978,3011 

3,077,871 

1,636,937, 

1,315,497; 

780,773! 

1,624,615 

2,168,380 

36,909' 

98,268 

452,402 

996,096 



2,665,260 
1,680,637 

2,539,891 
1,184,059 
1,054,670 
439,706 
1,194,020 
1,721,295 

14,181 
122,993 
484,471 



1,858,6351 
1,767,518! 

1,513,017! 
1,289,600' 
1,118,587! 

2,235,523' 

61,834 

1,128,179 



1,648,690' 

1,542,359 
1,262,505 

1,131,597 

939,946 

1,591,749 



802,525 



1,321,011 
1,258,520 
996,992 
827,922 
726,915 
818,579 



4,47148 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



87 



POPULATION OF THE UNITED STATES BY STATES. 

(Continued.) 



Montana . . . . 
Wyoming . . . 

Colorado 

New Mexico 

Arizona 

Utah 

Nevada 

Idaho 

Washington . 

Oregon 

CaHfornia . . . 





1890. 


1880. 




132,159 


39,159 


^ 


60,705 


20,789 


n 


412,198 


194,327 


ct 


153,593 


119,565 


f3 


59,620 


40,440 


■g 


207,905 


143,963 


45,761 


62,266 


< 

en' 


84,385 


32,610 





349,390 


75,116 


p 


313,767 


174,768 




1^,208,130 


864,694 



1870. 

20,595 
9,118 

39,864 
91,874 
9,658 
86,786 
42,491 
14,999 
23.955 
90,923 
560,247 



TWELVE O'CLOCK NOON GREENWICH MEAN TIME. 

AS COMPARED WITH THE CLOCK IN THE FOLLOWING PLACES : 



H. M. 

Boston, U. S 7 16 a.m. 

Chicago 6 8 a.m. 

DubHn II 35 A.M. 

Edinburgh 11 47 A.M. 

Glasgow II 43 A.M. 

Lisbon 11 23 a.m. 

Madrid .11 45 a.m. 

Newfoundland, St. Jns 8 29 A.M. 

New York 7 4 a.m. 

Penzance 11 37 A.M. 

Philadelphia 6 59 A.M. 

Calcutta 5 53 p.m. 

Cape of Good Hope., i 14 p.m. 

Constantinople i 56 P.M. 

Florence o 45 p.m. 

Hobart, Tasmania ... 9 49 p.m. 

Jerusalem 221 P.M. 

Madras 5 21 P.M. 

Malta o 58 P.M. 

Melbourne, Australia. 9 40 p.m. 
Moscow 2 30 P.M. 



H. M. 

Quebec 7 15 a.m. 

San Francisco Port. . 4 23 a.m. 

Toronto 6 42 a.m. 

Vancouver 3 38 a.m. 

Adelaide g 14 p.m. 

Auckland, N. Z 11 39 p.m. 

Berlin o 54 p.m. 

Berne o 30 p m. 

Bombay 4 51 p.m. 

Brisbane, Queensland. 10 12 p.m. 

Brussels o 17 p.m. 

Pekin 7 46 p.m. 

Perth, W. Australia. . 8 44 p.m. 

Port Moresby 2 40 p.m. 

Prague o 58 p.m. 

Rome o 50 P.M. 

Rotterdam o 18 p.m. 

St. Petersburg 2 i p.m. 

Stockholm i 12 p.m. 

Suez 2 10 p.m. 

Sydney 10 5 p.e. 

Vienna i 6 p.m. 



Paris o 9 P.M. 

Variation of Time depends upon Longitude ; every degree east 
of Greenwich is four minutes earlier, and every degree west four 
minutes later. Note the variations in the United States or in 
British America. 



88 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



SPECIFIC GRAVITIES AND WEIGHTS OF STONES, 

ETC. 



Stones, Earths, 
Etc. 



Amber 

Asbestos 

Asphalte, gritted. . 

Basalt 

Bathstone 

Bermuda stone, 

hard 

Bermuda stone, 

soft 

Beryl, Oriental . . . 

Bitumen 

Brick, common 

stock.... 

Brick, red facing. 

Brick, fire 

Cement, Portland. 
Cement, Roman . . 

Chalk, solid ] 

Chalk in lumps 
Clay, potters' . . . 
Clay with gravel 
Clay, ordinary. . 
Coal, anthracite 
Coal, bitumi- 
nous 

Coke 

Concrete 

Concrete, lime . . . 

Coral 

Crystal, rock 

Diamond 

Emerald, Peru.. . 

Emery 

Feldspar 

Flint 

Freestone, hewn. 



03 —. 


Weig 
a cub 
in lbs. 


a-" 

^ 


htof 
ic ft 
Avoi 




^ 


1.078 


67 


2.996 


187 


2.5 


iS6 


2.864 


180 


1.97 


123 


2.62 


164 


1.47 


92 


3.549 


221 


I. 


62 


1.8 


115 


2. 


130 


2.4 


150 


1.2 


87 


•9 


60 


1.8 


112 


2.8 


175 




87 


1.9 


120 


2. 


130 


1.9 


120 


1.602 


100 


1.24 


77 


1.44 


90 


.7 


47 


1.9 


120 


1.8 


118 


2.68 


167 


2.653 


165 


3.536 


221 


2.775 


173 


4. 


250 


2.6 


162 


2.594 


162 


2.2 


140 



Stones, Earths, 
Etc. 



Glass, white flint. . 

Glass, plate 

Glass, crown 

Granite 

Gypsum 

Jargon, Ceylon . . . 

Kentish rag 

Lime, Chalk, 
ground 

Limestone, lias . . . 
" magnesian. 

Marble (average). 

Marl 

Masonry, rubble . . 
" ashlar, Port'd 
" " granite 

Millstone 

Mortar, old 

Mortar, new. r 

Mud 

Opal 

Peat, hard 

Pitch 

Quartz 

Rotten stone 

Sand, river 

Sandstone 

Shale 

Shingle 

Slate 

Slates, Cornish . . . 

Spar 

Sulphur, melted . . 

Tiles, average .... 

Topaz 

Trap 

White lead 






3- 
2.94 

2.53 

2.625 

2.28 

4.416 

2.66 

.83 
2.5 
2.3 
2.7 
1.9 
2.2 
2.2 
2.5 
2.5 
1.4 
1.7 
1.63 
2. 114 

1.3 
I.I 
2.64 

2. 
1.9 

2.3 
2.6 



2.9 

2.5 

2.594 

2. 

1.8 

3.8 

2.7 

3.^ 



CHAPTER IV. 
TABLES OF MEASURES, ETC. 

DIMENSIONS OF ONE ACRE. 

A square, whose sides are 12,649 rods, or 69.57 rods, or 208.71 
feet long, contains one acre. Table of dimensions of rectangle 
containing one acre: 

RODS. 



I X 160 


iKXio6% 


2X80 


2>^X64 


3 X syA 


3>^X 45 5-7 


4X40 


4>^X35 5-9 


5 X 32 


5KX 29 i-ii 


6X26% 


6>^X24 8-13 


7 X 22 6-7 


7KX 2i>^ 


8X20 


8KX18 14-17 


9 X 17 7-9 


9>^X 16 16-19 


10X16 


io^'Xi5 5-21 


II X 14 6-11 


ii^X 13 7-II 


i2Xi3>^ 


i2>^Xi2 4-5 
12 13-20X12 13-20 



TO COMPUTE THE VOLUME OF BRICKS, AND THE 
NUMBER IN A CUBIC FOOT OF MASONRY. 

Rule. — To the face dimensions of the particular bricks used, add 
one half of the thickness of the mortar or the cement in which 
they are laid and compute the area; divide the width of the wall 
by the number of brick of which it is composed; multiply this area 
by the quotient thus obtained, and the product will give the volume 
of the mass of brick and its mortar in inches. Divide i ,728 by this 
volume, and the quotient will give the number of bricks in a cubic 
foot. 

Example. — The width of a wall is to be I2|^ inches, and the 
front of it laid with Philadelphia brick in courses % of an inch in 
depth; how many bricks will there be in face and backing in a 
cubic foot? Proceed thus: 

Philadelphia front brick 8>^X2^. 

We first reduce all our common fractions to decimals. 

Then 8.25-[-.25 X 2-^-2 =8 .5 length of brick and joint. 

Again, 2.375+.25X2^2=2.625 width of brick and joint. 

Then, 8.5X2.625=22.3125 inches area of face. 

Then, 12.75 -T-3 (number of bricks in width of wall)=4.25 inches. 

Hence, 22.3125X4.25=94.83 cubic feet. 

And 1728-7-94.83=18.22, number of bricks in a cubic foot. 



go WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

RULE TO FIND THE NUMBER OF GALLONS 
CONTAINED IN A CAN. 

Multiply the diameter by the diameter and then the height. 
Then multiply by .0034 which will give the number of gallons. 

Example: 

6" diameter 
6" 



36 
8" high 



288 
.0034 

1152 
864 



97-92 
There is the old rule — instead of .0034 multiply by .7854 and 
divide by 231". 

RULE TO FIND THE HORSE-POWER OF A STATION- 
ARY ENGINE. 

Multiply the area of the piston by the average pressure in 
pounds per square inch. Multiply this product by the travel of 
the piston in feet per minute; divide by 33000, this will give the 
horse-power. Proper example: 

Diameter of cylinder, 12 



144 
7854 



1 130976 



BOARD AND TIMBER MEASURE. 

Rule. — Multiply the length by the breadth, and the product 
will give the surface required. 

If the dimensions are given in inches, multiply as above and 
divide by 12. When all the dimensions are in inches, multiply as 
before and divide the product by 144. 

Example. — What are the number of square feet in a board 15 
feet in length and 16 inches in width? 

15X16=240-7-12=20 feet. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. QI 

ESTIMATES OF MATERIALS. 

3^-^ barrels of lime will do loo sq. yards plastering, two coats. 
2 " " " 100 " " one coat. 

I K bushels of hair " loo " " 

iX yards good sand " loo " " 

y^ barrel plaster (stucco), will hard finish loo square yards plas- 
tering. 

1 barrel of lime will lay i,ooo brick. It takes good lime to do it. 

2 " " I cord rubble stone. 

% ^ "I perch " (es. %c'd. to perch.) 

To every barrel of lime estimate about '/% yards of good sand 
for plastering and brick work. 



TABLES CONVENIENT FOR TAKING INSIDE DIMEN- 
SIONS. 

A Ijox 24 in.x24 in.xi4.7 in. will hold a barrel of 31 >^ gallons. 
A box 15 in.xi4 in.xii in. will hold 10 gallons. 
A box 8X in.x7 in.x4 in. will hold a gallon. 
A box 4 in.x4 in.x3.6 in. will hold a quart. 
A box 24 in.x28 in xi6 in will hold five bushels. 
A box 16 in xi2 in.xi 1.2 in. will hold a bushel. 
A box 12 in. XI 1.2 in. x 8 in. will hold a half bushel. 
A box 7 in.x64 inxi2 in. will hold a peck.. 

A box 8 4 in.x8 in.x4 in. will hold a half peck, or four dry 
quarts. 

A box 6 inx5 3-5 in. and 4 in deep will hold a half gallon. 
A box 4 in.x4 in. and 2 i-io deep will hold a pint. 



LAND MEASURE. 

To find the number of acres in a body of land, multiply the 
length by the width (in rods), and divide the product by 160. When 
the opposite sides are unequal, add them, and take half the sum 
for the mean length or width. 

Find how many acres in a field, 96 rods long and 40 rods wide 
at one end and 45 at the other. Ans. 25 >^ acres. 
2)85 = 40 X 45 96 length. 

42J^ 

42 >^ mean width, 

1 60)4080(25 >^ acres. 



92 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

CIRCULAR MEASURE. 

The Diameter is a straight line passing through the centre 
from opposite parts of the Circumference, or Perimeter. 

The Radius is half the Diameter, or a straight line from the 
centre to the Circumference. 

The Diameter is to the Circumference about as 7 is to 22, or 
more nearly as i is to 3*1416. 

The Diameter X 3*1416 gives the Circumference. 

The Radius squared X 3*1416 gives the Area. 

The Diameter squared X 3*1416 gives the Area of a Sphere or 
Globe. 

One-sixth of the Cube of the Diameter X 3*1416 gives the 
Solidity of a Sphere. 

A Circular Acre is 235*504 feet, a Circular Rood 1 17752 feet in 
Diameter. The Circumference of the Globe is about 24,855 miles, 
and the Diameter about 7,900 miles. 



CARPENTERS', BRICKLAYERS' AND BUILDERS' 
MEASUREMENTS. 

Stock or kiln bricks 8^ inches XaHX^H 

Welsh fire-bricks 9 « X4K X2>^ 

Paving bricks 9 " X4/^Xi^ 

Square tiles gU " X9^Xi 

6 « X6 XI 

Dutch clinker bricks 9X " X3 X iK 

A Rod of Brickwork 16K feet X 16 ^/^ feet X iK brick thick = 
306 cubic feet, or ii}{ cubic yards, and contains about 4,500 bricks 
with about 75 cubic feet of mortar. 

A Square of Flooring is 100 square feet. 

Ordinary bricks weigh about 7 lbs. each; a load of 500 weigh 
over lyi tons. 

EAR CORN MEASURE. 

To find the contents of a corn crib multiply the cubic feet by 4 
and divide the product by 9."^ 

Find the contents of a corn crib 18 feet 17X8X18=1,008 cu. ft. 
long, 7 feet wide and 8 feet high. 4 

*This allows 2)4 cubic feet for a bus. 

It is the rule most generally used, and will 9)4032 

hold out in ordinary good corn, even if 

measured at the time it is cribbed. Ans. 448 bus. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 93 

MEASURES OF LENGTH. 

Inch, in = 72 Points, or 12 Lines. 

Nail, 1-16 = 2)i Inches. 

Palm — 3 Inches. 

Hand =4 Inches. 

Link — 7*92 Inches. 

Quarter (or a Span) =9 Inches. 

Foot = 12 Inches. 

Cubit = 18 Inches. 

Yard = 36 Inches. 

Pace, Military = 2 Feet 6 Inches. 

Pace, Geometrical = 5 Feet. 

Fathom = 6 Feet. 

Rod, Pole, or Perch = 5>^ Yards. 

Chain (100 Links) = 22 Yards (4 Poles). 

Cable's Length = 120 Fathoms, 720 Feet. 

Furlong = 40 Rods, 220 Yards. 

Mile =8 Furlongs, 80 Chains, 320 Rods, 

1,760 Yards, 5,280 Feet, 63,360 Inches. 

Mile, Geographical, or Nautical Knot = 6,082*66 Feet. 

Admiralty Knot or Nautical Mile, 6,080 Feet = 1-151 Mile 
Statute Degree. 

League — 3 Miles. 

Degree — 60 Geographical, or 69*121 Statute Miles. 

WATER. 

Cubic inch = '0361 lb. 

Gallon = 10*0000 ** 

35*943 cubic feet (210 gallons) = i ton. 

The gallon is — 277^ cubic inches, = 0*16 cubic feet, = 10 lb. 
distilled water. 

Water for Ships: Ton 210 gals.. Butt no. Puncheon 72, Barrel 
36, Kilderkin 18. 

Cisterns: i cubic foot, is equal to about 6X gallons, or 62*321 
lb. A cistern 4 feet by 2^ and 3 deep will hold about 187 gallons, 
and weigh nearly 16 cwt. in additjon to its own weight. 



COMPARATIVE TABLE OF WEIGHTS. - 

Troy. Apothecaries. Avoirdupois. 

I lb. equals 5,760 grains, equals 5,760 grains, equals 7,000 grains. 
I oz. « 480 " " 480 " " 437.5 " 

175 lbs. " 175 lbs. " 144 lbs. 

The half peck, or dry gallon, contains 268.8 cubic inches. Six 
quarts, dry measure, are equal to nearly 7 quarts liquid measure. 



94 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

CISTERN MEASURE. 

To find the capacity of a round cistern or tank, multiply the 
square of the average diameter by the depth, and take 3-16 of the 
product. For great accuracy, multiply by 1865 instead of tak- 
ing 3-16. 

For square cisterns or tanks, multiply the cubic feet by .2^^ 
(tenths). 

Find the capacity of a round cistern, 6 feet in diameter and 8 
feet in deep. 

6 X 6 X 8 = 288 
3 

16)864(54 barrels. 
Ans. 54 barrels of 31K gallons. 

How many barrels will a square tank hold, 10 feet long, 7 feet 
wide, and 6 feet deep? 

6 X 7 X 10 = 420 (cubic feet) X 2^ = 99^ barrels. Ans. 



GRAIN MEASURE. 

To find the capacity of a bin or wagon-bed; multiply the cubic 
feet by .8 (tenths). For great accuracy, add >^ of a bushel for 
every 100 cubic feet. 

To find the cubic feet, multiply the length, width and depth 
together. 

Find the capacity of a bin 4x5X15=300 cubic ft. 
4 ft. wide, 5 ft. deep and 15 ft. 
long. 

To get the exact ans. i bu 
is added for the 300 cu. ft. 

How many bus. will a wagon bed 
hold, 10 ft. long, 3 ft. wide, 18 in. or i ^ 
ft. deep? 

A bed 10 ft. long and 3 ft. wide, will 
hold 2 bus. for every inch in depth. 



Ans. 240.0 bus. 
24o-|-i=24i bus. exact ans. 

1KX3X 10=45 cubic feet. 
.8 

Ans. 36.0 bus. 



HAY MEASURE. 

About 500 cubic feet of well settled hay, or about 700 of new 
mown hay, will make a ton. To estimate amount of hay in mow — 
Ten cubic yards of meadow hay weigh a ton. When the hay is 
taken out of old stacks, 8 or 9 yards will make a ton. Eleven or 
twelve cubic yards of clover, when dry, make a ton. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 95 

TO FIND THE CONTENTS OF A CORN CRIB. 

Multiply the number of cubic feet by 4>^ and point off one 
decimal place; the reiiult will be the answer in bushels. How 
many bushels will a crib hold that is 48 feet long, ^%, feet wide, 
and 8X feet high? 48X7>^X8K=^3>o^c) cubic feet; 3.o6oX4>^ = 
13,770, Ans. 

CUBIC OR SOLID MEASURE. 

Cubic Foot = 1,728 Cubic Inches. 

Cubic Yard =27 Cubic Feet, 21 033 bushels. 

Stack of Wood = 108 Cubic Feet. 

Shipping Ton =40 Cubic Feet Merchandise. 

Shipping Ton =42 Cubic Feet of Timber. 

Ton of displacement of a ship =35 Cubic Feet. 

LIQUID MEASURE. 

The United States standard for measurement of all liquid is 
the "wine" or "Winchester" gallon, containing 231 cubic inches. 
4 gills make one pint. 
2 pints " quart. 

4 quarts ** gallon. 



31K gallons make one barrel. 
2 barrels make one hogshead. 



MEASURE OF WEIGHT. 

The Pound is the United States standard of weight as applied 
to general purposes, and is the weight of 277015 cubic inches of 
distilled water, at its greatest density (/. e, at 39.83° Fahrenheit, 
the barometer being at 30 inches), and is equivalent to 1000 Troy 
grains. 



27 11-32 grains make one dram. 
16 drams " ounce. 

16 ounces ** pound. 



25 lbs. make one quarter. 
4 quarters make one cwt. 
20 cwt. " ton. 



In some cases the following table for gross weight is used: 
28 lb. = i quar.; 4 quar. — i cwt.; 20 cwt., or 2240 lbs. = i ton. 

THE METRIC SYSTEM. 

The metric system is a system of weights and measures based 
upon a unit called a meter. 

The meter \s one ten- millionth part of the distance from the 
equator to either Pole, measured on the earth's surface at the level 
of the sea. 



96 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

The names ot derived metric denominations are formed by pre- 
fixing to the name of the primary unit of a measure — 
Milli (mill ' e), a thousandth, Hecto (hek ' to), one hundred. 

Centi (sent ' e), a hundredth. Kilo (kil ' o), a thousand. 

Deci (des ' e), a tenth, Myria (mir ' ea), ten thousand. 

Deka (dek'a), ten, 

This system, first adopted by France, has been extensively 
adopted by other countries, and is much used in the sciences and 
the arts. It was legalized in 1866 by Congress to be used in the 
United States, and is already employed by the Coast Survey, and 
to some extent, by the Mint and the General Postoffice. 

Linear Measures. 
The meter is the primary unit of lengths. 

10 millimeters (mm.) . . . . = i centimeter (cm.) = o . 3937 in. 

10 centimeters = 1 decimeter = 3.937 in. 

10 decimeters = 1 meter = 39 . 37 in. 

10 meters = 1 dekameter ..." =393 -37 in. 

10 dekameters =1 hectometer =328 ft. i in. 

10 hectometers =1 kilometer (km.). .= 0.62137 mi. 

10 kilometers = 1 myriameter = 6.2137 mi. 

The meter \s used in ordinary measurements; the centimeter ox 
miUi77ieter, in reckoning very small distances; and the kilojneter 
for roads or great distances. 

A centimeter \s about y% of an inch; a meter is about 3 feet 3 
inches and ^; a kilometer is about 200 rods, or |^ of a mile. 

Surface Measures. 

The square meter is the primary unit of ordinary surfaces. 

The are (air), a square, each of whose sides is ten meters ^ is the 

unit of land measures. 

100 square millimeters (sq. mm.)=i square) _ _^^ • , 

centimeter (sq. cm.) \ -^-^SS sq. mch. 

100 square centimeters. . = 1 square decimeter. .=15.5 sq. inches. 

100 square decimeters= I square ) ,--^^^ • r j 

METER (sq.m.) i ='550 sq. in., or i.i96sq. yds. 

100 centiares, or sq. meters = 1 are (ar.) = 1 19 . 6 sq. yds. 

100 ares = 1 hectare (ha.) . . =2 . 471 acres. 

A square meter ^ or one centiare^ is about \o% square feet, or 3 
square yards, and a hectare is about 2}^ acres. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 97 

Cubic Measures. 

The cubic meter or stere (stair), is the primary unit of a volume, 
looo cubic millimeters (cu. mm.)=i cubic centimeter (cu. cm.)= 

[0.061 cubic inch. 
1000 cubic centimeters= I cubic decimeter=6i .022 cubic inches. 
1000 cubic decimeters. = I cubic meter (cu. m.)=35.3i4 cu. ft. 

The stere is the name given to the cubic meter in measuring 
wood and timber. A tenth of a stere is a decistere, and ten steres 
are a dekastere. 

A cubic meter y or stere, is about i>^ cubic yards, or about 2 1-5 
cord feet. 

Liquid and Dry Measures. 

The liter (leeter) is the primary unit of measures of capacity 
and is a cube, each of whose edges is a tenth of a meter in length. 

The hectoliter is the unit in measuring large quantities of grain, 
fruits, roots and liquids. 

10 millimeters (ml. ) . = i centiliter (cl.) =0 . 338 fluid ounce. 

10 centiliters =1 deciliter =0.845 liquid gill. 

10 deciliters =1 liter (1.) = i , 0567 liquid quarts . 

10 liters =1 dekaliter =2.6417 gallons. 

10 dekaliters = 1 hectoliter (hi. )=2 bushels 3.35 pecks. 

10 hectoliters = 1 kiloliter =28 bushels i Y^ pecks . 

A centiliter is about >^ of a fluid ounce; a liter is about i 1-18 
liquid quarts, or g-io of a dry quart; a hectoliter is about 2 5-6 
bushels; and a kiloliter is one cubic meter, or stere. 

Weights. 

The gram is the primary unit of weights, and is the weight in 
a vacuum of a cubic centimeter of distilled water at the tempera- 
ture of 39.2 degrees Fahrenheit. 

10 milligrams (mg.) = i centigram = 0.1543 troy grain. 

10 centigrams = i decigram = 1-543 troy grai ns. 

10 decigrams = 1 gram (g.) = 15432 troy grains. 

10 grams = 1 dekagram == 0.3527 avoir, oz. 

10 dekagrams =1 hectogram = 3.5274 avoir, ozs. 

10 hectograms =1 kilogram (k.). . = 2.2046 avoir, lbs. 

10 kilograms = 1 myriagram = 22.046 avoir, lbs. 

10 myriagrams = 1 quintal = 220.46 avoir, lbs. 

10 quintals = 1 tonneau (t.) . . . = 2204.6 avoir, lbs. 



98 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



Th^ gram is used in weighing gold, jewels, letters, and small 
quantities of things. The kilogram^ or, for brevity, kilo, is used 
by grocers; and the toTvneau (tonno), or metric t07i, is used in find- 
ing the weight of very heavy articles. 

A ^^(3:;;^ is about 15 >^ grains troy; the kilo about 2>^ pounds 
avoirdupois; and the vietric ton, about 2205 pounds. 

A kilo is the weight of a liter of water at its greatest density; 
and the ynetric ton, of a cubic meter of water. 

Metric numbers are written with the decimal-point (.) at the 
right of the figures denoting the unit; thus, 15 meters and 3 centi- 
meters are written, 15.03 m. 

When metric numbers are expressed by figures, the part of 
the expression at the left of the decimal-point is read as the num- 
ber of the unit, and the part at the right, if any, as a number of 
the lowest denomination indicated, or as a decimal part of the 
unit; thus, 46.525 m. is read 46 meters and 525 millimeters, or 46 
and 525 thousandths meters. 

In writing and reading metric numbers, according as the scale 
is 10, 100, or 1000, each denomination should be allowed one, two, 
or three orders of figures. 



SCRIPTURE AND ANCIENT WEIGHTS AND 
MEASURES. 

Scripture Long Measures. 

Inches. 



Digit = 0.912 

Palm = 3.648 

Span = 10.944 



Cubit . . . 
Fathom . 



Feet. Inches. 

. = I 9.888 
. = 7 3.552 



Egryptian Long Measures. 

Nahud cubit. . = i foot 5.71 in. | Royal cubit.. = i foot 8.66 in. 



Grecian Long Measures. 



Feet. Inches. 

Digit = 0.7554 

Pons (foot) = 1 0.0875 

Cubit , =1 1.5984^ 



Stadium. 
Mile .... 



Feet. Inches 
= 604 4.5 
= 4835 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



99 



Digit 

Uncia (inch). 
Pes (foot) . . . . 



Roman Long Measures. 

Inches. 



= 0.72575 
= 0.967 
= 11.604 



Cubit = 

Passus ^ 

Mile(millar'm) 



Feet. 

I 

4 

-4842 



Inches. 
5.406 
10.02 



Attic obolus. 



Attic drachma = 



Ancient Weights 

Troy Grains. 

_ ( 8.2 

( 9-1 

51.9 
54.6 
69 

8.326 
8.985 
3 892 



Alexandrian mina 
Denarius (Roman) 
Denarius Nero. . . 



Ounce . . 
Drachm 



Troy Grains. 

= 9-992 

61.9 
62.5 

54 

415. 1 
437-2 
431-2 
146.5 



Egyptian mina = 

Ptolemaic mina . . . = 

Lesser mina = 

Greater mina = i-io of drachma. 

Talent = 6o minae = 56 pounds avoirdupois. 

Pound = 12 Roman ounces. 

In this last table, where two or more values are given for the 
same weight, they are from different authorities on the subject. 



USEFUL RULES IN MENSURATION. 

To find the circumference of a circle, the diameter bei7ig given. 

Multiply the diameter by 3 1-7. In other words, multiply the 
diameter by 22 and divide by 7. 

Or, should closer accuracy be required, multiply the diameter 
by 3-1416. 

Example I, — i he diameter of a circle is 8 inches; to find the 
circumference. 

8 X 22 = 176, which divided by 7 gives 25 i-/ inches, the cir- 
cumference required. 

Or, 8 X 3*1416 -H- 25*13 inches. 

To find the area of a circle y the dia^neter being given. 

Multiply one-quarter of the diameter, or, which is the same 
thing, half the radius, by the circumference. 

Example II. — The diameter of a circle is 8 inches; to find its 
area. 

L.ofC. 



100 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

One-quarter of the diameter is 2 inches; the circumference is 
25 1-7 inches. 

2 X 25 1-7 ^ 50 2-7 square inches, the area required. 

To find the area of an ellipse^ the axes being given. 
Multiply the axes together, and multiply the result by 7854. 
Exa77iple III, — The major axis of an ellipse is 6 inches and 
the minor 4 inches-; to find its area. 

6X4 = 24, which multiplied by 7854, gives 18-85 square 
inches nearly. 

To find the area of a rectangle. 

Multiply the length by the breadth. 

Example IV. — The length of a rectangle is 16 inches and the 
breadth 9 inches; to find its area. 

16X9^=144 square inches, that is, one square foot the area re- 
quired. 

To find' the volume of a circular, elliptical, rectangular, or other 
tank, or vessel, of which the sides are perpendicular to the base. 

Multiply the area of the base by the height. 

If the answer is required in cubic inches, all the dimensions 
must be multiplied in inches. If in cubic feet, the dimensions 
must be in feet. (See Examples.) 

Exa77iple Va. — The height of a circular tank is 6 feet, and the 
diameter of the base 8 feet; to find its volume. 

By Example II. the area of the base is 50 27 square feet, 
which multiplied by 6 feet gives 301 57 cubic feet, the volume re- 
quired. 

Exajnple Vb. — The height of an elliptical tank is i foot 6 
inches, the base is 6 inches by 4 inches; to find its volume. 

By Example III. the area of the base is 18*85 square inches, 
which multiplied by 18 inches (that is to say, by the height in 
inches, as the answer is to be in cubic inches) gives 339*3' cubic 
inches, the volume required. 

Example Vc, — The height of a rectangular vessel is 2 feet 3 
inches, the length i foot 4 inches, and the breadth 9 inches; to find 
its volume. 

We will suppose the answer is required in cubic feet. This 
being so, it is in feet that the dimensions must be muitiplied. 
Stated in feet, the height is 1% feet, the length \)A, feet, and the 
foot. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 101 

By Example IV. the area of the base is i}i feet multiplied 
by ^ foot, that is, is 4-3X^=12-12-=! square foot, which multi- 
plied by 2X feet gives 2X cubic feet, the volume required. 

To find the volume of a right cone. 

Multiply the area of the base by the height and divide by 3. 
Example VI, — The height of a cone is 6 inches, and the diam- 
eter of the base 3 >^ inches to find the volume. 

The circumference of the base is -^^^^ — =11 inches. 

7 

The area of the base is one-half of i>^ inches (the radius) 
X 11=^ X 1 1=74-8=9>^ square inches. 

And the area 9>^X6 inches (the height)=57>^, which divided 
by 3 gives 19X cubic inches,, the volume required. 

To find the volume of a frustu7n of a right cone. 

From the volume of the complete cone of which the frustum 
is a part subtract the volume of the cone cut off. 

For example, the volume of the frustum C A B D is equal 
to the volume of the complete cone O A B less the volume of 
O C D the cone cut off. 

The height of the complete cone and that of the cone cut 
off from it to form the frustum can be found by Problem V. 

To find the volume of a sphere y the diameter being given. 

Multiply the diameter of the sphere by the area of a circle of 
same diameter, and take two-thirds of the product. 

Example VII. — The diameter of a sphere is 8 inches. The 
area of a circle of same diameter is 50 2-7 (see Example II.); 
which multiplied by 8 gives 402 2-7 cubic inches, two-thirds of 
which (268 1-5 about) is the volume required. 

Or, Multiply the cube of the diameter by '5236. 

Given the volume of a vessel^ any vessel, to find the number of 
gallons, quarts, or pints that it will hold. 

If the volump is in cubic feet, as in Example V a, then, to 
bring it to gallons, multiply by 6X> there being in a cubic 
foot of water 6^ gallons, about. If the volume is in cubic 
inches, divide by 277. The number of cubic inches in a 
gallon of water is 277X nearly; but in ordinary calculations, 
the quarter may be omitted. 



102 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

If the volume is required in quarts, multiply it, if in cubic 
feet, by 25; if in cubic inches, divide it by 69. The number 
of cubic inches in a quart of water is about 69X ; in our ex- 
amples here we have disregarded the fraction. 

If the volume is required in pints, multiply it, if in cubic 
feet, by 50; if in cubic inches, divide it by 35. The number 
of cubic inches in a pint of water is rather more than 34>^; 
in our examples we have taken it as 35. 

Example VIII. — To find the number of gallons, quarts, or 
pints, contained in the tank of Example \a. 

Gallons. — 301 5-7 X6X= 1885 5-7 gallons. 

Quarts. — 301 5-7x25=7542 6-7 quarts. 

Pints, — 301 5-7X50=15085 5-7 pints. 

Example IX. — To find the number of gallons, quarts, or 
pints, contained in the tank of Example Nb. 

Gallons. — 339*3-^277=1 •22^allons about. 

Quarts. — 339 '3^69=4 '92 quarts about. 

/^/;^/^.— 339 '3-^-35=9 '7 pints about. 
Given the number of gallons, quarts, or pints, that a tank or other 
vessel contains, any vessel, of which the sides are perpendicular 
to the base, also the dimensions of the base, to find its height. 

Divide the number of gallons by 6%; this will give the volume 
of the required tank in cubic feet. If the quantity is given in 
quarts, then to ascertain the required volume, multiply by 69. If 
the quantity is given in pints, multiply by 35. 

To find the required height for the tank, divide the volume 
found as just shown, by the area of the base. 



CHAPTER V. 

USEFUL TABLES FOR TINNERS AND 
SHEET HETAL WORKERS. 



WEIGHT OF A LINEAL FOOT OF FLAT BAR IRON, 
IN LBS. 

BIRMINGHAM GAUGE. 







THICKNESS IN 


FRACTIONS OF INCHES. 




2« 


X 


5-16 


Vz 


7-16 


% 


% 


K 


y^ 


I 




.83 


1.04 


1.25 


1.46 


1.67 


2.08 


2.50 


2.92 


3-34 


i^ 


•93 


1. 17 


1.40 


1.64 


1.87 


2.34 


2.81 


3.28 


375 


iX 


1.04 


1.30 


1.56 


1.82 


2.08 


2.60 


3.13 


3.65 


4.17 


iH 


1. 14 


1.43 


1.72 


2.00 


2.29 


2.87 


3-44 


4.01 


4.59 


I'A 


1.25 


1.56 


1.87 


2.19 


2.50 


3.13 


3.75 


4.38 


5.00 


1% 


1-35 


1.69 


2.03 


2.37 


2.71 


3.39 


4.07 


4.70 


5.43 


iH 


1.46 


1.82 


2.19 


2.55 


2.92 


3.65 


4.38 


5.11 


5.84 


iVs 


1.56 


1.95 


2.34 


2.74 


3.13 


3-91 


4.69 


547 


6.26 


2 


1.67 


2.08 


2.50 


292 


3.34 


4.17 


5.01 


5.86 


6.68 


2% 


1.77 


2.21 


2.66 


3.10 


3.55 


443 


5.32 


6.21 


7.10 


2% 


1.87 


2.34 


2.81 


3.28 


3.76 


4.69 


563 


6.57 


7.52 


2^ 


1.98 


2.47 


2.97 


3.47 


396 


4.95 


5-95 


6.94 


7.93 


^Vz 


2.08 


2.60 


3.13 


3.65 


4.17 


5.21 


6.26 


7.30 


8.35 


2% 


2.19 


2.74 


3.28 


3.83 


4.38 


5-47 


6.57 


7.67 


8.77 


2% 


2.29 


2.87 


3.44 


4.01 


4.59 


5-74 


6.88 


8.03 


9.18 


27/s 


2.40 


3.00 


3.60 


4.20 


4.80 


6.00 


7.20 


8.40 


9.60 


3 


2.50 


3.13 


3.75 


4.38 


5.01 


6.26 


W 


8.76 


10.02 


3^ 


2.71 


3.39 


4.07 


4.74 


5.43 


6.78 


8.14 


9-49 


10.86 


yA 


2.92 


3.^5 


4-3^ 


5.11 


\:h 


7.30 


8.76 


10.23 


11.69 


2,H 


3-13 


3.91 


4.68 


5.47 


6.26 


7.82 


9.39 


10.95 


12.52 


4 


3-34 


4.17 


5.00 


5.84 


6.68 


8.35 


10.02 


11.69 


13.36 


4X 


3-54 


4.43 


5.32 


6.21 


7.09 


8.87 


10.64 


12.42 


14.19 


aVz 


3-75 


4.69 


5.63 


6.57 


7.51 


9.39 


11.27 


13.15 


15.03 


4^ 


3.06 


4.95 


5.94 


6.94 


7.93 


9.91 


11.89 


13.88 


15.86 


5 


4-17 


5.21 


6.26 


7.30 


8.35 


10.44 


12.52 


14.61 


16.70 


5X 


4.38 


5.47 


^Al 


7.67 


8.76 


11.96 


13.14 


15.34 


17.53 


5>^ 


4-59 


5.73 


6.88 


8.03 


9.18 


11.48 


13.77 


16.07 


18.37 


SH 


4.80 


6.00 


7.20 


8.40 


9.60 


12.00 


14.40 


16.80 


19.20 


6 


5.01 


6.25 


7.51 


8.76 


10.02 


12.53 


15.03 


17.53 


20.05 



164 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



BAR AND SHEET BRASS-WEIGHT IN POUNDS, 



Thickness, or 
Diameter, or 
Size,; iiLcbes., 


2 


Square bars 
I foot long. 


o^o- 

1 ^ 


Thickness, or 
Diameter, or 
Size; inches. 


C/2 

1? 




§ 3 
o'd- 


1-16 


.2.7 


.015 


.oil 


I i-i6 


45-95 


4.07 


3.20 


K 


5.41 


.055 


.045 


Vs 


49.69 


4.55 


3-57 


1^16 


8.12 


.125 


.1 


3-16 


S1.4 


5.08 


3.97 


X 


10.76 


.225 


.175 


% 


54.18 


5.65 


4.41 


S-I6 


13-47 


.350 


.275 


5-16 


56.85 


6.22 


4.86 


n 


16.25 


.51 


.395 


Vs 


59-55 


6.31 


4.35 


J7-16 


19. 


.69 


.54 


7-16 


62.25 


7.45 


5.85 


K 


21.65 


.905 


.71 


'A 


65. 


8.13 


6.37 


9-16 


24.3 


1. 15 


.9 


9-16 


57-75 


8.83 


6.92 


y. 


27.12 


1.4 


I.I 


H 


70.35 


9.55 


7.48 


11-16 


29.77 


1.72 


1.35 


II 16 


73- 


10.27 


8.05 


u 


32.46 


2.05 


1.60 


H 


75.86 


II. 


8.65 


13-16 


35.18 


2.4 


1.85 


13-16 


78.52 


11.82 


9.29 


?^ 


37.85 


2.75 


2.15 


Vs 


71.25 


72.68 


9-95 


15-16 


40.55 


3.15 


2.48 


15-16 


84. 


13.5 


10.58 


I 


4329 


3.65 


2.8s 


2 


86.75 


14.35 


11.25 



SHEET COPPlER. 

Weight of sheet copper per square foot and per sheet and 
thickness for American wire gauge. 





Wt. 


14x48 


24x48 


30x60 


36x72 


48x72 


No. 


per sq. 


lbs. per 


Bbs. per 


5)s. per 


Bbs. per 


lbs. per 


gauge. 


foot. 


sheet. 


sheet. 


sheet. 


sheet. 


sheet. 


12 


3.660 




29.280 


45.750 


65.880 


87.840 


13 


3-259 




26.072 


40.737 


58.662 


78.216 


14 


2.903 




23.224 


36.287 


52.254 


69.672 


15 


2.585 




20.680 


32.312 


46.530 


62.040 


16 


2.302 




18.416 


28.775 


41.436 


55.248 


17 


2.050 




16.400 


25.625 


36.900 


49.200 


18 


1.825 




14.600 


22.812 


32.850 


43.800 


19 


1.625 




13.000 


20.312 


29.850 


36.000 


20 


1.447 




11.576 


18.087 


26.046 


34.728 


21 


1.289 




10.312 


16.112 


23.192 


30.936 


22 


1. 148 


5-357 


9.184 


14.360 


20.664 


27.552 


23 


1.022 


4.769 


8.176 


12.775 


18.396 


24,528 


24 


.910 


4.246 


7.280 


11.375 


16.380 


21.840 


25 


.810 


3.780 


6.480 


10.125 


14.580 


19.440 


26 


.722 


3.369 


5.776 


9.025 


12.996 


17.328 


27 


.643 


3.000 


5-144 


8.037 


11.574 


15.432 


28 


.572 


2.669 


4.576 


7.150 


10.296 


13.728 



WORKSHOP MAiSIUAL. 



10^ 



TINNED SHEATHING COPPER. 



Thickness 
Wire Gauge 


Weight per 
sheet. 


Size of Sheet 


Weight per 
Square foot. 


No. 
24 

25 


Lbs. 

4 
4 


Ozs. 

9 

4 


Inches. 
14x48 
14x48 


Ounces. 
14 
17 



GUTTER COPPER — 20x72 INCHES. 



Thickness 
Wire Gauge 


Thickness of 30x60 
sheet. 


Sheet of same thick- 
ness 20x72 


No. 
27 
24 
23 


Lbs. 
10 
12 
14 


Size. 
30x60 
30x60 
30x60 


Lbs. 

9 

10 

13 


Ozs. 

2 
8 

2 



BAR AND SHEET COPPER. — WEIGHT IN POUNDS. 



^dH 


^m 


^ in 


»-* in 


^UH 


CAl 


HH CO 


3 


"3^ 




P 


P 


"is- 




8 t 


ness, or 

eter, or 

Inches. 


•-5 <-+ 


r± >-{ 


r-h i-{ 


O) 3 


^ n> 


«-^ ^ 




P 


^ 0) 


2 ^ 

crq -{ 

. V3 





-: 


§0- 


§0- 

(K) SJ 

* CO 


1-16 


2.88 


015 


.oil 


I 1-16 


49. 


4.35 


3.41 


Ys 


5-75 


.06 


.056 


Vs 


52. 


4.86 


3.H5 


3-16 


8.65 


.134 


.105 


3-16 


54.9 


5.40 


4.29 


X 


11.48 


•235 


.187 


X 


57.65 


6. 


4.73 


5-16 


14.36 


•375 


.295 


5-16 


60.5 


6.60 


5.20 


Vi 


17.28 


■54 


.424 


^8 


53-45 


7.27 


5-72 


7-16 


20.19 


•735 


.575 


7-16 


66.35 


7.90 


6.28 


y^ 


23.1 


.960 


.75 


H 


69.3 


8.64 


6.80 


Q-16 


26. 


1.21 


•95 


Q-16 


72.15 


9.28 


7.30 


% 


28.85 


1.51 


1. 17 


?^ 


75.1 


10.15 


8. 


11-16 


31.68 


1.81 


1.42 


II-I6 


77.95 


10.95 


8.6 


u 


34.57 


2.15 


1.7 


H 


80.75 


11.70 


9.24 


13-16 


36.46 


2.54 


2. 


13-16 


83.60 


1260 


9.85 


% 


40.39 


2.95 


2.3 


Vs 


86.58 


13.46 


10.55 


15-16 


43.27 


3-37 


2.64 


15-16 


89.45 


14-35 


11.25 


I 


46.15 


.3-84 


3.01 


2 


92.25 


15-35 


12. 



I06 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

MARKS AND WEIGHTS OF TIN-PLATE. 







No. 








Marks on 


NAMES. 


SIZES. 


in 


Weight 


OF 


THE 






Box. 


Each Box. 


Boxes. 




Inches. 




cts. 


qrs. 


lbs. 




Common No. i 


i3l<xio 
13XX gH 


225 


I 




3 




21 


CI 


Common No. 2 


CII 


Common No. 3 


I2^X 9>^ 

13^x10 


u 





3 

I 


t6 


cm 


Cross No. I 


a 


T 





XI 


Two Crosses No. i 


U ii 


a 


I 


I 


21 


XXI 


Three Crosses No. i 


U i( 


a 


I 


2 


14 


XXXI 


Four Crosses No. i 


a u 


u 


I 


S 


7 


XXXXI 


Common Doubles 


i6j^xi2j4 


100 





S 


21 


CD 


Cross " 


« u 


(( 


I 





14 


XD 


Two Cross « 


u u 


a 


I 


I 


7 


XXD 


Three " « 


u u 


ii 


I 


2 





XXXD 


Four « « 


a u 


u 


I 


2 


21 


XXXXD 


Common Small Doubles 


15 XII 


200 


I 


2 





CSD 


Cross 


u a 


if 


I 


2 


21 


XSD 


Two Cross ** " 


U ii 


» 


I 


^ 


14 


XXSD 


Three « " 


a ii 


)j 


2 





7 


XXXSD 


Four « « « 


u a 


» 


2 


I 





XXXXSD 


Waster's Common No. i 


1334^x10 


225 


I 








WCI 


" Cross No. I . . . 


a u 


a 


I 


I 





WXI 



SHEET IRON. 

Black and galvanized sheet iron; weight and measurement per 
square foot. 



Roof 


Weight 


Square 


No. of 


Weight 


Square 


wire 


per 


foot 


wire 


per 


foot 


gauge. 


Sq. foot. 


per ton. 


gauge. 


Sq. foot. 


per ton. 


29 


12 oz. 


2,987 


20 


28 oz. 


1,327 


28 


53 


2,757 


19 


30 


IJ95 


27 


14 


2,560 


18 


35 


1,054 


26 


15 


2,389 


^l 


36 


996 


25 


16 


2,240 


16 


42 


853 


24 


17 


1,991 


15 


46 


779 


23 


19 


1,792 


14 


53 


^77 


22 


21 


1,629 


13 


61 


588 


21 


24 


1,493 


12 


70 


512 



WORKSHOP MAN'UAL. 



107 



Sheet Iron.— Continued. 



COMMON SHEET IRON. 



Thickness and weight per square foot of any kind, sheets 
usually 24 in. wide and 28 in. long. 



73 OJ 

H'5 









c« V 

II 


fcJO 


J 

cr 




No. 


lbs. 


oz. 


lbs. 


OZ. 


No. 


lbs. 


OZ. 


lbs. 


OZ. 


U 


3 


12 


52 




24 


I 


I 


14 


I 


16 


3 




42 




25 


I 




14 




18 


2 


5 


32 


6 


26 





15 


13 


2 


20 


I 


9 


21 




27 





u 


12 


4 


22 


I 


5 


18 


6 


28 





12 


10 


8 



WEIGHT OF GALVANIZED SHEET IRON. 



No. 


Width in 


Weight per 


No. 


Width in 


Weight per 




inches. 


sheet — lbs. 




inches. 


sheet— lbs. 


16 


24 


42 


24 


28 


18 


16 


30 


54 


24 


30 


20 


18 


24 


35 


26 


24 


14 


18 


28 


41 


26 


28 


17 


18 


30 


43 


26 


30 


18 


20 


24 


26 


27 


24 


13 


20 


28 


30 


27 


28 


16 


20 


30 


33 


27 


30 


17 


22 


24 


20 


28 


24 


13 


22 


28 


25 


28 


28 


15 


22 


30 


27 


28 


30 


16 


24 


24 


16 









log 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



NET COST AND WEIGHT OF GALVANIZED SHEET 

IRON. 

The following table shows gauges of galvanized sheet iron 
with weights per square foot; list price per pound; cost per square 
foot at list, together with cost per pound and per square foot at 
different discounts. The prices are calculated to three places of 
decimals, which is sufficiently accurate for all practical purposes. 



Gauge Number. 



14 



i6 



17 



19 



Weight per square foot, oz. 



Light price per pound . . . 

Cost per square foot at List. 



Cost at 5 per ct, 

•* VA ** 

« 10 " 

« j^ « 

" 20 " 

« 22)^ « 

« 25 " 

« 27>^ « 

« 30 « 

« 32)^ « 

" 33M " 

" 35 " 

« 371^ « 

" 40 " 

« 42>^ « 



Dis. 



per lb. 
persq. 
per lb, 
persq. 
per lb. 
perlb. 
per lb, 
persq. 
per lb, 
persq. 
per lb 
persq. 
per lb 
persq. 
per lb 
persq. 
per lb 
persq. 
per ib 
persq. 
per lb 
per sq. 
per lb 
persq. 
per lb 
persq. 
per lb 
persq. 
per lb 
persq. 
per lb 
per sq. 
per lb 
per sq. 



ft. 



60 



12 
45 



. 12 
.36 



ft. 



ft. 



.114 
.428 
. Ill 
.416 
.108 
.405 
.105 

•394 
. 102 

.383 
.099 

.371 

.096 

.36 

.093 

.349 

.09 

.338 
.087 
.326 
.084 

.081 

.304 

.08 

.30 

.078 

.293 

.075 

.281 

.72 

.27 

.069 

.259 



.114 
.342 
, III 

•333 
,108 

.324 
.105 

•315 
. 102 
.306 
.099 

.297 

.096 

.288 

.093 

.279 

.09 

.27 

.C87 

.261 

.084 

.252 

.081 

.243 
.08 

.24 

,078 

.234 

.075 

,225 

,072 

.216 

,069 

,207 



43 

12 
323 



38 



33 



.114 
.306 
.III 

.2^ 
.108 
. 290 

.282 

. 102 

.274 

.099 

.266 

.096 

.258 

.093 

•25 

.09 

.242 

.087 

.234 

.084 

.226 

.081 

.218 

.08 

.215 

.078 

.21 

.075 

.202 

.072 

.194 

.069 

.185 



.285 



.12 
.248 



.114 

.278 
. Ill 
.264 
.108 

.257 
.105 

.249 
. 102 
.242 
.099 

■235 
.096 
.228 

•093 
.221 
.09 
.214 
.C87 
.207 
.084 
.20 
.081 
. 192 
.08 
.19 
,078 
185 
,075 
178 
072 
171 
069 
164 



.114 

.235 

.III 

.229 

.108 

.223 

.105 

.217 

.102 

.21 

.099 

.204 

.096 

.198 

•C93 

.192 

.09 

.186 

.C87 

.179 
.084 

.173 

.081 

.167 

.08 

.165 

.078 

.161 

.075 

.155 

.072 

.149 
.069 
.142 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



109 



Net Cost and Weight of Galvanized Sheet Iron. 

(Continued.) 



Gauge number 14 



Weight per square foot, oz. 



List price per pound 

Cost per square foot at List 




60 



12 
45 



16 



48 



,12 

.36 



,066 

,198 

,063 

,189 

,06 

,18 

,057 

.171 

,054 

, 162 

.051 

.153 
.048 

.144 
.045 

•135 
.042 
. 126 

.039 
.117 
.036 
.1 

.033 
.099 

•03 
.09 



17 



43 



12 

323 



.066 

.177 

.063 

. 169 

.06 

.16 

.057 

•153 
.054 
.145 
.051 

.048 
. 129 

.045 
.121 
.042 

.113 
•039 
.105 
.036 
.097 

•033 

.08c 

•03 
.o8j 



19 



38 



.12 

.285 



33 

.12 
.248 



066 

157 
C63 

15 
06 

143 
•C57 
•135 
.054 
.128 
051 
,121 
,048 
.114 
045 
,107 
,042 
.100 
•039 
.093 
.036 
.085 

.033 
.078 

■03 



.066 
.136 
.063 

•13 

.06 

.124 

.057 

.118 

.054 

. Ill 

.051 

.105 

.048 

.099 

.045 

•093 

.042 

.087 

.039 
.081 
.036 
.074 

.033 
.068 



Gauge Number. 



Weight per sq. ft., oz . 



List price per pound. . 
Cost per sq. ft. at List. 



Cost at 5 per ct.Dis. 
« 7>^ '^ " 



ft. 



125 



{ per lb 
\ per sq 
\ per lb. . . 

per sq. ft, 

per lb. . . 

per sq. ft. 

per lb. . . 

per sq. ft. 



20 



28 



12 
21 



114 
20 
III 
,194 
,108 
,189 
,105 
,184 



21 22 23 24 



24 



13 
195 



124 
i8s 

12 

18 

117 

176 

114 

171 



21 



13 
171 



124 

162 

12 

158 

117 

154 

114 

149 



19 



17 



.13 
.154 



.13 
.138 



.124 

.147 
.12 

•143 
.117 

•139 
.114 

.135 



.124 

•131 

. 12 

.128 

.117 

. 124 

.114 

.121 



no 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



Net Cost and Weight of Galvanized Sheet Iron. 

(Continued,) 



Gauge number. 



Weight per square foot, oz 



List price per pound 

Cost per square foot at List 



20 



28 



12 
21 



24 



.13 

.105 



21 



13 
171 



23 



19 



•13 
.154 



24 
17 



13 
138 



Cost at 15 per c. 

« 20 " 

« 22>^ « 

« 25 

" 27;^ « 

« 30 " 

" 32>^ " 

** 33K " 

« 40 " 

« 42>^ " 

" 45 

' M% " 

« 50 

" 52^ " 

« 55 « 

" 57>^ " 

« 60 " 



Dis j P^^ lb 



per sq. ft. 

( per lb 

( per sq. ft. 

K per lb 

\ per sq. ft. 

( per lb 

\ per sq. ft. 
\ per lb. . . . 
( per sq. ft. 
^ per lb 

per sq. ft. 



\ per lb 



per sq. ft. 



\ per lb 



per sq. ft. 

per lb 

per sq. ft. 
per lb. . . . 
per sq. ft. 



\ per lb 

\ per sq. ft. 



( per lb 
( per sq. ft. 

\ per lb 

\ per sq. ft. 

\ per lb 

\ per sq. ft. 
^ per lb. . . . 

per sq. ft. 

per lb. . . . 

per sq. ft. 

per lb. . . . 

per sq. ft. 

per lb 

per sq. ft. 

per lb. . . . 

per sq. ft. 

per lb. . . . 

per sq. ft. 



102 .III 
179 .166 



.099 

.173 
.096 
.168 

.093 
.163 
.09 
.158 
.087 
.152 
.084 
.147 
.081 
. 142 
.98 
14 
.078 

■137 
,075 

131 

,072 
, 126 
,069 
, 121 
,066 
,116 
,063 

II 
06 

105 

057 
,10 

054 
,095 
,051 
,089 
,048 
,084 



.107 
.161 
.104 
.156 
.101 
.151 

.0( 

.146 
.094 
.141 
.091 

.137 
.088 
.132 
.087 

•13 

.085 

.127 

.c8i 

. 122 

.078 

.117 

.075 

. 112 

.072 

. 107 

.068 

.102 

.06 c; 

.098 

.062 

.093 
.059 
.088 
.055 
.083 
.052 
.078 



.III 

.145 
. 107 

.141 
. 104 

■137 

. lOI 

. 132 
.098 
.128 
■ 094 
. 124 
.091 
,119 
,o88Lo88 
.115 .104 
,087 .087 
,114'. 103 
,085 .085 

III .I05 

,081 .081 
, 107 .096 
078,. 078 
, 102'. 093 

075 '.075 
098 .089 
072 .072 



III .III 



.131 

.107 

.127 

. 104 

. 124 

.101 

.12 

.09< 

.116 

.094 

. 112 

.09 

.108 



.094 

.068 

.09 

.065 

.085 

.062 

.081 

.059 

.077 

.055 

.073 
.052 
.068 



.085 
.068 
.081 
.065 
.077 
.062 

.073 
.059 
.069 
.055 
.066 
.052 
.062 



.117 
. 107 

.114 

.104 

. Ill 

.101 

.107 

.098 

. 104 

.094 

.10 

.091 

.097 

.088 

.093 

.087 

.092 

.085 

.09 

.081 

.086 

.078 

.083 

.075 

.079 

.072 

.076 

.068 

•073 
.065 
.069 
.062 
.066 
.059 
.062 
.055 
.059 
.052 
.055 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



Ill 



Net Cost and Weight of Galvanized Sheet Iron. 

( Continued.) 



Gauge number. 



20 



21 



22 



23 



24 



Weight per square foot, oz. 



List price per pound 

Cost per square foot at List 



28 



24 



21 



19 



17 



,12 
21 



13 

105 



13 
171 



.13 
.154 



.138 



Costat62K% Dis.jPfrsq;ft 
"65 « " 



67K 
70 

72K 
75 



per lb. 
per sq. ft. 
per lb. . . . 
per sq. ft. 
per lb. . . . 
per sq. ft. 
per lb. . . . 
per sq. ft. 
per lb. . . . 
per sq. ft. 



.045 
.079 
.042 
.073 
.039 
,068 
,036 
.063 

.033 
,058 

.03 
,052 



.049 
.073 
.045 
.068 
.042 
.063 

.039 
.058 
.036 
.054 
.032 

.049 



,049 
,064 

.045 
.060 
.042 
,056 

.039 
,051 
,036 

,047 
,032 
,042 



.049 
.058 

.045 
.054 
.042 
.050 

•039 
.046 
.036 
.042 
.032 
.038 



.049 
.052 

.045 
.048 
.042 
.045 

•039 
.041 
.036 
.038 
.032 
.034 



Gauge Number. 



Weight per square foot, oz. 



List price per pound 

Cost per square foot at List. 



y « « (per lb. 
' ^'^ ■ I per sq. 

,, S per lb. 
/ per sq. 
« \ per lb 
/per 



Costat5perct.Dis.jP^^^lJ;fi; 

.... " \ P^^ ^^ 

I per sq. ft. 

i per lb 

\ per sq. ft. 

' per lb 

per sq. ft. 

per lb 

per sq. ft. 

per lb 

per sq. ft. 

per lb 

per sq. ft. 

per lb 

per sq. ft. 

per lb 

per sq. ft. 

per lb 

per sq. ft. 

per lb 

per sq. ft, 



10 « 

I2>^.« 

15 « 

^7/2 " 

20 " 

22>^ « 

25 " 

27/2 « 

30 « 



u \ per lb 

} per sq, 
« i per lb 

] per sq, 
u S per lb 

( per sq, 
« \ per lb 

} per sq, 
« ( per lb 

} per sq, 
« i per lb 



25 26 



16 



133 

133 

13 

13 

126 

126 

123 

123 

119 

116 
116 
112 
112 

109 
109 
105 
105 
102 
102 
098 
098 



15 



.14 
.131 



•133 
.125 

.13 

. 121 

.126 

.118 

.123 

.115 

.119 

.112 

.116 

.108 

. 112 

.105 

.109 

. 102 

.105 

.098 

. 102 

.095 

.098 

.092I 



27 28 29 



14 



15 
131 



13 12 



16 .18 
13 .135 



143 .152 
125 . 124 

139;. 148 
121 . 120 

1351.144 
118. 117 



.131 
.115 
.128 
.112 
. 124 
,108 
,12 
105 
116 
102 

113 
098 
109 
095 
105 
092 



.14 

.114 

.136 

.III 

.132 

.107 

.128 

.104 

.124 

. lOI 

. 12 

.098 

.116 

.094 

. 112 

.094 



.171 
.128 
.167 
.125 
.162 
.122 
.158 
.118 

.153 
.115 

.149 
.III 

.144 
.108 

.14 
.105 

.135 

. lOI 

.138 

.096 

.125 

.093 



112 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



Net Cost and Weight of Galvanized Slieet Iron. 

(Continued.) 



Gauge Number 25 26 27 28 29 



Weight per square foot, oz. 



List price per pound ........ 

Cost per square foot at List. 



Cost at323^p.c. 

" 33>^ " 

« 35 « 

" -hVA " 

" 40 " 

« 42>^ " 

" 45 " 

" 47^ " 

" 50 " 

« 52^ " 

« 55 - 

" 57^ " 

« 60 " 

« 62>^ " 

« 65 " 

" 67K " 

" 70 " 

« 721^ " 

" 75 " 



Dis 



isj 



per lb. 
per sq. 
per lb. 
per sq. 
per lb. 
per sq. 
pet lb. 
per sq. 
pel lb. 
per sq. 
per lb. 
per sq. 
per lb. 
per sq. 
per lb. 
per sq. 
per lb. 
per sq. 
per lb. 
per sq, 
per lb. 
per sq. 
per lb. 
per sq. 
per lb. 
per sq. 
per lb. 
per sq. 
per lb. 
per sq. 
per lb. 
per sq. 
per lb. 
per sq. 
per lb. 
per sq. 
per lb. 
per sq. 



ft. 



ft. 



ft. 



ft.. 



16 



14 
14 



,095 

,095 
■093 
093 
091 
091 



,084 
,084 



.077 
,077 

,074 
,074 
.07 
,07 
,067 
,067 
,063 
063 
06 
06 
,056 
056 
,052 
652 
049 
049 
045 
045 
,042 
.042 
.038 
.038 
.035 
>035 



15 



14 
131 



.095 
.089 

.093 

.088 

.091 

.085 

.088 

.082 

.084 

.079 

.081 

.075 

.077 

.072 

.074 

.069 

.07 

.066 

.067 

.062 

.063 

.059 

.06 

.056 

.056 

.052 

.052 

.049 

.049 
.046 

.045 
.043 
.042 

.039 
.038 
.036 
•035 
.033 



14 



15 
131 



. lOI 

.089 

. 10 

.088 

.098 

.085 

.094 

.082 

.09 

.079 

.086 

.075 

• 083 

. 072 

.079 

.069 

.075 

.066 

.071 

.062 

.068 

.059 

.064 

.056 

.06 

.052 

.056 

.049 
.052 
.046 
.049 
.043 
.045 
.039 
.041 
.036 
•037 
•033 



13 



16 
13 



108 

088 

,107 

,087 

,104 

,085 

.10 

.081 

.096 

.078 

.092 

.075 

.088 

.072 

.084 

.068 

.08 

.065 

.076 

.062 

.072 

.059 

.068 

.055 

.064 

,052 

,060 

,049 
.056 

.045 
,052 
,042 
,048 
^039 
044 
036 
040 
032 



.18 
.135 



.121 

.09 

. 12 

.097 

.118 

.083 

.114 

.088 

.101 

.084 
.108 
.079 
.094 

.C75 

.091 

.07 

.098 

.066 

.084 

.061 

.081 

.087 

.077 

.056 

.072 

.054 
.067 
.051 
.063 

.047 
.058 

.044 
.054 
.040 

.049 
• 037 
.045 
.034 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



113 



REGISTERS AND VENTILATORS, VERTICAL WHEEL. 



Sizes 
as given 
on List 



4x8 

xio 
X15 
X18 
X 8 
X 9 

XIO 

XI4 
XI6 

XI8 

X24 

X 7 

XIO 

8x8 
8 XIO 
8 X12 
8 X15 
8 X18 
9 



4 
4 
4 
6 
6 
6 
6 
6 
6 
6 
7 
7 



X 9 

xi2 
XI4 



10 XIO 

10 XI2 

10 XI4 

10 XI6 

ioKxi6X 

12 XI2 

12 XI5 

12 XI7 

12 XI9 

14 XI4 

14 XI8 

14 X22 

16 XI6 

16 X20 

16 X24 

20 X20 

20 X26 

21 X29 

3Q, X30 



Opening to 
admit Body 
of Register. 



4K8X 8X 

4^xioX 

4^x15 

4>^xi 

6Kx gVz 

6>^xi4X 
6>^xi6 
6^x18/8 
6Kx24>^ 
7^x yn 
7^x10^ 
8Xx8X 
8^x10^ 
8Xxii^ 
8^xi5>i 
8^xi8X 
9Xx 9X 
9XX12 
9Xxi4>^ 
io>^xioX 

I0>^XI2>^ 

io>^xi4X 
io>^xi6>^ 

io)ixi6j4 

12 XI2 
12 X15 
12 X17X 

I2>^XI9>^ 

i4^xi8X 

I4^X2lJ^ 
I5^X20>^ 

i6^x24X 

2IXX2IX 
20>^X26 
21 X29 

3Q X30 



Extreme 

Dimensions 

of Register 

Face. 



5>^x 9^ 
51^x11^ 
5l<xi6>^ 
5>^xi9X 
7%x 9l^ 
8 X10I4: 
8 X12 
8Mxi5^ 

8>^X20 

8 X26 

8>^x 8>^ 
8|<xiiK 
9^x 9^ 
9>^xii>^ 
9^xi3>^ 
9^x16^ 

10 xi9^ 
io|4^xio|4f 
io|<xi3^ 

11 x 6>^ 

12 X12 
ii|4:xi4 
12XX16X 
12 X18 

I2>^Xl8>^ 

14 XI4 

I3>^xi6?^ 
14 X19 
i4Xx2i>^ 
i6Kxi6>^ 

l6>^X20^ 

16^x24 
18^x18^ 

I7>^X2I^ 

i8^x26|< 

22|^X22^ 
22^X28^ 

23MX31X 
32^X32^ 



Depth of the 
Register. 

Clas'd Open 



1% 
iji 
iVs 
1% 
1% 

iH 

1% 

1% 

1% 

2 

2 

2% 

2yk 
2% 
2% 
2% 
2% 
2% 
2% 

2>^ 
2% 
2>^ 
2>^ 
2^ 
2% 
2% 
2% 
2H 
2H 
2K 
27/^ 
2% 
2Vs 

yA 

3H 



2 

2^ 

2K 
2K 
2K 
2K 
2K 
2K 
2K 
2K 
2>^ 
2K 
2|< 
2?< 

3 
3 
3 
3 

3K 

3X 

3l< 

3¥ 

314^ 

3¥ 

3^ 

4X 

4X 

4X 

A'A 

4 

4 

4 

4K 

4^ 

4)^ 

5^ 

5I< 
6 



Opening to 

admit Iron 

Border. 



[0J^XI2X 

^oKxi3X 

[oysxi^ys 

>^X20|< 
>^X22|< 
ysX2S7/^ 

ysxiiys 

'H^l2}i 

j^xuH 

2^x161^ 

2|4^XI9>^ 
2|<X22^ 

I3>^xi3|< 

13^x161^ 

^3^xi9>^ 

[41^x1414: 

'5Mxi7>i 



[5^xi9>^ 

[5 X2lX 



[6>^xi9>^ 

[7^X22^ 

[7^^x24 

igy2yiigU 

^9U^2yy2 

I9%X27X 

2lJ^X2lJ^ 
20|<X25J^ 
22 X30^ 

27^x27^^ 

27;^x33X 
28Xx36>^ 
371^x3714: 



114 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



NO. POUNDS OF ROUND AND SQUARE BAR IRON 
PER FOOT. 









w 






w 












(U 






<D 






O 




(A 

u 




pq 


pq 


II 




d 

^ 




V 


Ti 


rt.S 


?^ 


T3 


03 .S 


<u 


■a 


s 


a 


fl 


5i . 




a 


>-< 




a 





3 




M g 


:3 





MS 










Q 






Q 






X 


.209 


.164 


I 


3.34 


2.62 


2}i 


27.61 


21.68 


5-16 


.326 


.256 


1^8 


4.22 


3.32 


3 


30.07 


23.60 


n 


.470 


.369 


IM 


5.2s 


4.09 


3^ 


35.28 


27.70 


7-16 


.640 


.502 


I^ 


6.3s 


4.96 


3M 


40.91 


32.23 


K 


.835 


.656 


I^ 


7.51 


5.90 


41^ 


46.97 


36.89 


9-16 


1.057 


.831 


1^8 


8.82 


6.92 


4 


53.44 


41-97 


/8 


1.305 


1.025 


I|^ 


10.29 


8.03 


4^ 


60.32 


47-38 


II-16 


1.579 


1 .241 


I?i 


11.74 


9.22 


4J4 


67.63 


53-12 


^8 


1.879 


1.476 


2 


13.36 


10.49 


4f.i: 


75.35 


59.18 


13-16 


2.205 


1.732 


2>^ 


15.08 


11.84 


S 


83.51 


65.58 


rs 


2.556 


2. on 


2^ 


16.91 


13.27 


5X 


92.46 


72.39 


15-16 


2.936 


2.306 


2^8 


18.84 


14.79 


5/2 


101.03 


79-35 








2M 


20.87 


16.39 


51^ 


114.43 


86.73 








2f^ 


23.11 


18.07 


6 


120.24 


94-43 








21^ 


25.26 


19.84 









INTERNAL AREAS OF WROUGHT IRON PIPE. 



Size of Pipe. 


Internal Area. 


Length per foot 


Gallons per foot 






of Surface. 


in Length. 


Vz in. 


0.3648 in. 


4.502 ft. 


0.0102 gal. 


H " 


0.5333 " 


3.637 " 


0.0230 " 


I 


0.8627 « 


2.903 •* 


0.0408 « 


iX " 


1.496 « 


2.301 " 


0.0638 « 


I'A " 


2.038 « 


2.01 « 


0.0918 " 


2 « 


3-355 " 


I. 611 « 


0.1632 " 


2/2 " 


4-783 • 


1.328 « 


0.2550 « 


3 " 


7.388 " 


I. 091 « 


0.3673 ** 


3^ " 


9.887 • 


0.955 " 


0.4998 « 


4 " 


12.730 " 


0.849 " 


0.6528 « 


4>^ " 


15-939 " 


0.765 " 


0.8263 « 


5 " 




0.629 « 


1.020 « 


6 « 


28 . 889 " 


0.577 " 


1.469 « 


7 " 


38.737 « 


0.535 « 


1.999 " 


8 « 


50.039 « 


0.444 ** 


2. 611 « 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



IIS 



WILSON'S TABLE OF DIMENSIONS OF CHIMNEYS. 



0) 

.S 
>> 




u2 


s of column 
alanced by 
re. 


each sq. ft. 
Assuming 7 
horse power. 


e ° 




tiimney in ft. 
r where sev- 
' working to- 


D 


I 

D 

D 

-« 

3 


S 

u 


^ 


c >- 2: 


.S 

^ C nJ 


>« 0. 

e . 




o 


^ a 


d ^ 4.J 


a 


^ "2 


2 ^.^ q 




S 











ol^l ^ 


3S 










u 5 


30 


78.24 


.218 


7.3 


.146 


.091 


182 


40 


90.35 




296 


8 


4 


.126 


.077 


155 


50 


lOI.OI 




3t>4 


9 


4 


.113 


.070 


140 


60 


110.65 




437 


10 


3 


.103 


.064 


129 


70 


119.52 




5 


II 


2 


.095 


.059 


119 


80 


127.77 




58 


II 


9 


.089 


.055 


III 


90 


135-52 




656 


12 


6 


.084 


.052 


los 


100 


142.85 




729 


13 


3 


.08 


.05 


01 


125 


159-71 




911 


14 


9 


.071 


.054 


089 


150 


174.96 




09 


16 


3 


.065 


.04 


082 


175 


188.98 




26 


17 


6 


.060 


.038 


075 


200 


202.03 




45 


18 


8 


.056 


.035 


07 


225 


214.28 




64 


20 


.053 


.033 


066 


250 


225.87 




82 


21 


•05 


.031 


063 


275 


236.90 




99 


22 


.048 


•^^0 


06 


300 


247.43 


2 


18 


23 1 


.046 


.028 


057 



SPUN BRASS KETTLES-WEIGHT AND CAPACITY OF. 


Diameter 


Weight. 


Capacity. 


Diameter. 


Weight. 


Capacity 


Inches. 


Pounds. 


Gallons. 


Inches. 


Pounds. 


Gallons. 


7 


I 


y^ 


18 


loK 


10 


8 


iK 


I 


19 


I2>^ 


12 


9 


2'A 


iK 


20 


16^ 


14 


10 


3 


2 


21 


18 


17 


II 


3K 


2>^ 


22 


20 


18 


12 


4 


3 


23 


23 ^ 


23 


13 


5 


4 


24 


27K 


25 


14 


SH 


4^ 


25 


29 


30 


15 


6/2 


5 


26 


32 


32 


16 


7/2 


6 


'^l 


37 


37 


17 


9 


8 


28 


40 


42 



Ii6 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



COST OF TIN ROOFING PER SQUARE AND SQUARE 

FOOT. 

FLAT SEAM ROOFING — COST WITH 20X28 TIN. 



Cost per 
Price of square of 
Tin per flat roof Cost per 
box. 20x28 Tin. sq. foot. 
. .$ 2.01 0201 



$» . 00 . . 
8.50.. 

9 . 00 2 . 26 

9.50 2.38 

10. CO 2.51 

10.50 2.63 

11.00 2.76 

11.50 2.88 

12 00 3.00 

12.50 313 

13.00 3.2; 

13-50 3-38 

14 00 3.50 

14.50 3-63 

1500 3.75 

15.50 3.88 



2.13 0213 

. . .0226 

.. .0238 

.0251 

., .0263 

.. .0276 

.. .0288 

. 0300 

.. .0313 
.. .0325 

.. -0338 

,. .0350 

. .0363 

.. -0375 

.. .0388 



Price of 
Tin per 

box. 
$16.00... 

16.50... 

17.00... 

17.50... 

18.00. . . 

18.50... 

19.00... 

19.50... 

20.00. . . 

20.50. . . 

21 .00. . . 

21.50. . . 

22 . 00 . . 

22.50... 

23.00... 



Cost per 
square of 

flat roof 
20x28 Tin. 

$4-Oi... 

4.13... 
4 . 26 . . . 

4.38... 

4.51-.. 
4.63... 

4-76... 
4.88... 
5.01... 
5.14... 
5.26... 
5.38... 
5.51... 
5.63... 
5.76... 



Cost per 
sq. foot. 
.0401 

.0413 
.0426 
.0438 
.0451 
.0463 
.0476 
.0488 
.0501 

.0513 
.0526 
.0538 
.0551 
.0563 
.0576 



STANDING SEAM ROOFING — COST WITH 20X28 TIN. 



Cost per 

square of 

standing seam 

roof with 

20x28 Tin. 



Price 
of Tin 
per box, 



^5.00... 

8.50... 

9.00... 

9.50... 
10.00... 
10.50... 
11.00... 
11.50... 
12.00. . . 
12.50... 
13.00... 
13.50... 
14.00... 
14.50... 
15.00... 
15.50... 
16.00... 



2.15 
2.28 
2.41 

2.55 
2.68 
2.82 
2.95 

3.09 
3.21 

3.35 
3.48 
3.62 

3.75 
3.89 
4.02 

4. IS 
4.29 



Cost per 
sq. foot. 
.0215 
.0228 
.0241 
.0255 
.0268 
.0282 
.0295 
.0309 
.0321 

.0335 
.0348 
.0362 

.0375 
.0389 
.0402 

.0415 
,0429 





Cost per 






square of 




Price standing seam 




of Tin 


roof with 


Cost per 


per box. 20x28 Tin. 


sq. foot. 


$16.50... 


..$4.42.... 


.. .0442 


17.00... 


.. 4.56.... 


. . .0456 


17.50... 


... 4.69.... 


.. ,0469 


18.00.. . 


.. 4.82.... 


.. .0482 


18.50... 


... 4.96.... 


. . .0496 


19.00. .. 


.. 5.09.... 


. . .0509 


19.50... 


.. 5.23.... 


. . .0523 


20 . 00 , . . 


.. 5.36 


.• .0536 


20 . 50 . . . 


... 5-49. ... 


. - .0549 


21.00. . . 


.. 5.63.... 


. . .0563 


^1.50... 


.. 5.76.... 


. . .0576 


22.00.. . 


.. 5-90.... 


.. .0590 


22.50. . . 


.. 6.03.... 


. • .0603 


23.00... 


.. 6.17.... 


.. .0617 


23.50... 


.. 6.30.... 


.. .0630 


24.00. ••, 


.. 6.43.... 


. . .0643 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



117 



Cost of Tin Roofing per Square and Square Foot. 

(Continued.) 

FLAT SEAM ROOFING— COST WITH 14X20 TIN. 



Price of 

Tin per 

box. 



Cost per 

square of 

flat roof 

14x20 Tin. 



$4.25 $ 2.21 

4.50.... 

4.75.... 

5.00 

5.25.... 
5.50.... 

5.75.... 
6.00 



Cost per 
sq. foot. 
. .0221 
. -0234 
,. -0247 
.0260 



2.34.... 
2.47.... 

2.60 

2.73.... 
2.86.... 
2.99 0299 



.0273 
.0286 



6.25. 
6.50. 
6.75. 
7.00. 
7.25. 
7.50. 

7.75. 
8.00. 



. .0312 
. .0325 
. .0338 
. .0351 
. .0364 
3.77...... .0377 

3-90 0390 

4.03 0403 

4.16 0416 



3.12. 

3-25- 
3.38. 
3.51. 
3-64. 



Price of 

Tin per 

box. 

$8.25 
8.50 

8.75 
9.00 
9.25 
9.50 

9-75 
10.00 
10.25 
10.50 
10.75 
11.00 
11.25 
11.50 
11.75 
12.00 



Cost per 

square of 

flat roof 





.§4. 29 


ill. 




. 4.42 






• 4.55 






. 4.68 






. 4-8i 






. 4.04 






• 5-07 






. 5.20 






• 5-33 






. 5.46 






• 5-59 






• 5-72 






. S.8S 






. 5-Q« 






. 6. II 






. 6.24 





Cost per 
sq. foot. 
.0429 
.0442 

.0455 
.0468 
.0481 

.0494 
.0507 
.0520 

■0533 
.0546 
.0559 
.0572 
.0585 
.0598 
.0611 
.0624 



STANDING SEAM ROOFING — COST WITH 14x20 TIN. 



Cost per 

square of 

Price of stand'g seam 

Tin per roof with 

box. 14x20 Tin. 



$4.25. 
4.50. 

4.75. 
5.00. 
5.25. 
5 50. 

5-75. 
6.00. 
6.25. 
6.50. 

6.75- 
7.00. 



Cost per 
sq. foot. 

.$ 2.37 0237 

. 2.51 0251 

. 2.65 0265 

. 2.79 0279 

. 2.93 0293 

. 3.06, 0306 

. 3.20 0320 

. 3-34 0334 

. 3-48 0348 

. 3.62 0362 

. 3-76 0376 

. 3-9Q Q39Q 



Price of 

Tin per 

box. 

$7.25 
7.50 

7.75 
8.00 
8.25 
8.50 

8.75 
9.00 
9.25 
9.50 

9.75 
10.00 



Cost per 

square of 

stand'g seam 

roof with 

14x20 Tin. 



P4 

4 


17 






4 


31 






4 


45 






4 


59 






4 


73 






4 


87 






5 


01 






5 


15 






5 


29 






5 


43 






5 


57 







Cost per 
sq. foot. 
.0403 
.0417 
.0431 
.0445 
.0459 
•0473 
.0487 
.0501 
.0515 
.0529 
•0543 
•0557 



ii8 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 





SLATE 


TABLE. 






Size of Slate. 


Nails to 


Exposed When 


Number in 






Square. 


Laid. 


Square. 




14x24 


I lb 3d 


loK in. 


98 




13x24 


iK " 


loK " 


106 




12x24 


1% « 


io>^ « 


115 




12x22 


i^ " 


9:^ " 


127 




11x22 


i^ « 


g'A " 


138 




12x20 


i^ • 


m " 


141 




11x20 


i¥ « 


8^ " 


154 




10x20 


1% « 


8J^ " 


170 




10x18 


I « 


7^ " 


192 




9x18 


1% ' 


7y2 " 


214 




10x16 


2H " 


6>^ « 


222 




9x16 


3 " 


6K " 


247 




8x16 


3 « 


6% « 


277 




10x14 


3 " 


5>^ " 


262 




8x14 


3H " 


5^ " 


327 




7x14 


4 " 


5^ " 


374 




8x12 


4K " 


4K " 


400 




7x12 


414: • 


VA " 


457 




6x12 


5>^ " 


4^ " 


533 





WEIGHT OF LEAD PIPE AND TIN-LINED LEAD PIPE. 

STANDARD WEIGHT PER FOOT. 







bi 












, 






Calibre 






be 


6 


2q 


1 


J 






^ 




pq 


W 


c^ 




•J 




W 


fx^ 






X3 N 


^' N 


X3 N 


rO 


N 


rd 


N 


^* N 


jd 


N 




^ 


^ C 


H-1 


J 


OH 





H-l 


H-1 





3^ 


I 8 
3 

3 8 

4 8 


1 5 

2 

2 12 
S 8 


I 2 

1 12 

2 8 

3 


I 
I 

2 
2 




4 I 
I 


13 


12 



10 

13 

1 8 
I 12 





I 
I 


8 


\i 


TT 


S/o 





u 


4 


2 


4 


I 


6 

6 12 

9 

10 12 


4 12 

5 12 
8 


4 
4 12 
6 4 


3 
3 

i 


4 

12 




2 

3 
4 


8 



2 

2 8 

3 8 

4 


I 

2 

3 


8 


1%: 





ii^ 


4 


2 


9 


7 





5 


4 





WIRE GAUGE STANDARDS. 



ft) CD 


American 
or Brown 
Sharpe 


Birming- 
ham, or 
Stubbs's. 


Washburn 
Moen M'f 
Co., Worce 
ter Mass. 


Trenton 

Iron Co., 

Trenton 

N. J. 


G. W. Pre 

tiss, Hol- 

yoke, Mas 


ETp? 

55' (/) r 


3 CO CD 

? ^0 


Q i-+i 


9p 




wioq ^ 




w {3 


rt- C/J ^ 


5- f> -m 


GOGOGO 






.46 
.43 
.393 


•45 
•4 







. . 000000 


GOGGO 






. . 00000 


GGGO 


'a6 


.454 


0000 


GGO 


.40964 


.425 


.362 


.36 


:3586' 




000 


GO 


.3648 


.38 


.331 


.33 


.3282 




00 


O 


.32495 


.34 


.307 


.305 


.2994 







I 


.2893 


.3 


.283 


.285 


.2777 




I 


2 


.25763 


.284 


.263 


.265 


.2591 




2 


3 


. 22942 


.259 


.244 


.245 


.2401 




3 


4 


.20431 


.238 


.225 


.225 


.223 




4 


5 


.18194 


.22 


.207 


.205 


.2047 




§ 


6 


. 16202 


.203 


.192 


.19 


.1885 




6 


7 


.14428 


.18 


.177 


.175 


.1758 




I 


8 


.12849 


.165 


.162 


.16 


.1605 




8 


9 


.11443 


.148 


.148 


.145 


.1471 




9 


10 


.10189 


.134 


.135 


.13 


.1351 




10 


II 


.090742 


.12 


.12 


.1175 


.1205 




II 


12 


.080808 


.109 


.105 


.105 


.1965 




12 


13 


.071961 


.095 




.0925 


.0928 




.. 13 


14 


.064084 


.083 


.08 




.0816 


'083' 


14 


15 


.057p68 


.072 


.072 


.07 


.0726 


.072 


15 


i6 


.05082 


.065 


.063 


.061 


.0627 


.065 


16 


17 


.045257 


.058 


.054 


.0525 


.0546 


.058 


'I 


18 


.040303 


.049 


.047 


.045 


.0478 


.049 


18 


19 


.03589 


.042 


.041 


.04 


.0411 


.04 


19 


20 


.031961 


.035 


.035 


.035 


.0351 


.035 


20 


21 


.028462 


.032 


.032 


.031 


.0321 


.0315 


21 


22 


.025347 


.028 


.028 


.028 


.029 


.0295 


22 


23 


.022571 


.025 


.025 


.025 


.0261 


.027 


23 


24 


.0201 


.022 


.023 


.0225 


.0231 


.025 


24 


25 


.0179 


.02 


.02 


,02 


.0212 


.023 


25 


26 


.01594 


.018 


.018 


.018 


.0194 


.0205 


26 


27 


.014195 


.016 


.017 


.017 


.0182 


.0187 


5 27 


28 


.012641 


.014 


.016 


.016 


.017 


.0165 


28 


29 


.011257 


.013 


.015 


.015 


.0163 


.0155 


29 


30 


.010025 


.012 


.014 


.014 


.0156 


.0137 


5 30 


31 


.008928 


.01 


.0135 


.013 


.0146 


.0122 


5 31 


32 


•00795 


.009 


.013 


.012 


.0136 


.0112 


5 32 


33 


.00708 


.008 


.Oil 


.011 


.013 


.0102 


5 33 


34 


.006304 


.007 


.01 


.01 


.0118 


.0095 


34 


35 


.005614 


.005 


.009 


.0095 


.0109 


.009 


35 


36 


.005 


.004 




.009 


.01 


•0075 


36 


37 


.004453 




.008 


.0085 


•0095 


.0065 


37 


38 


.003965 




.008 


.008 




.0057 


5 38 


39 


.003531 




.007 


.0075 


.0083 


.005 


39 


40 


.003144 




.007 


.007 


.0078 


.0045 


40 



119 



120 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

WEIGHT OP ONE FOOT OF BAR STEEL. 



ROUND. 


SQUARE. 


OCTAGON. 


Diam. In. 


Pounds. 


Side In. 


Pounds. 


Diam. In. 


Pounds. 


H 


.166 


H 


.213 


K 


.84 


rs 


.375 


n 


.479 


/8 


1.23 


H 


.667 


K 


.855 


H 


1.75 


H 


1.04 


% 


1.33 


Vs 


2.25 


u 


1.50 


u 


I.QI 


I 


2.75 


I^ 


2 05 


Vs 


2.61 


1% 


3.66 




2.67 




3.40 


1% 


4.55 


1% 


3.38 


1% 


4.34 


in 


5.50 


1% 


4.17 


1% 


5-32 


iK 


6.45 


\y% 


5.05 


1/8 


6.44 


1% 


7.75 


1% 


6.00 


I>^ 


7.67 


iH 


9.20 


1% 


7.05 


1% 


9.00 


iVs 


10.04 


i¥ 


8.17 


lU 


10.44 


2 


11.60 


i^ 


9.38 


m 


11.98 


2% 


13-14 


2 


10.68 


2 


13-63 


2% 


14.75 


2>l 


12.04 


2% 


15.35 


2H 


16.40 


2^ 


13.51 


2% 


17.20 


2/2 


17.85 


iy% 


15.05 


2^8 


19.17 


2% 


19.50 


^Vt. 


16.68 


2>^ 


21.20 


2U 


21.25 


^H 


18.43 


2% 


23.30 


2^ 


22.69 


2H 


20.19 


2U 


25.70 


3 


25.00 


2% 


22.00 


27/s 


27.74 






3 ^ 


24.03 


3 


30.60 






3>< 


28.20 


3X 


35-90 







USEFUL TABLES FOR TIN-PLATE WORKERS. 

List of abbreviations used: W. No. — Wire number. Pat. No. 
—Pattern number. No. — Number. B. W. G. — Birmingham wire 
gauge. 

Note on table No. i: Length and sizes of B. G. wire. — This 
little table is very useful for finding how much wire you will re- 
quire to make given number of articles, and will be found a very 
useful table for reference. 

Note on table No. 2: Oil Bottles. — These sizes after being 
made with cone-shaped top and neck will hold rather more than 
quantities given, so as t© hold the quantity after rebottoming and 
repairs. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



121 



Water Pots sec. 3. — All these sizes are so arranged as to cut 
best out of the different sizes of tinplates. 

Note on table No. 4, Dripping Tins. — They are turned up at 
an angle of 90 degrees to sizes given in table. 

Saucepans and Paint Kettles, see 5 and 6. — These sizes are ar- 
ranged so they will hold quantity stated after rebottoming. 

Note on tables 7: Baking Tins. — You can see you will get six 
sides of a No. i from a single sheet, six sides of a No. 2 from a 
small double sheet without any waste. Numbers 9 and 10 are 
self-explanatory. 

Funnels No. 8. — These are so arranged as to cut as nicely as 
possible, and can be wired with or without rim as desired. 

Note on table 10: Oval Breakfast Bottles. — This is an article 
made oval with lock seam, top being funnel-shape with round 
neck. The sizes given will be found to cut as nicely as can be 
arranged. The handle is both riveted and soldered on and top and 
bottom clasped on, or bottom can be panned down and turned up 
and top panned on as desired. Some people make them one 
way and others the other. 

Fish Kettles and Round Boilers, See 11 and 12. — The bodies 

of round and oval boilers differ very much in depth. An oval 

boiler is mostly known as a fish kettle and a round boiler as a pea 

boiler. 

1 



Wire 
Gauge, 
o. . .. 

I 

2 

3.... 
4.... 
5.... 



YARDS OF WIRE PER BUNDLE. 

Wires all weigh 63 pounds to the bundle. 

Yds. Per Wire Yds. Per Wire 
Bundle. Gauge. Bundle. Gauge. 

7 239 14.... 

8 286 15.... 

... 342 16 

... 420 17 

... 529 18 

... 700 19 

... 893 20.... 



71 

91 

105 

121 

143 
170 
203 



9. 
10. 
II . 
12. 
13- 



Yds. Per 

Bundle. 
,..1,142 
,..1,468 

...1,954 
...2,540 
...3,150 
...4,085 
...4,912 



OIL BOTTLES. 



Capacity. Size. 

Half pint 7J^ in. 3M in. 

One pint 10 ** 4^ " 

One quart 14 « 5 « 



Capacity. Size. 

Half gallon i8>^ in. 5>^ in. 

One gallon 22 " 7>^ " 

Two gallons 28 « 10 ** 



122 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 







WATER 


. POTS. 




No. Capacity. 




Size. 


No. Capacity. 


Size. 


000 About I pint.. 






3 About I >^ gals. 


.24 in. Q in 


00 About 2 pints. 






4 About 2 gals. 


.28** 10 « 


About 4 pints. 






5 About 3 gals. 


.30" II « 


I About 6 pints. 


.17 


in.6X in. 


6 About 4 gals. 


.34" 11^" 


2 About 8 pints. 


.20 


tt /^ « 


7 About 5 gals. 


.40" 14 - 



DRIPPING TINS, 

W. No. Finished Size. Size. 
13 i^X- in* 14 in. 10 in. 
12 2 ** 15 " 10 ** 

II 2X " 17 " 12^ " 



20 



14 



Remarks. 
Turn up an angle of 90° 



SAUCEPANS. 



W. No. Capacity. Size. 
13 I pint. ..13 in. 3^ in. 
12 2 pints.. 14 "5 " 
II 3pints..i8>^ « S'A " 



W. No. Capacity. Size. 
10 2 quarts. . .20 in. 7 in. 

3 quarts.. .22 " J}i, " 

4 quarts... 25 « 8j^ *" 



PAINT KETTLES. 



W. No. Capacity. 
12 I pt., 3 lbs. , 
II 2 « 4 " .. 
10 3 " 5 " . 



Size. 
.14 in. 5 in 

.173^ " 5" 
.20 « 5 « 



W. No. Capacity. Size. 

9 2 qts., 6 lbs.. .22>^in. 5Xin 

3 " 7 " ..25 ** 6X * 

4 " 8 « . . 



BAKING TINS. 

End. Deep. 



Remarks. 



No.W.No. Side. 

Top. Bottom. Top. Bottom. 

1 13 7 in. 6 in. 5 in. 4 in. y/2, in. 6 sides of a No. I 

from an S sheet. 

2 12 7>^ « 6>^ " S'A n 4K " 3/^ " 6 sides of a No. 2 

from an SD sheet. 

3 10 8>^ « 7^ " 6X " 5X " 4X " 6 sides of a No. 3 

from a D sheet. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



m 



Top. 

2 in. 

3 " 



Bot- 
tom. 
Vs in. 

ys « 



w. 

No. 
15 
15 
14 



Top. 
4 in. 

I " 
6 « 



FUNNELS. 

Bot- 
tom. 
I in. 



w. 

No. 
13 
13 
12 



Bot- W. 

Top. tom. No. 

8 in. i}^ in. 10 

10 " i>^ " 9 



TINPLATES. 



S single 14 in o in. 

SD small double.. 15 "11 « 

D double 17 " I2>^ « 

Twenties 20" 14 " 

D D double doubles25 "17 « 

Twenty-eights 28 " 20 ** 

There are 17 in., 18 in., 19 in. 



and 20 in. sq. sheets. 
Tmned iron sheets, 26 B. W. G. 

72 in., 24 in. 
Tinned iron sheets, 24 B. W. G. 

72 in., 30 in. 
Tinned iron sheets, 22 B. W. G. 

72 in., 22 in. 



10 



OVAL BREAKFAST BOTTLES. 



Capacity. Size. 

I pint 10 in. /[}4 in. 

1}^ pints 12 " 4>^ " 



Capacity. Size. 

2 pints 13 in. 5 in. 

3 pints 13^ * 6 ** 



11 



7 
6 



FISH KETTLES. 



W.No. No. 



Size. 
. 40 in. 7 in. 
.44 « 7/2 " 



W.No. No. 

5 3 

Xin.rod4 



Size. 
.50 in. >^ in. 
.56 *' 10 " 



12 



ROUND BOILERS, 



W.No. 


No. 


Size. 


W.No. No. 


Size. 


8 

7 


..I .. . 
..2 ... 


...28 in. Join. 
...31 « 10 ** 


6 3 .... 

5 4 .... 


.331^ in. 10 in 
.36 « II « 



1^4 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



TIN-PLATE. 

MARKS, WEIGHTS AND NUMBERS. 
TIN PLATES. 



X 

o 



Mark. 



Size. 



IC lo X14 

IX 10 X14 

IXX 10 X14 

IXXX 10 X14 

IXXXX ...10 X14 

IC 14 X20 

IX 14 X20 

IXX 14 X20 

IXXX 14 X20 

IXXXX ... 14 X20 

IC 20 X28 

IX 20 X28 

IXX 20 X28 

IXXX 20 X28 

IXXXX... 20 X28 

DC .. 12^x17 

DX I2>^xi7 

DXX I2>^xi7 

DXXX I2>^xi7 

DXXXX... 12^x17 

DC 17 X25 

DX 17 X25 

DXX 17 X25 

DXXX 17 X25 

DXXXX...17 X25 

IC II XII 

IX II XII 

IXX II XII 

IC 12 XI2 

IX 12 XI2 

IXX 12 XI2 

IC 13 X13 

IX 13 X13 

IXX 13 X13 



(U o 

.s s ^ 

<D ^ • — 

m ^ 

Lb. 
108 

135 
156 

178 
198 

108 

135 
156 
178 
198 

216 
270 
320 
360 
400 

94 
122 

143 
164 
185 
188 

244 
286 
328 
370 

97 
121 

139 
112 
140 
161 

135 
169 
194 



225 

225 
225 
225 
225 

112 
112 
112 
112 
112 

112 
112 
112 
112 
112 

100 
100 
100 
100 
100 

100 
100 
100 
100 
100 

225 
225 
225 

225 

225 
225 

225 

225 
225 



Mark. 



Size. 



IC 14 X14 

IX 14 X14 

IXX 14 X14 

IC 15 X15 

IX 15 X15 

IXX 15 X15 

IC 16 X16 

IX 16 X16 

IXX 16 X16 

IC 17 X17 

IX.... .17 X17 

IXX 17 X17 

IC 18 X18 

IX 18 X18 

IXX 18 X18 

IC 19 X19 

IX 19 X19 

IXX 19 X19 

IC 20 X20 

IX 20 X20 

IXX 20 X20 

IC 21 X2I 

IX 21 X2I 

IXX 21 X2I 

IC 22 X22 . 

IX 22 X22 

IXX 22 X22 

IC 24 X24 

IX 24 X24 

IXX 24 X24 

IXXX 24 X24 

IXXXX.... 24 X24 

IC, , ♦ , 10 X20 



^ 


<D 





^Xi 


.D 


•— ; in 




C5 0^ 


.s 


.S f^ 


t/3 


gs 


(D 




m 


^ 




Lb. 


2-25 


156 


225 


196 


225 


225 


225 


180 


225 


225 


225 


25^ 


225 


204 


225 


256 


225 


294 


112 


IIS 


112 


144 


112 


166 


112 


130 


112 


162 


112 


186 


112 


144 


112 


180 


112 


207 


112 


160 


112 


200 


112 


230 


112 


176 


112 


220 


112 


253 


112 


194 


112 


242 


112 


278 


112 


231 


112 


288 


112 


331 


112 


374 


112 


417 


22 c; 


160 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



125 



Tin Plate— Continued. 

MARKS, WEIGHTS AND NUMBERS. 
TIN PLATE. 



Mark. 



Size. 



o 

J2 



CO 



. 10 
.10 

. II 
.II 
.II 



IX.... 
IXX.. 

IC... 
IX.... 
IXX.. 

IC 12 

IX 12 

IXX 12 

IC 13 

IX 13 

IXX 13 

IC 14 

IX 14 

IXX 14 

IC 14 



X20 
X20 

X22 
X22 
X22 

X24 
X24 
X24 

X26 

X26 
X26 

X28 
X28 
X28 



225 

225 

225 

225 
225 

112 
112 
112 

112 
112 
112 

112 
112 
112 



X3I *II2 



*- X 

<u o 

G^ 
^ *-• 

S£ 

Lb. 

200 
230 

194 
242 
278 

112 
140 
161 

135 
169 
194 

156 

196 
225 

174 



Mark. 



Size. 



IX, 14 X31 

IXX 14 X31 

IC 14 X22 

IX 14 X22 

IC 14 X22 

IX 14 X22 

IXX 20 X72 

IXXXX....20 X72 

IXX 30 X72 

IXXX 30 X72 

IXXXX....30 X72 

IXXX 36 X72 

IXXXX....36 X72 

IXXXX ... 38 X84 

IXXXX....40 X84 





^ M 





(D 


^ 


1—1 :-i 




d (U 


.s 


c a. 


ui 


6£ 






C/} 


^ 




Lb. 


112 


217 


112 


250 


112 


123 


112 


154 


112 


126 


112 


157 


46 


7^ 


37 


g'A 


30 


iiU 


27 


12H 


25 


14 


3S 


i^H 


20 


U'/z 


16 


i9}4 


14 


25 



IC. 
IX. 



TERNE PLATES. 



.14 X20 112 
.14 X20 112 



108 
135 



IC. 



.20 X28 112 216 



TAGGERS TIN AND TAGGERS IRON. 



Size. 

10x14 
10x14 
10x14 
14x20 
14x20 
14x20 



Wire 

Gauge. Sheets. 
No. 38 450 1 12 lb. 



No. 36 
No. 34 
No. 38 
No. 36 
No. 34 



360 112 " 

300 112 

225 112 

180 112 

150 112 



Size. 

20x28 

20x36 

20x28 

20x36 

20x40 



Wire 
Gauge. Sheets. 



No. 30 
No. 30 
No. 32 
No. 32 
No. 37 



112 224 " 

87 224 " 

112 180 " 

87 180 " 

78 180 ** 



126 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 





CI 


h/) 






fi 




0) 


> 




3 


2 


• 


^ 


jH 


u 


c^ 




Q. 


o 


fi 






n1 


Q. 


in 


(U 


Z 


s 


V4 


o 


2 


o 


QC 


QJ 


T3 


hJ 




o 


Id 


§ 


15 



X 



Q <D 



U 



^ .t: 



y^ 



2 SJO 

J > ho 



a 
bo 



s ^ 

O ^ g 

o ^i 
211 

Sll 

0- ^ w 
Id Q,-^ 

5.S ^ 

li. *^ d 

o 8z 
u ^ S . 

_I a; o he 

< :S -g a; 

1- hX) S > 



a; 



^ S.H 



-p o 



he 

O 



t-H 


O 00 '-' covo m is.vo N m two CO *-« mvo u-^ tv. O 00 
(^ OOO vo ^n OOO t^Loro^ OOO VO ^ M O OvO 
(s^HH-H^^.-.-.OOOOOP^C>OG-0 O^OO OO 
mvO t^OO O O "^ C^ rn '^ uovo O t^OO O^ O •- 04 ro 


CO 

1— ( 


vo GMn ^ t^ O vO OOO ^O^oOLo-HK^ov0^4>J-^ 
t^in-^rOi-i OOO^LOri-rOi-H (>oO X>^ lo -^ c^ i-* C> 

•- otv.i-om'-ioovc ""^tc^ oooLoro'-H or^Locoo 

•^ -rl- mVO r^OO 00 ONO'-'MMfO'=d-Lr» lo^O t^OO O 




t^OO >-^ LOOO O M CO O CO^ t^i-H '^OO -H M loOnQ 
cncO'd--^'*'!l-i-rMJ~» ir^vO vO *0 t^ t^ tv.00 OO 00 OO O 
t^ "^ '-' 00 iJ^ (S OvO mo t^'^'-'OO 1-ncS OvO CO o 
en -"^t m ur»vO t^ r^OO OOO^C^C^ro^^ LnO r^ 


00 

1-H 


O C^ 'd-t^O'-H roi-or^O M 'd-vOOO '-' rOmt^OHH 
cohh Loi-H r^^O'O M CM-Oi-H t^rOOvO C^OO ^d---^ 
CO ^ ^ LO irwo t^ r^OO 00 000^(N(SJcOrO-^m 


C5 

T— I 


'-' OOO OOO O"-' OO OOO OOO OOO ocor^ 

t^ O -^ O coo O "^OO CO »^ O ^00 CO t^ O ^ O C4 
00 ^O^Olo-hVO ^ t-^NOO COOO 'd- O lO O lo ^ 
n CO CO ^ LO lovo vO r^ t^ JO 000000^(N(^cO 


S 


vO C4 '-' OOO LOCOO O Or^^C^ i-H OX) LO CO OJ 00 
COO>-OOVO C^OO "^O i-OHH IN.COO'^OMD MOO CO 
•^00 COOO C^r^^-ivO "-ii-oO "d-O COOO co t^ M vO •-« 
M c^ CO CO '^ ^ uo LovO vo !>. r^ 1:^00 OO O O O O -" 


W 


CO O C^ LOOO O O '* O (N 1-OVO O M 00 OO O COO 1>- 
OO r^ two lOiocOcOM N '-' OOO OOO t^ t^'O LO ^ 
O ^00 C4 vO O ^OO M^ O^t^H-.LoOcot^'-'Ln 
C^ n cs coco^^^Lo mvo vo vo t^ t^ t^oo oo O O 


?3 


t^ocot^'- cor^o loocoLoocot^'-' ^tv.>-i ';*• 

(v^ VO '-' m O ^OO CO t^ •-« O O "^ O COOO covO <-< ^^ 
00 '-' vnoo M LOOO r^ioONvO OMO o coo O CO 
•-• M C^ M COCOCO^^^uOLO mO O VO t^ t^OO 00 


§3 


CO ^ 'd- LovO vOt^t^OO^^-iM"^ LovO MD t^OO 00 
lOVO t^OO O O '-' C^ CO uoO t^OO O O '-' C^ ro '::!■ LO 
VO O ^^ LOCO M looo ►- '^^ t^ o coo o coo O M m 
•-H i-H M c^ c^ cococo^'^^mi-o LOO vo O vo t^ t^ 


^ 


OO) -^co^oor^^cocs o t^o -^ CO ^ 00 t^vo rj 

t^ lO CO •-• O^"^ ^M OOOO cO'-< Ot^vi-iM OOOO 
'^t t^ O CO lOOO •-' 'd- t\ O M i-OOO O COO O (N '^ t^ 
H-i •-• (sj c<J M M COCOCOCO^-^^LOLOIO voO O O 




C^ CO iJ^ t^ O O 04 COO 00 O <-i C0i0tv.00 C4 '^i-O 
Olo^ t^cOOO noo ^^ t^cOOiJ^^OO ^OO 
COO O'-' '^t^OC4 '^t-^O 04 int^O CO i-noo -« co 
HH 1-1 HI rj c<i 04 04 cococo'^^^^iomi-o loo O 


CD 


'^Oloi-hvO '-'O) "-^CO cOO^OloOO "-hO 04 t^ 
O ^ O ^00 cOt^04O ^ LoO '^O ^00 CO t^ 04 O 
cOLnt^O 0^ Lot^O oj Lot^O M -^t^OM ■^t^O 
!-• HH HH (S) C^ (Sj (S) cOCOCOCO^'^'*'=:t-'!:fLOLOLOLO 




OOOLO'd-^04 M O O OOO t^O VO ^ -^ 01 ^ ^ O 
•-* "^t t^ O COO O 04 LO r\ O coo 00 04 LOOO. '-' ^vo 
04 "^O) O '-' CO LOOO O 04 LO t-^ O^ I-. -rtO OO -1 CO LO 
HH HH HH 1-4 c^ C4 04 04 COCOCOCOCO^^^^LOLOio 


g§ 


»-H Tt LOOO "-H COO 00 i-i LO LO O CO LOOO t-H COO O -' 
CO '^ LoO) 00 O O '-' CO ^OO t^OO OO OJ COrl-LOt^ 
i-H cOLOt^O^ ^OOO O 04 "^OOO ^ cOLOt^O-* 
HH I-H M N-i HH c^ M M M cOcOcOcOcO^^^'^r^LO 


§ 


i-t-v^i-H 0^ COOO coOt-«-cO OO CO O LO 04 O LO 

O t^O) LO T^i- 04 HH OOO t^ LO 'Tf 04 "-i O 00 t^O) ^ CO 

O'-' COLOt^O--^ 04 rt-O) 00 O 04 '^O) t^ O '-' COLO 

„„HHi-HHHC^c404MMCOCOCOCOCOCO^^-* 




LOO) t^OO O O '- 0? CO ^ LOVO tv.00 O O « « CO ^ 

HHHHI-IHHHHI-4.-^^^-4HH(^C4nMCS 


•9di^j JO jgpuiBiQ 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



127 



G be 
•^ G 
tn '^ 

o a 

-^ oJ 

5 ^H 

a. o 
G '^ 

O (O 

<D ^ 
(U .G 

go 

6 . 

s| 

MH be 

O o -g 
O ^ ^ 

OL t: .a 
»- _- -^ 

Ui 0^ d 

5 ^ ^ 
'^ o 

O ^ «^ 

tn g^ 

< o- 6 . 
I- .S 2 g= 

'^^ .G 

'^ ^ ^ 

bx) g > 
^ i> .S 

S ^ 

V 





VO Q ^00 C^ vo 00 00 ^00 00 \0 rfoo n vo Tl- 'd- 
•-H vo ^ cnoo ^ >o "^00 00 r^vo u^ 0^00 00 
i-< c^ Trt Lovo 00 1-" c^ i-r»vo r^oo c^ "^ Lo^o 00 

VO r^OO 0^ '-' M '^t LOVO t^OO 0^ '-' M CO rt LOVO t^ 


CO 


KH oj Ln r:l- uovo t^ t^ t^OO C^ - ^ M CO t:1- <OvO 
LouoLouni-ou-MJ-^ aM-nrororoO -^00 00 00 00 N 00 
rororororOrOcororO-*^Tt'=:t-^^-d-r±^u-^'«^ 
LOvO t^OO O ►-• M m '^ LovO t^OO '-' (^ CO "^ 


r-i 


VO i>.oo o^o^(sjr^^rqco^csvo^(scn ^00 vo 
Ln (S O^vo '^^OOOO (SvO coo ^Ttu-^c^ QnvO vO O 
vo 1LO CO M *-H 00 r^VO LO -^ CO •-< Q^OO VO "^ ""^ CO 
'Tt- unvo r^oo O^ O^ ►-• M CO '^ "^VO VO t^oo 0"- 


10 

1—1 


00 00 t^vo Lo ^ 'rt c^ n O^OO OOVOlo^cOM >^ -i 
LO-^ ^N.cOO^«-Oi-t cOi-oQvO 0^00 r^ CO 0> u^ Tt t^ 
OoO»J-^cOOOOvOrl-'-< 0^1>.^^ 0>t^LOM OoOlo 

CO ^ Lnvo t^ i>.oo o>00'-'Ncoco'^ ij^vo r^ r^oo 




Li->^VO N t^coO^^ 000 ^, 00-H roOO ^ (^ ^ 
VOiJ^con O^r^O^ LOCO t^ir\H-. CO^M *-* Q .-.t^ 

VO coo r^coo r^^-'oo iocs o^vo co t^ ^ -^ i>x 
CO ^ uo LOVO t^ l>sCO O^O^O '-' *-• C^ co^tt--^ uovo VO 


1— 1 


vO t^oo 0^0 ^ Nr^^c^ co^r^vo ^ r^ co -d-00 vo 

VO t^OO 0^ -• C^ COVO LO^ C^ COMLOO^O ^ n ^^ 

(Nco '=^0 r^coo^Lo^oo rj-ovo r^oo uo»-h t^^^;;^ 

CO CO "^ iJ^ u^vo VO 1>nOO 00 0«00*-'*-hMcOCOtj-'^ 


00 


VO CO ►-< 00 VO CO '-H XN.VO ►-hOOVOloi-h t^i_0(N QvOi-O 

O>00 VO»-OLOCOCOO cn^ t^OO 00 l>>vO 10 Lo n 
VO OiJ^Qi-oOi-oOLnOLOO^O'd-O^'^O'ri-O^ 
CS CO CO n- 'vJ- iJ-^ lOVO VO t^ t^OO OOOOO^OOO^^ 


r~i 


VO VO t^OO 00 O^OlN.^vOvOt^'-' 1-OvO t^OO 00 VO 

LO Qs CO I>. i-H 10 LOOO LO 0^ COVO t^ i-i 10 O- lOQO 

ror^rivO ^ 1-0 rj-oo co t^ M vO ^ lO Q ^oo corC 
c^ c^ coco^^Louo uovo VO t^ t^oo 00 0^ O^ 0> 


§ 


oovo ^N O^t-^OCO 0^00 vOOC^'^rO-'a^.^Lo 

VO coo r^^o r^io^ t^^ooovo coovo i^-^o 

CO IN. 'Thoo >-H i^ Qs rovO 'd-t^'-H i-oO^r^vO O 
>-" c^ M cococo'^'^t-^i-o i-ovo VO VO r^ r^ r^oo 00 0^ 


T— 1 

CM 


« M M CO CO '=:tOO i-O C^ CO CO •-• ^00 0> 0^ ^ *-• 
M VO -*00 (NVO ^ "^-HLoOvC^r^r^vo 0>-oOco 
00 >-* LOGO '-' i-ooo (S LO 0^ c^ i-o 0^ (sj "O 0^ COVO CO 
>- r^ cs M cococo^^^LOuo i-ovO vo vo l>* t^OO 00 


^ 


OvO '-' t^MOO ^i-" LorOO^'^ O^VO COOO ^ O t^ "-h 
00 r^ l>»vo VO Lo Lovo '^VO L^^u^cO"^l-o^::^^^^co 
LOOO -< '=d- !>. COVO C^ iJ-^OO ^ "^ t^ COVO n 
>-i •-" M M CS cOcOcOcOr^'^^^x^lJ-^ uovO vO vO VO t^ 


g5 


u^ O^ ^ O' COOO cot^c^ t^r^vo HH\0 "-1 loQloO^^ 
•- r>^o r^coo i>.co^oo ^0 r^io-noo '?j-^ r^ 
^vo 0^ (^J "* r^ N uooo COVO 00 >-< ^vo 0^ N ^ 

►_ HH t-i c^ C^ rj COCOCOCO'^^^^IOUOLO u-wo VO 


^ 


j^^ ^ H-. o^vo cOQvO Tto t^^csoo ^^oovo r> 
VO '^ t^ '-H Lo 0^ COVO c^ uo 0^ cs VO "-« i-ooo c^ t^ 
r< LO t^ 0^ M rj-VO 0^ ^ ^VO 00 >-< COVO 00 CO ij-^oo 
i_i HH H-i i-H c^ c^ c^ (S) COCOCOCO'^'^"^'^»-OLOLOLO 




r^oo oo^o ►-I f^ ^ "Tt -1 (Si ni-OTd-coir^ 1-nvo »j~> r^ 

C^ CO -^ 10 I>>00 O^ *-i '^ unVO VOOOO'-'C^?^'-^"^ 

t-H coLor^O'-H COVO CO r^ -^vooo '-' cOLot^G^'-' 
i-i ^ HH h-H ^ c^ csj M (N) rococococo'^'^^^'^i^ 


CO 


QvLOMOO ^0 t^HH Qs^ t^cOC^vO OVO C^ O^COO 
rd-^^CO^COMCO^COMC^^-^M-H^-HQ^^ 

c^ ^vooo r> ^vooo (^ ^vooo c^ ^vooo 

H-it-HH-ii-iHHMc^c^CSIC^COCOCOCOCO'^-^-^^'d- 




•-« ^N.coa^lJ^'-^ r^Qv qvoo -^^j- c^ »-o •-' t^ covo ^o 

^ .-H o^^o ^ N 0^ t^ ^ CO HH o^vo '^ M t^ 1-n CO 

QNHH M ^VOOO 0^^ COLor^OO 01 ^VO r^ O^ « CO 

HHHHi-HHHi-<i-,c^c^Cs^(S)(N^COCOCOCOCOCO'^'^ 


00 

(M 


i>^_vO'-'LoOiJ-^ur>r^HHLoO O^OOt^O'^LO"^ 

MOO coo^'^o lo^vo COOO ^ OMo M ^ c^ r^ COOO 

OO Ov- M ^vo t^ONO M cOuovOOO O ^ CO -^VO t^ 
^HHHH^^-it-iC^c^C^NMMCOCOCOCOCOCO 


Gauge 
Number. 


iJ^VO r^OO OVO •-* N CO'<:l-ii^VO t>>.00 OO "-I C^ CO"* 


•agpuiBiQ ui S9qDui 



128 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



WEIGHT OF METALS. 

Weight in lbs. of a square foot of different metals, in thick- 
nesses varying by 1-16 of an inch. 



Thickness 

in 

inches. 




^ 2 




Oh 
Oh 

U 


N 




OS 






1-16 


2.3 


2.3 


2.5 


2.9 


2.3 


2.6 


2.7 


2.4 


3.7 


% 


5.0 


4.7 


5.1 


5.8 


4.7 


5-3 


5-5 


4.8 


7.4 


3-16 


7.5 


7.0 


7.6 


8.7 


7.0 


8.2 


8.2 


7.2 


II.2 


X 


1 0.0 


94 


10.2 


1 1.6 


9.4 


II.O 


10.9 


9.6 


14.9 


5-16 


•12.5 


11.7 


12.8 


14.5 


II.7 


13.7 


13.7 


12.0 


18.6 


/8 


15.0 


14.1 


15-3 


17.2 


14.0 


16.4 


16.4 


14.4 


22.3 


7-16 


17.5 


16.4 


17.9 


20.0 


16.4 


19.2 


19.1 


16.8 


26.0 


K 


20.0 


18.7 


20.4 


22.9 


18.7 


21.9 


21.9 


19.3 


29.7 


9-16 


22.5 


21. 1 


25.0 


25.7 


21. 1 


24.6 


24.6 


21.7 


33.4 


K 


25.0 


23-5 


25-5 


28.6 


23.4 


27.4 


27.3 


24.1 


37.1 


II-16 


27.5 


25.8 


28.1 


31.4 


25.7 


30. T 


30.0 


26.5 


40.9 


u 


30.0 


28.1 


30.6 


34.3 


28.1 


32.9 


32.8 


28.9 


44.6 


13-16 


32.5 


30.5 


33.2 


37.2 


30.4 


35.6 


350 


31.3 


48.3 


% 


35.0 


32.8 


35.7 


40.0 


32.8 


38.3 


38.2 


33.7 


52.0 


15-16 


37.5 


35.2 




42.9 


35.1 


41.2 


41.0 


36.1 


55.7 


I 


40.0 


37.5 


40.8 


45-8 


37.5 


43.9 


43.7 


38.5 


59.4 



Note. — The weight per square foot to any gauge can easily be 
obtained from the above table by multiplying the weight of a 
square foot of the metal one inch thick by the thickness of the 
gauge in inches or parts of an inch. 



CHAPTER VI. 
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION. 

LEGAL HOLIDAYS IN THE VARIOUS STATES. 

January i. New Year's Day. — In Alabama, Arkan- 
sas, California, Colorada, Connecticut, Dakota, Georgia, 
Idaho, Illinois, Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Louisiana, Maine, 
Maryland, Michigan, Nevada, New Jersey, New York, 
North Carolina, Ohio, Oregon, Pennsylvania, South 
Carolina, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Wisconsin, 
and Wyoming. 

January 8. Anniversary of the Battle of New Or- 
leans. — In Louisiana. 

February 22. Washington's Birthday. — In Alabama, 
California, Colorado. Connecticut, Dakota, Georgia, 
Idaho, Illinois, Kentucky^ Louisiana, Maine, Maryland, 
Massachusetts, Michigan, Minnesota, Missouri, Nevada, 
New Hampshire, New Jersey, New York, North Car- 
olia, Ohio, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, 
Texas, Utah, Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming. 

February 14. Mardi Gras. — In Louisiana. 

March 2. Anniversary of Texan Independence. — 
In Texas. 

March 4. Firemen's Anniversary. — In New Or- 
leans, La. 

April 19. Good Friday. — In Louisiana, Maryland, 
and Pennsylvania. 

April 21. Anniversary of the Battle of Jacinto. — 
In Texas. 



130 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

April 29. Memorial Day. — In Georgia. 

May 30. Decoration Day. — In Arizona, California, 
Colorado, Connecticut, Dakota, Iowa, Illinois, Kansas, 
Kentucky, Massachusetts, Michigan, Nevada, New 
Hampshire, New Jersey, New York, Ohio, Oregon, 
Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, Utah, Vermont, Wisconsin 
Washington, and Wyoming. 

June I. Labor Day. — In Oregon. 

July 4. Independence Day. — In all the States. 

September (First Monday.) Labor Day. — In 
Alabama, California, Colorado, Connecticut, Delaware, 
Florida, Georgia, Illinois, Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Maine, 
Maryland, Massachusetts, Michigan, Montana, Ne- 
braska, New Hampshire, New Jersey, New York, Ohio, 
Oregon, Pennsylvania, South Carolina, South Dako- 
ta, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Virginia, and Wash- 
ington. 

November 5. General Election Day. — In California, 
Dakota, Kansas, Maryland, Missouri, New Hampshire, 
New Jersey, New York, Ohio, Oregon, South Carolina, 
and Wisconsin. 

November (last Thursday), Thanksgiving Day. — Is 
observed in all the States, though in Nebraska and 
some others it is not a statutory holiday. 

December 25. Christmas Day. — In all the States, 
and in South Carolina the two succeeding days in ad- 
dition. 

Sundays and Fast Days (whenever appointed) are 
legal holidays in nearly all the States. 

Arbor Day is a legal holiday in Idaho and Kansas, 
the day being set by the Governor. Arbor Day is also 
a legal holiday in Rhode Island, but does not affect 
the payment of notes, etc. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. I3I 

In Nebraska there are no legal holidays established 
by statute. The same is the case in New Mexico. 

Every Saturday after 12 o'clock noon is a legal hol- 
iday in New York. 



ANTIDOTES TO POISONS. 

In nearly all cases of poisoning the first thing to do 
is to excite copious vomiting by means of a powerful 
emetic, the action being promoted by large draughts of 
lukewarm water, tickling the throat with the finger, etc. 
If the vomiting can not be brought on by this means 
the stomach-pump must be resorted to, but not till the 
simple methods have been tried. The vomiting should 
be kept up by giving albuminous liquids such as milk 
and water, barley water, or similar substances, always 
administered when lukewarm. After the vomiting has 
removed the poisonous substance, a mild aperient 
draught may be given, and nervous exhaustion allayed 
by very small doses of ether or ammonia, or draughts 
of wine or hot spirits and water. Generally speaking, 
a tablespoonful of the flour of mustard mixed with warm 
water will serve as an effective emetic. Whenever med- 
ical aid is accessible it should be called immediately to 
a case of poisoning. For special antidotes, we take the 
following directions from a chemical journal, giving the 
substances most useful in counteracting the effects of 
poisonous chemicals: *'For phenic, sulphuric, muriatic, 
nitric or nitro-muriatic acids, creosote, tincture of iodine, 
or phosphorus, use the white of an egg well beaten up 
in water, and a teaspoonful of mustard in warm water. 
In case sulphuric, nitric, or muriatic acid has been swal- 
lowed, it is necessary to take lime mixed with as small 
a quantity of water as possible. For chronic acid, the 



132 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

chromates and colors that have chromium for a base, 
the compounds of copper, and such preparations as 
have antimony for a base (such as tartar emetic), and 
the compounds of murcury and zinc, use the white of 
eggs in abundance, and as an emetic mustard, which, 
however, is useless if the poisoning has been done by 
tartar emetic. For ammonia, soda, potassa, the sili- 
cates and the alkaline hydrosulphates, use vinegar, and 
afterward oil or milk. For prussic acid and its salts, 
the cyanides of potassium and mercury, the sulpho-cyan- 
ides, oil of bitter almonds, or nitrobenzine, pour water 
on the patient's head or spinal column, and put mustard 
plasters on the feet and the stomach. Do not let the 
patient go to sleep. For ether, petroleum, benzole, 
fruit essences, and concentrated alcohol, take strong 
ntustard as an emetic, with much warm water, cold 
baths, and fresh air. Keep the patient awake. For the 
compounds of baryta or lead, use mustard as an emetic, 
with warm water, Epsom salts or Glauber's salts in 
water. For arsenic and its compounds, use mustard 
and dialyzed iron with magnesia, and afterward oil, 
milk, or mucilaginous liquids. For oxalic acid and its 
salts, use lime or lime water, and afterward castor oil. 
For nitrate of silver, use kitchen salt dissolved in water, 
and mustard as an emetic. For the nitrous fumes from 
the manufacture of the nitrate of iron, or of sulphuric 
acid, take acetic acid as strong as can be endured, in 
small quantities at a time. 

USEFUL SUGGESTIONS IN CASES OF ACCIDENT 
TO MECHANICS. 

Bleeding. — If blood spurts from wound, an artery is 
divided; bind limb tightly above wound with India- 
rubber tubing, strap, handkerchief, or scarf, or bend the 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 1 33 

limb forcibly at next joint above wound; or press flat 
hand or stone where blood is flowing. If blood flows 
freely, but does not spurt, a vein is divided; then apply 
same measures as in case of wounded artery, but below 
the wound. If scalp wounded, make a pad of cloth or 
waste, and bandage very tightly over wound with folded 
pocket handkerchief. 

Burns and Scalds. — Apply lint, cotton wool, or waste, 
soaked in oil, or oil and lime water, and bind the same 
on with handkerchief. If necessary to remove clothes, 
cut them off by running knife or scissors along seams. 
Broken Leg. — Pull on leg steadily and firmly until it 
is of same length as sound one. Roll up a coat or 
empty sack into form of a cushion; ca'refully place leg 
upon it; then bind the two together with scarfs or 
handkerchiefs. Do not lift patient from the ground 
until stretcher is close at hand. Take great pains, by 
careful lifting, to prevent broken bone coming through 
skin. 

Broken Thigh. — Take hold of ankle, and, by steady 
traction, pull limb to same length as sound one; another 
person must then tie knees together, and afterv/ard the 
ankles. Both limbs should then be laid over a sack of 
straw, or folded coat, so as to bend the knees. Patient 
should on no account be moved until stretcher is close 
at hand. 

Broken Arm. — Pull arm to length of sound one. 
Apply two splints, one outside, and other inside, bind- 
ing them firmly on with pocket handkerchiefs. The 
best splints are made by folding newspapers to neces- 
sary length, binding them above and below seat of frac- 
ture; anything hard and light, of suitable size, would 
act equally well, for instance, wood, pasteboard, twigs, 
leather, etc. 



134 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

Broken Ribs. — Cause intense pain when patient 
breathes; bind roller towel firmly round chest, fasten- 
ing with pins, or sewing. 

Broken Collar-bone. — Bend arm over front of chest; 
place it in a sling; bind it in that position by scarf 
going round chest, outside sling. 

Dog Bites. — Tie a handkerchief or cord tightly 
round limb above wound; suck the wound. 

Flesh Wounds. — Uncover wound; wash it with 
clean water; wring out a clean handkerchief, or some 
lint, in cold water, and lay it over the wound. Then, 
bind in position with handkerchief. 

Fainting. — From heat, exhaustion, or loss of blood. 
Keep head low; undo clothing about neck; plenty of 
fresh air; dash cold water on face and chest; smelling 
salts, carefully used; a little brandy, when sensibility 
has returned, excepting in cases of sunstroke, and where 
means have not been taken to prevent further bleeding. 

Insensibility. — From blows or wounds on head. 
Send at once for doctor or take patient to hospital, 
keeping him on his back, with head raised; undo cloth- 
ing round neck; do not give brandy. 

Insensibility. — From being buried in falls of earth, 
or breathing foul gas; proceed as in drowning. 

Fits. — i. If snoring and face flushed, undo clothing 
round neck, keep head raised, and dash cold water on 
top of head; hot water bottles to feet. Do not give 
brandy. 

2. If foaming at mouth and convulsed, undo cloth- 
ing, apply smelling salts, and prevent patient hurting 
himself until conscious again. 

Drowning. — Send for doctor, blankets, and dry 
clothing. Take off wet clothes from upper part of 
body. Lay patient on his back, with his head on a 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 135 

folded coat for cushion. Draw tongue out of mouth 
and hold it there. A second person kneels at patient's 
head and takes hold of both his arms just below the 
elbows. He then draws them upward over the patient's 
head, and holds them in that position until he counts 
two; this draws air into the lungs. He then lowers 
arms to sides again and presses them firmly inwards, 
holding them there until he has again counted two; 
this forces air out of the lungs. Go on doing this until 
doctor arrives, or until patient breathes naturally. As 
soon as he does so, rub the limbs in an upward direc- 
tion with the dry hands, or better still with hot flannels. 
Put patient to bed between blankets, surrounded with 
hot water bottles. May give him wine or brandy when 
quite sensible. 

Rupture, or ''break of the body." — Try and push it 
back with flat hand: keep man on his back. Cold wet 
clothes laid over rupture will, perhaps, aid its return. 

USEFUL SHOP HINTS. 

In brazing file the edges clean and bright, cover with 
spelter and powdered borax, and expose in a clear fire 
to a heat sufficient to melt the solder. 

To bronze copper, clean the surface, then brush it 
over with a solution of sulphate of iron, acetate of cop- 
per, or peroxide of iron; heat it cautiously and gradu- 
ally, rub off the powder and examine. If not a good 
bronze color repeat the process. 

For bronze paint for iron take ivory black one ounce, 
crome yellow one ounce, crome green two pounds. Mix 
with raw linseed oil- and add a little Japan to dry it. 

For brassing small articles take one quart of water 
and add half an ounce each of sulphate copper and pro- 



136 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

tochloride of tin. Stir the articles in the solution until 
the desired color is obtained. Use the sulphate of cop- 
per alone for copper color. 

To frost brass work, boil in caustic potash, rinse in 
clean water, and dip in nitric acid till all oxide is re- 
moved; then wash quickly, dry in boxwood sawdust, 
and lacquer while warm. This will give brass an orna- 
mental finish. 

For washing brass with tin boil together six pounds 
of cream tartar, four gallons of water and eight pounds 
of grain tin or tin shavings, for half an hour in porce- 
lain-lined vessel; put the clean brassware in the boiling 
liquid for a few minutes or until properly coated. 

Tin and tin alloys, after careful cleansing from ox- 
ide and grease, are handsomely and permanently bronzed 
if brushed over with a solution of one part of sulphate 
copper (bluestone), and one part of sulphate of iron 
(copperas) in twenty parts of water. When this has 
dried, the surface should be brushed with a solution of 
one part of acetate of copper (verdigris) in acetic acid. 
After several applications and dryings of the last named, 
the surface is polished with a soft brush and bloodstone 
powder. The raised portions are then rubbed off with 
soft leather moistened with wax and turpentine,followed 
by a rubbing with dry leather. 

The best paint for galvanized iron where dark color 
is not objectionable is common asphalt dissolved in 
turpentine or benzine. It is extremely tenacious, dries 
soon and becomes very hard and insoluble by action of 
sunlight. It is flexible and very durable. 

Good varnish, one-half gallon; boiled linseed oil, 
one-half gallon; add red lead sufficient to bring to the 
consistency of common paint. Apply with brush. Ap- 
plicable to any kind of iron work exposed to the 
weather. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 1 37 

For varnish for bright iron work, dissolve three 
pound jf rosin in ten pints boiled linseed oil, and add 
two pounds of turpentine. 

A coat of varnish made in the proportion of two 
ounces of shellac to nine ounces of alcohol, will prevent 
brass from tarnishing. 

TO ATTACH LABELS TO TIN. 

1. If the paper is well sized and will resume its ori- 
ginal color when the paste is dry use a solution of bal- 
sam of fir, I part, in oil of turpentine, 2 or 3 parts. 

2. Soften I part of good glue in water, then pour off 
the excess, and boil it with 8 parts of strong vinegar 
(about 8 per cent). Thicken the liquid, while boiling, 
with enough of fine wheat flour or dextrin. 

3. Make starch paste and add to it while warm a lit- 
tle Venice turpentine, so that the latter will become 
evenly distributed through it. 

4. Add to starch paste, or any other similar aqueous 
paste (except that made from gum Arabic) some solu- 
tion of shellac in borax. The quantity may be easily 
determined by trial. 

5. Paint the spot where the label is to be put with a 
solution of tannin and let it dry. Affix the label pre- 
viously gummed and wetted. 

6. Paint the spot over lightly with a camel's hair 
brush dipped into chloride of antimony. 

7. Make a dilute solution of white gelatine, or, bet- 
ter, of isinglass, about i in 20. This is said to adhere 
without the addition of anything else. 

8. To mucilage of acacia, starch, dextrin, or traga- 
canth paste add a little ammonia. 

9. Or add a little tartaric acid. A trifle of glycerine 
may be added besides. 



138 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

10. Mucilage of gum Arabic maybe made much more 
adhesive by heating 100 parts of it with 2 parts of sul- 
phate of aluminum, previously dissolved in hot water, to 
boiling, and then allowing to settle. A little tartaric acid 
and some glycerine added to the clear liquid after it is 
decanted will improve it. 

II. Make a mixture of mucilage of tragacanth, 10 
parts, and flour, i part. 

SIMPLE TESTS FOR IMPURE WATER. 

The presence of organic impurity in water can be 
detected by dissolving some loaf sugar in it, and then, 
after putting in a tight stopper, allowing it to stand in a 
warm, well-lighted room for a few days. If it becomes 
turbid, there are certainly organic impurities in it; if it 
remains clear it is pure and safe to drink. To test the 
presence of earthy matters, take litmus paper dipped 
in vinegar, and if, on immersion, the paper returns to its 
true shade, the water does not contain earthy matter or 
alkali. If a few drops of sirup be added to water con- 
taining an earthy matter, it will turn green. To ascer- 
tain if the water contains iron, boil a little nut gall and 
add to the water. If it turns gray or slate black iron is 
present. Or dissolve a little prussiate of potash, and 
if iron is present it will turn blue. The presence of 
carbonic acid may be ascertained, even in very small 
quantities, thus: Take equal parts of water and clear 
lime water. If combined or free carbonic acid is pres- 
ent, a precipitate is formed, to which, if a few drops of 
muriatic acid be added, an effervescence commences. 
To detect magnesia, boil the water to a twentieth part 
of its weight, and then drop a few grains of neutral car- 
bonate of ammonia into a glass of it, and a few drops 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 13^ 

of phosphate of soda. If magnesia be present it will 
fall to the bottom. We can ascertain the presence of 
even a very small quantity of lime if into a glass of 
water we put two drops of oxalic acid and blow upon 
it. If it gets milky lime is present. The presence of 
any acid can be shown by dipping into the water a 
piece of litmus paper. If it turns red there must be 
acid. If it precipitates on adding lime water it is car- 
bonic acid. The unfailing test for hard or soft water is 
to take a little good soap and dissolve it in alcohol. A 
few drops of this in a vessel of water will turn it quite 
milky if it is hard; if it is soft it will remain clear. 

ALLOYS. 

A combination of copper and tin makes bath metal; 
of copper and zinc makes bell metal; of tin and copper 
makes bronze metal; of tin, antimony, copper and bis- 
muth makes britannia metal; of tin and copper makes 
cannon metal; of copper and zinc makes Dutch gold; 
of copper, nickel and zinc with sometimes a little iron 
and tin, makes German silver; of gold and copper 
makes standard gold; of gold, copper and silver makes 
old standard gold; of tin and copper makes gun metal; 
of copper and zinc makes mosaic gold; of tin and zinc 
makes pewter; of lead and a little arsenic makes sheet 
metal; of silver and copper makes standard silver; of 
tin and lead makes solder; of lead and antimony makes 
type metal; of copper and arsenic makes white copper. 

NICKEL ALLOYS. 

The following alloys have been found useful: Nickel 
aluminum, composed of 20 parts nickel and 8 parts 
aluminum, used for decorative purposes; rosin, com- 



140 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

posed of 40 parts nickel, 10 parts silver, 30 parts alu- 
minum, and 20 parts tin, for jewelers' work; sun-bronze 
composed of 60 parts cobalt, 10 parts aluminum, 40 
parts copper; metalline, 35 parts cobajt, 25 parts alu- 
minum, 10 parts iron and 30 parts copper. 



COST OF A PATENT IN DIFFERENT COUNTRIES. 

United States: 

Preliminary examination $ 5 00 

Cost of drawing 5 GO 

First Government fee ( in every case the same ) 1 5 00 

Total outlay to secure filing of an appli- 
cation $2t^ 00 

Final Government fee 20 00 

Attorney's fee 20 00 

Total minimum cost of patent 1^65 00 

Canada ^40 00 

German 60 00 

Great Britain 60 00 

France 60 00 

Italy 60 00 

Austria 60 00 

Belgium 60 00 

WEIGHT OF METALS. 

Zinc weighs .253 pounds per cubic inch. 
Cast iron weighs .26 pounds per cubic inch. 
Tin weighs .263 pounds per cubic inch. 
Wrought iron weighs .28 pounds per cubic inch. 
Steel weighs .282 pounds per cubic inch. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. I4I 

Brass weighs .3 pounds per cubic inch. 
Copper weighs .32 pounds per cubic inch. 
Lead weighs .41 pounds per cubic inch. 

TO CALCULATE RADIATING SURFACE. 

Add together the square feet of glass in the win- 
dows; the number of cubic feet of air required to be 
charged per minute, and one-twentieth the surface of 
external wall and roof; multiply this sum by the differ- 
ence between the required temperature of the room and 
that of the external air at its lowest point, and divide 
the product by the difference in temperature between 
the steam in the pipes and the required temperature of 
the room. The quotient is the required radiating sur- 
face in square feet. Each square foot of radiating sur- 
face may be depended upon in average practice to give 
out three heat units per hour for each degree of differ- 
ence in temperature between the steam inside and the 
air outside, the range under different conditions being 
about 50 per cent above or below that figure. 

SHRINKAGE OF CASTINGS. 

The allowance for shrinking in castings should be 
for each foot in length: — 

Parts of an inch. 

For cast iron pipes 125 — }i 

" beams and girders i — i-io 

*' cylinders, large 094 — 3-32 

'* *' small 06 — 1-16 

Brass 17 — 3-16 

Lead 31 — 5-16 

Zinc 25—1^ 

Copper 17 — 3-16 



142 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



THE WEAR AND TEAR OF BUILDING MATERIALS. 

At the tenth annual meeting of the Fire Under- 
writers' Association of the Northwest, held at Chicago 
in September, 1879, Mr. A. W. Spaulding read a paper 
on the wear and tear of building materials, and tabu- 
lated the result of his investigations in the following 
form: 



Material 

IN 

Building. 



Brick 

Plastering 

Painting, outside... 
Painting, inside. . . . 

Shingles 

Cornice 

Weather-boarding . 

Sheathing 

Flooring 

Doors, complete... 
Windows, complete 
Stairs and newel . 

Base i.. 

Inside blinds 

Building hardware. 
Piazzas and porches 
Outside blinds. . . 
Sills and first floor 

joints 

Dimension lumber. 



Frame 
dwelling. 



5-H (1) 

< 



S U S 

<U o; C! 

u i; ^ 

. (D a; 



20 

5 
7 
16 
40 
30 
50 
20 
30 
30 
30 
40 
30 
20 
20 
16 

25 
50 



5 
20 

14 
6 

2K 

rA 
2 

5 

3/3 

yA 

3A 

3A 
5 
5 
6 

4 

2 



Brick 

dwelling 

(shingle 

roof.) 






2 S s-.^ 

gj /-" (L) <U 

< CI. 



75 
30 
7 
7 
16 
40 



50 
20 

30 
30 
30 
40 

30 
20 
20 
16 

40 

75 



+-» ^ ^ 
<u (u 5 

cj it: oj 



3^ 
14 
14 

6 

2 

5 

3K 
3>^ 
3>^ 

2>^ 

3A 
5 
5 
6 



2>^ 25 
I K 40 



Frame 
store. 



Brick store 

(shingle 

roof.) 






(U <L> S 

U ^H C3 



16 

5 
5 

16 
30 
30 

40 
13 

25 
25 

20 

30 
30 
13 

20 
16 



20 
20 



6 

3K 
3M 



4 
4 

5 

3>^ 

3>^ 



S-H fl) 



66 
30 
6 
6 
16 
40 

50 
13 

30 
30 
20 
30 
30 

13 
20 
16 

30 
66 



^ s 

Oh U, 



3K 

16 



3X 
3M 

3M 
8 

5 
6 

3K 



These figures represent the averages deduced from 
the replies made by eighty-three competent builders 
unconnected with fire insurance companies in twenty- 
seven cities and towns of the eleven Western States. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 143 

A QUICK METHOD OF FINDING INTEREST. 

Rule. — 1st. Divide the principal by 12, and multiply 
the result by the rate per cent, expressed decimally; 
this gives tjie interest for one month. 2d. Multiply 
the years by 12, and add the number of months, then 
place ys of the number of days to the right as a deci- 
mal. 

Multiply 1st and 2d results, gives the interest. 



WEIGHT OF BUILDINGS. 

It has been calculated that the pressure per square 
foot of the superstructure upon the foundation walls of 
a few of the best known buildings is as follows: 

Dome of United States Capitol at Washington ^3A77 pounds 

Girard College, Philadelphia, i3,44o " 

St. Peter's, Rome 33,330 " 

St. Paul's, London 39,450 " 

St. Genevieve, Paris 60,000 " 

Le Toussaint, Angers #. . . go,ooo " 

while the pressure upon the earth per square foot in 
the case of St. Paulas, London, is 42,950 pounds. 

COST OF PUBLIC BUILDINGS. 

An experienced architect and surveyor, on the 19th 
of February, 1879, prepared, and presented to Gen. 
Meigs, Quartermaster-General, the estimate which fol- 
lows of the cost of various public and private buildings 
in this country, the comparison being by cubic feet, 
external dimensions: 

Sub-Treasury and Postoffice, Boston, Mass $2,080,507 

United States Branch Mint, San Francisco, Cal 1,500,000 

Custom and C*ourt House and Postoffice, Cairo, 111 271,081 

Custom and Court House and Postoffice, Columbia, S.C. 381,900 
United States building, Des Moines, Iowa 221,437 



144 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

United States building* Knoxville, Tenn 398,847 

United States building, Madison, Wis 329,389 

United States building, Ogdensburg, N. Y 216,576 

United States building, Omaha, Neb 334.900 

United States building, Portland, Me : 392,215 

German Bank, Fourteenth street, Newport, R. 1 475,000 

Staats Zeitung, New York City 475,100 

Western Union Telegraph, New York City 1,400,000 

Masonic Temple, New York City 1,900,000 

Centennial building. Shepherd's, corner Twelfth and 

Pennsylvania Avenues, Washington, D. C 246,073 

Add to this the United States National Museum, fire- 
proof building, at Washington, D. C e . c . 250,000 



relative: holding power of wire and cut 

NAILS. 

Test made by a committee appointed by the Wheel- 
ing Nail Manufacturers. 





NUMBER OF NAILS IN 


POUNDS REQUIRED TO 




POUND. 


PULL NAILS OUT. 




Cut. 


Wire. 


Cut. 


Wire. 


2od. 


23 


35 


1,593 


703 


lod. 


60 


86 


908 


315 


8d. 


90 


126 


597 


227 


6d. 


160 


206 


383 


200 


4d. 


280 


316 


286 


123 



This test showed the relative value of a pound of 

each kind to be as follows: 

I lb. of 2od. cut nails equals 1.40 lbs. of wire nails. 
I " lod. « « 2.01 " " 

I " 8d. « « 1.87 « " 

I " 6d. ^ « 1.49 



4d. 



2.06 



In obtaining the above results, two tests were made 
of the 8d. cut nails, and four of the 8d. wire nails; three 
tests each were made of the 6d. and 4d. cut nails, and 
6d. and 4d. wire nails, and the average is shown. 

The committee report as the result of their experi- 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. I45 

ments that l^i.oo of cut nails will give the same service 
as ^1.78 in wire nails, if at the same price per pound. 

Very thorough tests of the comparative holding 
power of wire nails and cut nails of equal lengths and 
weights were made at the United States arsenal, Water- 
town, Mass., in November and December, 1892, and 
January, 1893. Fifty-eight series of tests were made, 
each series comprising ten pairs cut nails and wire nails 
making a total of 1, 160 nails tested. From forty series 
comprising forty sizes of nails driven in spruce wood, 
it was found that the cut nails showed an average 
superiority of 60.50 per cent.; the common nails show- 
ing an average superiority of 47.51 per cent., and the 
finishing nails an average of 72.22 per cent. 

In eighteen series, comprising six sizes of box nails 
driven into pine wood, in three ways the cut nails 
showed an average superiority of 99.93 per cent. 

In no series of tests did the wire nails hold as much 
as the cut nails. 



CHAPTER VII. 

HETALS. 

METALS AND THEIR PROPERTIES; ALLOYS; SOLDERS; 
SOLDERING FLUXES. 

In the following pages a mass of valuable data will 
be given concerning those metals used most largely in 
plate or sheet. 

As it is necessary to frequently refer to the various 
paragraphs of this chapter, each paragraph is numbered. 

(i) Metals are natural elementary substances, as 
far as is known. They are opaque (not transparent), 
reflect light from their polished surfaces, and have a 
characteristic lustre, known as the metallic lustre. With 
the exception of mercury, they are all solid at the or- 
dinary temperature of the atmosphere. 

(2) Silver, tin, lead, mercury, antimony, zinc, cad 
mium, and bismuth, have a whitish or grayish color. 
Gold stands alone as a metal having a yellow color; 
copper is the only red metal. 

( 3 ) Metals differ widely in their behavior under the 
influence of heat; some, as tin and lead, are fusible be^ 
low red heat; others, as copper, gold, and silver, fuse 
readily in ordinary furnaces; nickel, iron, and manganese 
fuse with great difficulty; platinum is practically infusi- 
ble. Arsenic, cadmium, zinc, and mercury are volatile^ 
that is, vaporise easily. An interesting example of vol- 
atility is that of zinc, which when at a bright red heat 
takes fire, burns with a greenish flame, and oxidises 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. I47 

(unites with the oxygen gas of the atmosphere), being 
thereby converted into a dense white flocculent sub- 
stance called formerly ^philosopher's wool.' 

(4) The fracture of metals is often characteristic; 
we get crystalline, granular, fibrous, silky, and other 
fractures. 

properties; specific gravity; melting-points. 

Metals have various properties. Some remarks on 
these, and other particulars respecting metals, now 
follow. 

(5) Malleability, — A property which is possessed 
by metals in varying degree is that of malleability, that 
is, of permitting extension of surface without rupture, 
by, for example, hammering, pressure, or rolling. Gold, 
which is capable of being hammered into leaves of 
extreme thinness, is the most malleable of all metals. 
Other metals, though malleable to a considerable de- 
gree, require to be annealed (yi^sX^di red and allowed to 
cool down slowly) once or even several times during 
the operation of rolling out, or extending by the ham- 
mer as in raising and stretching. Copper is an ex- 
ample; though, curiously enough, copper is equally 
malleable whether, after heating, it is allowed to cool 
slowly or is cooled suddenly by dipping while at red 
heat in cold water. Zinc is in its most malleable con- 
dition at a temperature a little above the boiling-point 
of water; when less than half as hot again as this, it is 
brittle and unworkable. 

(6) Of the theory of annealing nothing definite ap- 
pears to be known; but it is supposed that on rolling 
out or hammering a piece of metal the particles or 
molecules of which the metal is composed, become 
strained and disarranged ('the grain closed'), and th^ 



148 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

metal is hardened; and that on heating, the metal ex- 
pands, and the strain being removed, the molecules re- 
arrange themselves. This, however, does not explain 
many matters connected with annealing; for example, 
why one heated metal is hardened by being suddenly 
dipped in cold water, and another metal softened when 
treated in the same manner. 

The following, which illustrates the effect of *ham- 
mer hardening' on iron, may be of interest: — 

(7) In 1854, at the meeting of the British Associa- 
tion in Liverpool, a paper on the crystallisation of iron 
under certain circumstances was read by Mr. Clay 
(Mersey Iron and Steel Works), who stated that he 
selected a piece of good, tough, fibrous bar-iron, which 
he heated to a full red heat, and then hammered by 
light, rapid, tapping blows, until it was what is called 
'black-cold.' After complete cooling he broke it, and 
found that the structure of the iron was entirely 
changed, and that, instead of bending nearly double 
without fracture, as it should have done, and breaking 
with a fine silky fibre when fracture did occur, an entire 
alteration had taken place, and the bar was rigid, brit- 
tle, and sonorous, incapable of bending in the slightest 
degree, and breaking with a glassy, crystallised appear- 
ance. By simply heating the bar to full red-heat again, 
the fibre was restored exactly as before. 

(8) Tenacity. — The property in metals of resisting 
being torn asunder by a tensile or stretching force, is 
called tenacity. 

The tenacity of metals varies with their purity and 
molecular condition, as due to modes of treatment or 
preparation: for example, the tenacity of steel is much 
influenced by its 'temper,' and that of cast iron made 
hy \S\^ cold-blast moz^'s^s is greater than when the pro- 
cess is that of the hot-blasts 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



149 



(9) Ductility, — The property of being permanently 
lengthened by a tensile or stretching force, as in wire 
drawing, is called ductility. All the malleable metals 
are more or less ductile, though the most malleable 
metals are not necessarily the most ductile; ductility 
being influenced more by tenacity than by malleability. 

The table shows how some of the metals, starting 
from gold(see 'Malleability', above § 6), rank under 
the headings given. 

Malleability. 
Gold 
Silver 
Copper 
Tin 

Platinum 
Lead 
Zinc 
Iron 
Nickel 

(10) Conductivity. — Of all solids, metals are the 
best conductors of heat. The order of conductivity 
for a few important metals, beginning^ with the best 
conductors is — silver, copper, gold, tin, iron, lead, plat- 
inum, and bismuth. 

(12) Welding. — An important property of some of 
the metals is that pieces can be 'weldedV together, that 
is, incorporated with each other. Iron at a white heat 
is in a pasty condition and can be ^welded'; that is, if 
two white-hot and clean surfaces of iron be brought 
into contact and pressed or hammered together, they 
thus are *welded,' that is, become part of one and the 
same mass. If lead and gold in a fine state of division 
be strongly pressed together at the ordinary tempera- 
ture of the atmosphere, they will form one mass. 



Ductility. 


Tenacity, 


Gold 


Steel 


Silver 


Iron 


Platinum 


Copper 


Iron 


Platinum 


Copper 


Silver 


Aluminum 


Gold 


Zinc 


Zinc 


Tin 


Tin 


Lead 


Lead 



150 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

(12) Hardness, — The comparative hardness of 
metals is usually estimated by the force required to 
draw the metals into wires of equal diameter. In 
order of hardness we have — steel, iron, copper, silver 
tin, antimony, and lead. 

(13) Specific Gravity. Some substances are, in 
their nature, more weighty bulk for bulk than others. 
Thus, a cubic inch of lead is heavier than a cubic inch 
of iron; and a cubic inch of iron than a cubic inch of 
water. 

By their specific gravity, the weights, relatively to 
each other, of substances, are known. The standard of 
comparison is an equal bu]k of pure distilled water, and 
if the specific gravity of a body is, say 2, this means 
that it is twice as heavy as the same bulk of water. 

The specific gravity of platinum is 21; platinum 
therefore bulk for bulk is 21 times heavier than water. 

The specific gravity of antimony is 6 '7, and a cubic 
foot of pure distilled water weighs very nearly lOOQ 
ounces. Therefore a cubic foot of antimony weighs 
6*7 times 1000 ounces, that is 6700 ounces. 

Knowing the specific gravity of a substance, we can 
find the weight of any volume of it, by multiplying the 
given volume in cubic inches, by its specific gravity, 
and by 62 '4 the weight in lbs. of a cubic foot (1728 
cubic inches) of water, and dividing by 1728. Thus 
the weight of 48 cubic inches of cast copper, the spe- 
cific gravity of which is 8*6, is 
48 X 8 • 6 X 62 • 4 

, is, that is to say, 14*9 lbs. 

1728 

As the relative weights of equal volumes of metals 
have often to be taken into consideration in using 
metals for constructive purposes, for example, in the 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



151 



covering of roofs, where weight is sometimes a matter 
of importance, a table of specific gravities follows: 



TABLE OF SPECIFIC GRAVITIES AND MELTING-POINTS. 

Specific Melting-points. Authority for 
Metals. Gravities. (Centigrade.) Melting-points. 

Antimony 6"j 432 Buillet. 

Bismuth 9*8 268*3 Reimsdyk. 

'^°ps-j-;4i,V):::;::::8-f i -S4 vidie. 

( 1300 ) 

Steel 7-8 ] to \ Buillet. 

( 1400 ) 

Cadmium 8 '6 320 7 Person. 

(1500 ) 

Iron (wrought) 7"8 j ^^ f Buillet. 

( 1600 ) 

Lead 11*36 326*2 Person. 

Tin 7*29 232*7 Person. 

Zinc 7*19 433 "3 Person. 

Aluminum 2*67 1045 Violle. 

Nickel 8*30 1450 Pictel. 

Platinum 21 -25 • 1775 Violle. 

The melting-points of the metals named are added 
to the table, as it is often useful to be able to refer to 
these. The degrees of heat are according to the Cen- 
tigrade thermometer. This portion of the table is taken 
from 'Melting and Boiling Point Tables,' by Thos. Car- 
nelley, 1885. 

We now proceed to notice more particularly the 
metals iron (including cast iron and steel), tin, zinc and 
copper. 

IRON AND STEEL. 

(14) Iron in a state of purity is comparatively 
little known; the ores of it are various and abundant. 
In its commercial forms, as plate or sheet, bar, and cast 
iron, it is well known. As sheet it can be cut into pat- 
terns and bent into desired forms; as bar it can be made 
hot and 'wrought,' that is, shaped by means of the 
hammer; and when molten it can be run or cast into all 



152 WORKSHOP MANUAL* 

sorts o'f shapes. Cast iron is brittle, crystaline in frac- 
ture (§4)) and not workable by the hammer. In sheet 
and bar form, iron is malleable, mostly (fibrous in frac- 
ture, and capable of being welded (§11). The presence 
of impurities in bar iron, that is, the presence of sub- 
stances not wanted in it at the time being, seriously 
affects its malleability. Thus the presence of phos- 
phorus, or tin, renders it brittle when cold (*cold- 
short'), and the presence of sulphur makes it unworka- 
ble when hot ('hot-short'). Iron quickly rusts (oxi- 
dises, §3) if exposed to damp air, as in the case of iron 
exposed to all weathers; or to air and water, as with 
vessels in which barely sufficient water is left to cover 
the bottoms, the rusting (oxidation) being then much 
more rapid than when the vessels are kept full. Heated 
to redness and above, *scale* (oxide of iron) rapidly 
forms and interferes greatly with welding. It is im- 
possible to enter here into any consideration of the 
processes by which iron is prepared from its ores. To 
two modern processes, however, we shall presently have 
particularly to refer. 

(15) The effects of the presence of several foreign 
substances in iron as impurities has just been alluded to, 
but the presence in it of 'carbon' we have not spoken 
of. This is a substance which in its crystalline form is 
known as the diamond, and in its uncrystalline form as 
charcoal. The presence of charcoal in iron destroys 
its malleability, but at the same time gives to it proper- 
ties various, so remarkable and useful to mankind, that 
to say, as a defect, of a piece of iron with carbon in it, 
that it is not malleable, is simply equivalent to saying 
when we have a piece of brass, that it is not a piece of 
copper. Quite the reverse of being 'matter in the wrong 
place,' carbon in iron furnishes a compound so valuable 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 153 

on its own account, so entirely of its own kinds (in the 
plural because its kinds are several), that, if there were 
other substances not metals, the compounding of which 
with a metal gave products at all resembling those of 
iron and carbon, then all such compounds would form 
a class of their own. The iron and carbon compound, 
so valuable on its own account, so entirely of its own 
however, stands inconveniently alone. There we shall 
not leave it, but as aiding the full comprehension of it, 
notwithstanding that we define alloys (§4) as compounds 
of metals, shall consider it not as outside but as within 
this class of substances, as well as also shall speak of 
iron as being alloyed with it. We shall deal with it, 
however, under the present heading, treating com- 
pounds of actual methods later on. 

(16) Iron is alloyed with carbon in proportions 
varying from say J^ to 5 per cent. When in the pro- 
portion of from 2 per cent, upwards, the compound is 
cast iron, that is, iron suitable for casting purposes; in 
other proportions it is known as steel. In cast iron the 
metallic appearance is somewhat modified; in steel it is 
maintained. Originally steel was made by the addition 
of carbon to manufactured iron, and the word had then 
a fairly definite signification; meaning a material of a 
high tensile strength; that by being heated dull red and 
suddenly cooled could be made so hard that a file would 
not 'touch' it, that is, would slide over it without mark- 
ing it; and that could have that hardness modified or 
'tempered' by further application of heat. But with 
the introduction of the Bessemer process of steel 
making, and of the Siemens' process of making steel 
direct from the ores, processes by which any desired 
percentage of carbon can be given, the signification of 
the word has become enlarged, and now includes all 



154 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

alloys of iron and carbon between malleable iron and 
cast iron; except that the term 'mild' steel is sometimes 
applied to those alloys that approach in qualities to 
malleable iron. Steel plates are now produced equal 
in toughness, and it is said even excelling the best 
'charcoaV plates, and as they are much cheaper, the old 
charcoal-plate-making process is very generally giving 
way to the direct process. In practice, however, these 
plates are found to be more springy than good charcoal 
plates, and not so soft and easy to work. 

(17) As iron is very liable to rust, surface protec- 
tion is given to it by a coating of tin, or of an alloy of 
lead and tin, (lead predominating), or of zinc. Plates 
coated with tin are termed 'tiri plates; with lead and tin 
have the name of terne plates, and if coated with zinc 
are said to be ^galvanised.* Terne plates are used for 
lining packing-cases, also for work to be japanned. 
Usual sizes of tin and terne plates are 14'' X 10", 20° X 
14'', 2o''X28", and they are made up to 4o''X28\ 

(18) Large iron sheets of various gauges coated 
with tin and having the same appearance as a *tin' plate 
2lXQ c'd^^A, Manchester plates y and sometimes tinned iron. 
But the latter is more generally applied to sheets of 
iron which are coated with lead and tin, and are dull 
like terne plates. 

(19) Iron coated with zinc is not so easily worked 
as when ungalvanised. In galvanising, the zinc 'alloys' 
with the surface of the iron, and this has a tendency to 
make the iron brittle. Galvanised iron is useful for 
water tanks as the zinc coating prevents rust better than 
a tin coating. Owing to the ease with which zinc is 
attacked by acids, galvanised iron is not suitable for 
vessels exposed to acids or acid vapours. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 155 

COPPER. 

(20) This, the only red metal (§ 3), is malleable, 
tenacious, soft, ductile, sonorous, and an excellent con- 
ductor of heat. For this reason, and because of its 
durability, it is largely made use of for cooking utensils. 
It is found in numerous states of combination with 
other constituents, as well as 'native' (uncombined). 
Its most important ore is copper pyrites. Copper melts 
at a dull white heat and becomes then covered with a 
a black crust (oxide). It burns when at a bright 
white heat with a greenish flame. No attempt explan- 
ation of its manufacture will here be made, as any de- 
scription not lengthy would be simply a bewilderment. 
For the production of sheet copper it is first cast in the 
forms of slabs, which are rolled, and then annealed and 
re-rolled, this annealing and re-rolling being repeated 
until the copper sheet is brought down to the desired 
thickness. In working ordinary sheet copper, it is 
hammered to stiffen it, and *close the grain.' Hand- 
rolled copper is, however, produced that does not re- 
quire hammering. 

(21) In the course of the manufacture of copper 
it undergoes a process termed ^poling' to get rid of im- 
purities. We mention this because we shall find (§ 38) 
a similar process gone through in preparing solders. 
The poling of copper consists in plunging the end of a 
pole of green wood, preferably birch, beneath the sur- 
face of the molten metal, and stirring the mass with it. 
Violent ebullition takes place, large quantities of gases 
are liberated, and the copper is thoroughly agitated. 
It is doubtful if this poling process is fully understood, 
for, though it is quite obvious that there may be insuffi- 
cient poling {'underpoli?ig)y it is not easy to explain 



156 WORKSHOP MANUAL* 

^overpoling' But overpoUng, as a fact, is fully recog- 
nised in the manufacture of copper, and the metal is 
brittle both if the polling is too long continued or not 
long enough. If duly poled, the cast slab when set 
displays a comparatively level surface; if underpoled a 
longitudinal furrow forms on the surface of a slab as it 
cools; if overpoled, instead of a furrow, the surface ex- 
hibits a longitudinal ridge. Copper, duly poled, is 
known as 'best selected,' and as *tough cake' copper. 

ZINC. 

(22) Of this metal, known also very commonly as 
'spelter,' calamiiie is a very abundant ore; another 
abundant ore is blende. The metal is extracted from its 
ores by a process of distillation, the metal volatilising 
(§3) at a bright red heat, and the vapour, passing into 
tubes, condenses, and is collected from the tubes in 
powder and m solid condition. If required pure, further 
process is necessary. This metal does not appear to 
have been known until the sixteenth century. Henkel, 
in 1 74 1, was the first, at least in Europe, who succeeded 
in obtaining zinc from calamine. Zinc is hardened by 
rolling, and requires to be annealed at a low tempera- 
ture to restore its malleability. Until the discovery of 
the malleability of zinc when a little hotter than boiling 
water, it was only used to alloy copper with, and sheet 
zinc was unknown. Zinc expands i-340th by heat- 
ing from the freezing to the boiling point of water. 
The zinc of commerce dissolves readily in hydrochloric 
and in sulphuric acid; pure zinc only slowly. If zinc is 
exposed to the air, a film of dull grey oxide forms on 
the surface. It suffers afterward little further change. 
Zinc alloys with copper and tin, but not with lead; it 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 1 57 

also alloys with iron, for which it is largely used as a 
coating; iron so coated being known as ^galvanised* 
iron (§ 17). 

LEAD. 

(23) Another metal that is prepared in sheet is 
lead. This metal was known in the earliest ages of the 
world; it is soft, flexible, and has but little tenacity. 
One of its principal ores is galena. Being a soft metal, 
it is worked {'bossecT) by the plumber into various 
shapes by means of special tools, which often saves the 
making of joints. As it is comparatively indestructible 
under ordinary conditions, it is largely used for roofing 
purposes and for water cisterns. It is also used for the 
lining of cisterns for strong acids, in which case the 
joints are not soldered in the ordinary way with plumb- 
er's solder, but made by a process termed ^azitogeTWUs 
soldering or Head biiriiing' Lead prepared in sheet by 
casting is known as cast lead, but when prepared by the 
more modern method of casting a small slab of the 
metal and then rolling it to any desired thickness is 
called milled lead. 

ALLOYS. 

(24) An alloy is a compound of two or more 
metals. Alloys retain the metallic appearance, and 
whilst closely approximating in properties to the metals 
com.pounded, often possess in addition valuable proper- 
ties which do not exist in either of the constituent 
metals forming the alloy. An alloy of copper and zinc 
has a metallic appearance and working properties some- 
what similar to those of the individual metals it is made 
up of, and so with an alloy of gold, or silver, and a 
small percentage of copper. But the latter alloys have 



IS8 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

the further property of hardness, making them suit- 
able for coinage, for which gold, or silver, unalloyed, is 
too soft. Like to this addition of copper to gold or 
silver is the addition of antimony to lead and to tin, by 
which alloys are obtained harder though more brittle 
than ether lead or tin by itself. The alloy of lead and 
antimony is used for printer's type, for which lead 
alone is too soft. 

(25) Alloys are often more fusible than the in- 
dividual metals of which they are composed. Thus 
while lead melts at 326° C, tin at 233° C, bismuth at 
268° C, and cadmium at 321° C, an alloy of 8 parts 
bismuth, 4 tin, and 4 lead, forms what is technically 
known as a 'fusible' alloy, meaning an alloy very read- 
ily fusible, the particular alloy stated melting indeed 
at 95 °C., that is, below the boiling-point of water. The 
addition of a little cadmium to the above forms a still 
more 'fusible' alloy, called Wood's alloy, which melts 
at about 65° C. 

(26) We give here the names of some of the more 
important alloys, with those of the metals of which 
they are made up. 

Bronze 

Bull-metal 

Gun-metal 

Speculum-metal 

Brass 

Dutch-metal 

Muntz' metal 

Hard solders 

German silver Copper, zinc, and nickel. 

Britanniametal | ^\. ^^timony copper, 

( bismuth, and zmc. 



I 



Copper and tin. 
Copper and Zinc. 



Lead and tin. 



Pewter 

Soft solders 

Type metal. ............ Lead and antimony. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 1 59 

ALLOYS OF COPPER AND TIN. 

(27) Alloys of copper and tin are known as bronze, 
gun-metal, speculum-metal, etc. Some of these alloys 
possess the property of becoming soft and malleable 
when cooled suddenly while red-hot, by dipping into 
cold water, but of being hard and brittle when cooled 
slowly. 

Name of Alloy. Co^p^en^' Tin!'"' "'''' 

Bell-metal 78 'o 25*0 

Gun-metal 90*0 10 'o 

Speculum-metal 95*6 33*0 

Bronze coinage 95 'o 4'o and i zinc. 

(28) Speculum-metal is a very hard, brittle, steel- 
grey alloy, capable of receiving a very smooth and 
highly-polished surface. 

ALLOYS OF COPPER AND ZINC. 

(29) Brass, — Brass is the general name given to 
alloys of copper and zinc (ordinary brass consists of 
two of copper to one of zinc); by some writers also to 
alloys of copper and tin, now better known as bronze. 
Brass was known to the ancients, who prepared it from 
copper and calamine (§22), as they were unacquainted 
with the metal contained in calamine. We are said to 
have learned the fusing of copper with calamine from 
the Germans, and until a comparatively recent date 
brass, called calamine brass, was thus prepared in this 
country. Between 1780 and 1800, various patents were 
taken out for improving the manufacture of brass, by 
fusing copper and zinc direct instead of employing cal- 
amine. The calamine method, however, did not at 
once die out, as it was thought by some that calamine 
brass was better than that made direct. 

In the manufacture of brass, the copper is first 



l60 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

melted, because of its high melting-point, and the zinc 
warmed, is then let down by tongs into the crucible 
containing the molten copper, plunged under its sur- 
face, and held there till melted. The mass is then 
stirred with a hot brass or iron rod, so as to mix the 
metals, great care being taken not to introduce any 
cold or damp matter. A little sulphate of sodium 
*salt-cake', or carbonate of sodium *soda-ash,' thrown 
into the crucible at the moment of pouring, assists in 
raising any impurities to the surface, which can then 
be skimmed off as the mass is poured. With proper 
management, the loss of zinc is not so great as might 
be expected, considering the comparatively low tem- 
perature at which it volatilises, and the relatively high 
temperature necessary to melt the copper. 

(30) Brass is harder than copper, and therefore 
stands wear better; it is very malleable and ductile, 
may be rolled into thin sheets, shaped into vessels by 
'spinning' (see § 33) stamping, or by the hammer, 
and may be drawn into fine wire. It is well adapted 
for casting, as it melts easily at a lower temperature 
than copper and is capable of receiving very delicate 
impressions from the mould. It is said to resist at- 
mospheric influences better than copper, but when its 
surface is unprotected by lacquer, it rapidly tarnishes 
and becomes black. It has a pleasing color, takes a 
high polish, and is cheaper than copper. 

(31) The malleability of brass varies with its com-, 
position, and the heat at which it is worked. The maU 
leability is also affected in a very decided degree by the 
presence of various foreign metals in its composition, 
even though these are present in but minute quantity. 
Brass intended for door-plate engraving is improved by 
the presence of a little tin; or by the presence gf ^ littl^ 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. l6l 

lead if to be used in the lathe or for casting. Brass for 
wire-drawing, however, must not contain lead; nor must 
brass intended for rolling contain antimony, which ren- 
ders it brittle. Some kinds of brass are only malleable 
while cold, others only while hot, others are not mal- 
leable at all. A good example of the remarkable mal- 
leability of certain kinds is furnished by Dutch Metal, 
which contains a large proportion of copper, and which 
can be hammered into leaves of less than 1-57000 of an 
inch in thickness. 

Though extremely tenacious, brass loses its tenacity 
in course of time by molecular change, especially if 
subject to vibration or continued tension. It is there- 
fore unfitted for chains or for the suspension of weights. 
Chandelier chains have been known to lose their ten- 
acity, become brittle, and break; and fine brass wire, 
which is of course brass in a state of tension, will, in 
time, become quite brittle, merely hanging in a coil. 

(32) Mitntz' Metal is a variety of brass consisting of 
about three parts of copper or two of zinc, with about 
one per cent, of lead. The alloy is yellow, and admits 
of being rolled at a red-heat. It is extensively applied 
for the sheathing of ships, as it is said to keep a cleaner 
surface than^ copper sheathing. 

Hard Solders, — These are treated further on. 

The number of alloys of copper and zinc is consid- 
erable, and there is great confusion in respect of their 
names and composition. The table on opposite page, 
showing the proportions of some alloys of copper and 
zinc, is an extract from a table by Dr. Percy* 

(33) Britannia MetaL — We follow on with this 
alloy although not an alloy of copper and zinc alone. 
Britannia metal is highly malleable and one of the best 
of the substitutes for silver. It is composed of tin, an- 



l62 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

timony, copper, bismuth, and zinc, in various propor- 
tions, according to the purpose for which it is required. 
If the alloy is to be *spun,' that is, worked into shape by 
specially formed tools whilst revolving in a lathe, a 
greater proportion of tin is used than when the alloy is 
only to be rolled. If it is to be cast, the proportion of 
tin is much less. 

(34) Alloys of Tin a?id Lead, — Alloys of tin and lead 
furnish us with our soft solders, and are therefore of 
great practical value. 

(35) Pewter*— T\\^ composition of pewter varies 
considerably. Common pewter consists of tin and lead 
alone; the best contains also small percentages of an- 
timony, copper, and bismuth; varying indeed but little 
from Britannia metal. 

SOLDERS. 

(36) A solder is a metallic composition, by the 
fusion of which metals are united. The requirements 
of a good solder are twofold, (i) Its meltmg point 
must be below that of whatever metal is to be joined; 
( 2 ) it must run easily when melted. It is comparatively 
easy (§25) to fulfil the first condition of a good solder. 
To fulfil the second requirement, one of the constituents 
of the solder must be either the same metal as that to 
be soldered, or a metal which will readily alloy with it, 
or which will readily coat its surface. 

(37) Solders are *soft' or 'hard,' according to the 
temperature at which they melt. Hard solders fuse at 
a red heat. Soft solders are those which can be applied 
with a 'soldering iron,' that is to say, a 'copper bit/ or 
'plumber's iron,' or with a mouth blowpipe; these sol- 
ders melt below 300"^ C. Hard solders have a much 
higher fusing point, and require either a forge or a blast 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 163 

blowpipe to apply them. Soldering with hard solders 
is termed 'brazing/ 

(38) An important particular in the preparation of 
solders is that they should be well stirred before pour- 
ing, preferably with a piece of green wood (§21) and 
the surface of the molten metal exposed as little as 
possible to the air, so that *dross' (oxide) shall not form 
on the surface. A few knobs of charcoal on the mol- 
ten metal will to a very great extent prevent the form- 
ation of dross. 

(39) Examining the soft solders, we see that 
plumber's solder melts at 227° C, that is to say, at a 
lower melting point than the metal (lead pipe), for 
soldering which it is used. Further, it is largely com- 
posed of lead. It thus fulfils both the requirements of 
a good solder. Tinman's solder melts at 160° C. It is 
used for soldering tin-plate, which, remember, is iron 
coated with tin. Tin melts at 230° C, a higher tem- 
perature than that of its solder, and tin is a constituent 
of the solder. Again the conditions of a good solder 
are fulfilled. Tinman's solder is also used for soft-sol- 
dering copper, because an alloy of lead and tin will 
readily coat copper, as also readily alloy with it. 

SOLDERING METALS. 

(40) Substances that 'flux' or aid the flow of metals 
when melting or melted are termed 'fluxes! The gen- 
eral subject of fluxes is outside our province; we are, 
however, specially interested in what we have desig- 
nated 'soldering fluxes namely those fluxes that facili- 
tate the flow of the solders and of the metals of which 
they are composed. 

(41) Essentially this 'fluxing' consists in the pre- 
vention of the formation of oxide (§3) to which metals 



164 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



(D 

a. 

<u 

bJD 

g 
'o 



o 



? ^^ 

O (D . ► 

W c ^H 

';h 'in 7:; 

^ <L> Ct 

O (D -^ 

_ W2 

►> c ^ 

^ o ^ 

pq Uh 



5^ 

O (u J3 ;;2 



2 

CO 

►^ 
(D 




(0 
GC 
U 
O 

-J 

o 

(0 

u. 
O 

u 

-J 
m 

< 



boo; <3J 

+:;^ oj 
^.Sbb 

a. 






o 00 o 

CO O O iJ-> 

vo CO MD O 



-M 












bo 






c 






CO 


;-! 


fi 


P 


.2 

'-4-J 






Tl 


Cu 


u 


r: 





(A 


rt 


a. 


OJ 



















^ : > 



J^ o o o 



fl fi y 

N 



O O 



O 

U 



a 

OJ 



<L) 

2« 

O 

CO 

^co • 

^ O 






» )S ^ 

<u 

>> 



CO 



00 






cd o 

rC CO 



'in 



o 



•-H r^ cort- vo vo tv. 



•s^aaaos xaog 



•s^aaaog q-^vh 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 165 

are very prone when highly heated or molten. The 
black scale (§20) that forms on the surface of cop- 
per, for instance on copper *bits/ when highly heated, 
is an oxide; also the scale that falls off red-hot iron 
when hammered (§ 14); and also the *dross'that forms 
on the surface of molten lead or molten solder (§ 38). 

(42) The employment of charcoal (carbon) for the 
purpose of preventing the formation of dross we have 
already alluded to in speaking of the preparation of 
solders. Sometimes a layer of it is spread over the 
surface of the molten metal to keep it from contact 
with the air; sometimes a layer of grease. 

In their character of aiding the flow of metals, fluxes 
are further applied to the surface of the metals to be 
soldered, which they clean, as well as aiding the flow 
of the molten solder when that is applie3. 

(43) ^Spirits of Salts' (hydrochloric of muriatic 
acid) when ^killed* is a most useful flux for soft solders. 
The ^killing' is done by dissolving zinc in the acid till 
gas is no longer given off. As the gas is most offensive, 
the dissolution of the zinc should be effected in the 
open air. This flux is not one to be used where rust 
would be serious; though there is very little danger of 
this, if, after soldering, the joint is wiped with a clean 
damp rag, and further cleaning and whiting. 

(44) Resin, or resinand oUisdigood flux for almost any 
kind of soft soldering. The surface to be soldered 
must, however, be well cleaned before applying the 
flux. 

(45) ^Killed spirits' (chemically, chloride of zinc) is 
specially useful for tin-plate soldering, because it assists 
in cleaning the edges to be joined; whereas if resin, or 
resin and oil,is used, the edge must, as stated, be cleaned 
previously. 



1 66 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 




t>sOO o ^ 



woRicsHOP Manual. 167 

(46) Spirits of salts not killed is used for soldering 
zinc because it cleans the surface of the zinc; it acts 
indeed as chloride of zinc, for this is what it becomes 
on the application to the zinc, in fact the cleaning is 
the result of this action. The killed spirits, however, 
answers equally well as the strong acid if the zinc is 
bright and clean, so far as the experience of the writer 
has gone. The *raw' (unkilled) spirits of salts is im- 
proved, as a flux for soldering zinc, by adding a small 
piece of soda to it. 

(47) Powdered resin, or resin and oil, as a flux, pos- 
sesses the great advantage over chloride of zinc, that 
there is no risk of rust afterwards. For this reason 
resin, or resin and oil, is much used in the manufacture 
of gas-meters. It is also used, or should be, for the 
bottoms and seams of oil bottles. The resin and oil 
flux can easily be wiped off joints immediately after 
soldering; it is for this reason better than dry resin 
which has to be scraped off. Even this trouble, how- 
ever, can be got over if the hot copper bit is dipped in 
oil before application to the joint to be soldered. 

(48) In ^tinning' a copper bit, that is, coating its 
point with solder before using it in soldering (a piece 
of manipulation of much importance as regards the 
easy working of the bit), the best thing to use is a lump 
of sal-ammoniac. In a small hollow made in the sal- 
ammoniac, the point of the bit, after having been filed 
smooth and bright, should be well rubbed, while hot, 
along with some solder; the point of the bit will then 
become coated with solder ('tinned'). For 'tinning' 
copper utensils, that is, coating them with tin, sal-am- 
moniac, both in powder and lump is largely used. Sal- 
ammoniac water is also used for cleaning copper bits; 
the hot bits being dipped into it prior to being used for 



l68 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

soldering. Killed spirits, however, act better. Sal-ammo- 
niac and resin, mixed, is used as a flux for soldering 
'sights' on gun-barrels. 

(49) As a flux for lead soldering, plumbers use 
tallow ('touch'). For pewter, Gallipoli oil is the ordi- 
nary flux. 

(50) For hard soldering, the flux is borax. This 
flux is also made use of in steel welding. 

SEAMS OR JOINTS. 

We illustrate herewith the more important seams or 
joints used in sheet metal work. The drawings are in- 
tended to aid in the intelligent comprehension of the 
formation of joints, and not as exact representations 
of them. 

Lap Seam, — In No. i is shown how metal plates are 
arranged for a lap seam which is to be soldered. 

Circular Lap Seam. — No. 11 shows how the edge of 
the bottom of a cylindrical article is bent up previous 
to soldering. It is evident that this seam is essentially 
No. I seam adapted to the fitting a bottom to a cylin- 
der. Such bottom is called a *snuffed on' or 'slipped 
on' bottom. 

Countersunk Lap Seam. — This is represented in No. 2. 
It will be seen that the edge of one of the plates is 
bent down, so that the edge of the plate to be joined 
to it may lie in the part bent down, and that the two 
plates when joined may present an unbroken surface. 

Riveted Lap Seam. — This is shown in No. 8. The 
amount of lap should not be less than three times the 
diameter of the rivet. 

Folded Seam. — No. 3 shows how the edges of plates 
are prepared for folded seam. 

Circular Folded Seams. — With a circular article the 



WORiCSHOP MANUAL. 



1 60 



folded seam is sometimes in the form of No. 12, which 
shows a 'paned down' bottom to a cylinder. This 
seam is essentially No. 13. 

Another form of circular folded seam is shown in 
No. 13. It is really No. 12 seam turned up, so as to lie 
close against the cylinder (see reference letter A in 
/ 2 



5 



LfllL 




Nos. 12 and 13). A bottom thus fitted is called a 
'knocked up' bottom . Here again comparison with 
No. 3 should be made. 

Double Folded Seam.—^hJv'Si is shown in No. 6, and 
needs no explanation. It is used with thick plates, 



ijo Workshop manual. 

where these when joined have to present to the eye an 
unbroken surface; as in the hot-plates of large steam- 
closets. 

Grooved Seam, — This is represented in No. 4. It 
will be seen that the seam is the same as No. 3, but one 
plate is countersunk. In fact No. 3 shows the seam as 
prepared for countersinking ('grooving') with a 
'groover.' Seam No. 6 is used where plates are too 
thick for grooving. 

Countersunk Grooved Seam, — This seam (No. 5) is 
used when an unbroken surface is required on the out- 
side of an article, for example, in toilet-cans, railway- 
carriage warmers. It is prepared as No. 3 and then 
countersunk the reverse way to No. 4. 

Box Grooved Seam. — This seam, shown in No. 14, is 
used for joining plates in 'square work/ as for example 
where the ends and sides of a deed-box are joined to- 
gether. It is essentially No. 3 seam. 

Zinc-roofing Joint. — The arrangement for this joint 
is seen in No. 7. This joint admits of the expansion 
and contraction of the zinc sheets. The edges of two 
sheets, the wood 'roll,' and the 'roll cap' are shown. 
The zinc *clip,' by which usually the sheets of zinc are 
held down, is not x'epresented. 

Br azi7ig Joints. — A brazing joint for thin metal is 
shown in Fig. 9. The edge of plate A is cut to form 
laps as represented, and these laps are arranged alter- 
nately over and under the edge of plate B. 

For thick metal the brazing joint is shown in Fig. 
10. It is essentially the same thing as the 'dovetail' 
joint of the carpenter. 



CHAPTER VIII. 
MOULDINGS. 

(i) The following chapter treats of mouldings. 
With these, the essential condition for the formation, 
with two pieces of moulding, of a joint at any angle, is 
that the section or end-shape of each piece at the 
•'mitre" or junction shall be the same. This condition 
should always be borne in mind, and it is fulfilled when, 
in the plan of the joined pieces on the horizontal plane, 
the mitre-joint shows as a line bisecting the angle that 
the two pieces make with one another; for then, as a 
little consideration will show, there is the same section 
or cut on each piece. Thus, if this angle is a right 
angle, that is, if the two pieces of moulding meet 
"square, * the joint line makes an angle in plan of 45 
degrees with the internal and external edges of each of 
the pieces; if the angle of meeting is of 120 degrees, as 
with six pieces of moulding forming a regular hexagon 
in plan, each joint line makes an angle of 60 degrees 
with the internal and external edges of either adjacent 
piece, and so on. 

(2) In dealing for pattern-making purposes with 
the section or shape of a moulding (§ 3), it is conveni- 
ent to draw it on two straight lines at right angles, the 
extremities falling one on either line, and the shape 
being arranged in respect of one of the lines just as the 
moulding itself is disposed to the surface to which it is 
applied; this line is thus part plan line — or part eleva- 



172 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

tion line — of that surface. Looking to Fig. I (Problem 
I) the section or shape KIHEDCBAis drawn on 
the indefinite lines A K', K' K, at right angles, one 
extremity of the shape standing at a point A in A K% 
and the other extremity at a point K in K' K. The 
plane of the paper being the plane of the section, then, 
if A K' represent the surface to which the moulding- 
is applied, A K' is the depth of the moulding, and 
K' K its outstretch or span. If K' K represent that 
surface, then K' K is the depth of the moulding and 
K' A its span. Thus, that plane of section of a mould- 
ing which gives its shape is a plane that contains the 
lines both of its depth and span. 

(4) It is necessary to observe that when the section 
of a moulding or shape of it is spoken of, with no quali- 
fying words, the section is supposed to be on the plane 
just referred to. 

(5) In some of the figures that follow, with a view 
of helping the student, the space contained between 
the line of shape, and the lines of depth and span, is 
shaded, as in representing a solid moulding; our readers 
will however remember that only the shaded line is the 
moulding. 

Problem I. 

Given the shape and length of apiece of moulding 
to draw the pattern for it. 

Fig. I is the shape of a piece of moulding drawn on 
the lines A K', K' and A L (Fig. 2) its length. Ob- 
viously the pattern for the piece of jnoulding will be a 
rectangle marked with certain lines upon which, with 
the given shape as a guide the rectangle has to be bent 
and formed, so as, at its end, to present that shape. 

Draw (Fig. 3) any line X X, and from any point A 
in it draw A Y at right angles to X X. From A along 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



173 



K 








K' 




Li 






l'— 


—M 






K 








f\ 


"n^ 








I—, 



c 


A 




e 





Fig. I. 



Fig. 2. 



Y 
K 




v 

K' 
I' 




H 

C 

f 


^ 


H' 

ft' 




* 


F' 

E' 
0- 
C 

B* 


E 
ry 






C 


- 


B 








X i 


^ 1 


L X 



Fig. 3. 



174 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

X X draw off A L equal to A L (Fig. 2), and from L 
draw L Y' parallel to A Y. On A Y successively dis- 
tances A B. B C, C D, D E, E F, F G, G H, HI, and 
I K, equal respectively to A B, B C, C D, D E, E F, 
F G, G H (F find G are any points in E H, the curved 
portion of the shape), H I, and I K of Fig. i. From 
the points B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, and K draw 
lines parallel to A L and terminating in L Y' in the 
points B', C, D', E', F^ G', H', T and K' respec- 
tively; A K K' L will be the rectangle pattern required, 
and the several lines parallel to A L will be the lines 
by which the pattern is to be bent up and formed to 
the given shape. 

In setting off on A Y the distances E F, F G,and G 
H, the mechanic must bear in mind that the distances 
he sets off are chords and not arcs, and that it may be 
necessary to make allowance for this. 

Problem II. 

The shape of a 771011 Idmg bei7is^ given, to draw the shape at any 
angle of section of the Tnoulding, and the pattern for a piece 
of the 7noulding cut at that angle. Also, conversely, the sec- 
tion of a 7nouldi7ig at any angle being given to draw the 
shape of the 77ioulding. 

The cases of this problem that usually occur in 
practice are where the plane of section contains the 
line of span of the moulding, but not the line of its 
depth, or contains the line of its depth, but not that 
of its span, and one particular example of where that 
plane contains neither line of depth nor line of span. 

(6) Here are seemingly two cases, they are how- 
ever one and the same, as will be seen from this. Let 
h g' f e' d' c' b' a' (Fig. 4), drawn on the lines a h, 
a N, be the given shape of the moulding, one extremity 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



175 



of it falling on the line a h at li, and the other at ^' on 
<^ N. If of the Xin^^ a h, aa\ the line ^//represents 
in plan the surface to which the moulding applies (§ 3), 




Fig. 4. 
then ^ ^ is the depth of the moulding, and a a' its 
span. If aa' represents that plan line, then a a^ is' 
the depth of the moulding, and a h is its span. Thus 
the lines a h, a a\ will be respectively depth and 



176 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

Span, or span and depth, according to which of them 
represents the surface for the moulding, and the plane 
of section will be described correspondingly. The 
working drawing for a section at an angle is that which 
shows the angle. 

(7) Producing the lines a' a and^' h indefinitely, 
lines which are perpendicular to ah by construction, 
and by the given nature of the moulding a hYi A will 
represent in plan, a piece of the moulding h g^ f e' d' 
c' b' a' . A plane of section of the moulding at any 
angle N A Q is represented by the line A Q cutting the 
indefinite lines a A and ^ H in the points A and H. 
This plane is perpendicular to the plane of the plan, 
but does not contain both its lines of span and depth. 
The plan line of a plane passing through the point A, 
and containing the lines both of span and depth, would 
be the line A Y. 

(8) To get the shape of the moulding on the plane 
of A Q. Produce the line e' f (also perpendicular to 
ah by the given nature of the moulding), cutting a h 
and A Q in/and F respectively, and from the point d' 
draw a line parallel to the line just drawn, cutting a h 
and A Q in ^and D respectively. Y'ix d' a' , the curved 
part of the moulding, take any points c\b' , and from 
these points draw lines c' C, and b' B, parallel to <^'A, 
cutting a h\n c and ^, and A Q in C and B, respectively. 
From A, B, C, D, F, and H, draw lines perpendicular 
to A H, and A A', B B\ C C, D D', F E\ F F', and 
H G' equal respectively to aa' , b b' , c c\ dd\fe\ff\ 
^.nd hg\ Join G'F' and E'D' by straight lines, and 
D'C'B'A' by an unbroken curved line; the line 
HG'F'E'DX'B'A' will be shape required of the 
moulding on the plane of section A O. This shape is 
often useful as a template. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



177 



To draw the pattern for the shape. Draw (Fig. 5) 
any line ah, and from a point a in it set off distances 
ab,b c, c d, de, ef.fg, d.n^ gh, respectively equal to the 
distances a' b' ,b' c\ c' d' , d' e\ e'f,fg\dindg'h (Fig. 
4). Through a draw a line perpendicular to ah\ make 
a A equal to a A (Fig. 4), and from A draw a line 
parallel to ah terminating at a point Y in an indefinite 
line drawn from h perpendicular to a h. Through b, c, 
d, e,fy and^, draw indefinite lines bB, cC, dT>, ^E,/F, 
and^G perpendicular to ah and cutting the line A Y, 
then the rectangle a AY h, with its guide lines between 




a A and h Y parallel to those lines, is the pattern of the 
length of moulding (see last problem) aAYh (Fig. 4). 
On ^ B, ^ C, and dT>, set off distances ^ B, <; C, and d D, 
equal respectively to <5 B, ^ C, and dD { Fig. 4) ; on ^ E 
and/F distances ^E and/F each equal to/F (Fig. 4) 
(the points e' and/' coinciding with each other in plan 
of the moulding), and on gG, and A H distances gG 
and AH, each equal to hG (Fig. 4) (the points;^' and 
h' coinciding with each other in plan of the moulding). 
Through the points A, B, C, D, draw an unbroken 
curved line, and join D E, E F, F G, and G H by 



178 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

Straight lines. Then ABCDEFGH will be the 
pattern required. 

(9) The pattern for the piece of moulding cut at 
the angle N A Q (Fig. 4) is also found; it is ^z A H /^ of 
( Fig. 4) ; which pattern, if bent up to the lines dD.eK, 
/F, and £- G, and rounded up between the lines a A and 
dDy will form the moulding required. 

(10) In respect to the curve A B C D the caution 
given in the last problem should be borne in mind. In 
choosing division points on curves of mouldings, from 
which, by means of lines to find points for any required 
section, the workman must be guided by the length and 
style of a curve. Lines from angular points of a shape 
such as h, g\f , e\ and d' , must always be drawn, as 
these not only give the angular points in the required 
section, but are lines on which the pattern of a piece of 
moulding must be angled up to form the moulding. 

The pattern piece of a moulding may be made of 
any desired length. Length is obtained by simply 
producing the lines A a, B d, C c^ T) d, F. e, F f, G g-, 
and H k. If length is not required, but the mitre-line 
end only of the pattern, this could be found by taking 
measurements from the line A Y (Fig. 4) instead of a 
h\ the pattern thus obtained would beABCDEFG 
HY(Fig. 5). 

(11) What has been done in this first Case should 
be noted by the student. The angular points of the 
moulding, and other chosen points are projected on to 
one of the lines, ^z/r(Fig. 11) on which the shape is 
drawn, and thence on to the line in which the moulding 
is cut. The plane of the cut, whatever its angle, being 
perpendicular to the surface to which the moulding is 
applied, span lengths are not affected, but remain un- 
altered. Depth lengths, however, such as g'f^e'd^ 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 1 79 

(Fig, 4), and the perpendicular length from d' to the 
line a a^ are altered, and the true lengths that these 
become in the shape of the moulding in the plane of 
the cut appears in the line H A as H F, F D, and D A 
respectively. 

Converse Problem — T/ie section of a moulding at any angle 
being given^ to draw the shape of the moulding. 

Let A D'E'F'G'H (Fig. 4) be section of a mould- 
ing N A H >^ cut at the angle NAQ. Divide A'D' 
into any number of equal parts, here three, in the 
points B' and C, and from the points A', B', C, D', 
and E' draw lines perpendicular to A Q, cutting that 
line in the points A, B, C, D, and F. The point F' is, 
by the nature of the section, a point in E' F; and the 
line G' H is already perpendicular to A Q. From any 
point ^ in N A draw a h perpendicular to N A, cutting 
H h in h, and from B, C, D, and F draw lines parallel 
to N A, cutting a h'lnb, c, d and/ From ^ on A N 
set off a a ' equal A A ' ; from <5, <; and d set off b b\ c 
c\ 3.nd d d' respectively equal to B B', C C\ and D 
D'; from/set off//' and/^' respectively equal to F 
F' and F E'; and from k set off k g- equal to H G'. 
Join a^ to d\ through b' and c\ by an unbroken 
curved line, and join <^' e' and/^'. Then a' b' c' d' e' 
f g' h will be the shape required. 

Problem III. 

The shape of a moulding being given, to draw the pattern for 
joining two pieces of it at any angle. 

Let h g' e' d' a' (Fig. 4), drawn on the lines a h, a 
a\ be the given shape of the moulding, and KAN the 
angle at which the two pieces of it are to meet. Bisect 
the angle KAN, then A Q is the direction of 
the mitre line, and the two pieces are represented by 



l80 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

K A H and ^ A H /i. As there is the same section or 
cut on each piece, the problem now becomes that of 
drawing the pattern for the piece' of moulding, say a A 
H h, cut at the angle A H ^. This is done by means 
of the problem preceding. 

(12) A method used in practice for finding the line 
A Q, that is for bisecting the angle K A N, is to set 
off from A equal distances along A K and A N, to join 
the points thus found by a straight line, and then by 
means of a square applied to this line to draw a line 
perpendicular to (square with it) and passing through 
the point A. This is a perfectly correct procedure. 

Problem IV. 

To draw the pattern for an aquarium {or other) base formed of a 
moulding of one and the same design. 

Let A'B'C'D' (Fig. 7) be the plan of the inside 
edge of the aquarium (or other) base, and E F (Fig. 
6), the shape of the moulding, drawn on the lines G F 
and G E; G E representing the surface on which the 
aquarium stands. Bisect each of the angles of the plan 
by the lines A'A, B'B, CX, D'D. Through either of 
the angular points, here D\ draw a line perpendicular 
to A' D'; and on it set off D/ equal to G E (Fig. 6). 
Through f draw a line parallel to A'D', and in- 
tersecting A' A and D'D in A and D respectively. 
Through D and A draw lines parallel to D' C, and in- 
tersecting C'C and B'B in C and B, and join C B. 
Then A B C D will be the plan of the outer edge of the 
aquarium stand or other base, and A 'A, B'B, C'C, and 
D'D, the plans of the mitre joints (§ 6). 

If the plans of the outside edge of the aquarium (or 
Other) base be given or first drawn, as A B C D, the 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. l8l 

plan of the inside edge will be thus found. Bisect, 
first of all, the angles A, B, C and D. Next draw a line 
(not shown in the Fig.) perpendicular to one of the 
edges, say A D, on its inner side, from any point in it 
(the line/' D' is such a line, if/' be regarded as not a 
particular point in A D but as any point in it); on this 
line setoff a distance equal to E G (Fig. 6), and through 
the extreme point of this draw a line parallel to A D, 
intersecting the bisecting lines of the angles at D and 
A in the points D' and A'. Through D' and A' draw 
lines parallel to D C, intersecting the bisecting lines of 
the angles C and B in the points C and B' and join 
C B'. Then A' B' C D' is the plan of the inner 
edge ot the stand. 




Fig. 6. 

The problem is now essentially completed, and is 
simply that of drawing the pattern for the E F (Fig. 6) 
moulding on either mitre plane, which is done by Prob- 
lem III. It will be a help to the student, however, to 
work the problem in detail right through. We already 
have the line D' /' if the inner edge was first drawn; if 
the outer edge was first drawn, let fall now from D' a 
line perpendicular to A D, meeting this line in/; then 
D'/, being parallel to the line, not shown, drawn per- 
pendicular to A D on which the distance E G was set 
off, will be itself equal to E G. Now on D' /, D' A', 



l82 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



draw/' d" the required shape of the moulding, disposed 
towards D' /' as to the surface on which the moulding 
stands; and divide it into any number of parts, equal or 
unequal (see § lo). The division is here into six equal 
parts, in the points a' ,b\ c\ d\ and ^', through which 
points draw lines i to i, 2 to 2, 3 to 3, 4 to 4, and 5 to 5 



cy 




d' 




r 



Fig. 7. 



parallel to A D, and terminating in A' A and D' D, 
and from points i, 2, 3, 4, and 5, in the line D' D draw 
lines parallel to D C and terminating in C C. 

To draw the pattern for the A' D' A D portion of 
th'^base. Draw (Fig. 8) any line K L; and from any 



r 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



183 



point D' in it set off T>' a, a b, b c, c d, a e, anid e f 
equal respectively to the distances (i" a' , a' b\b' c' , 
c' d' ,d' e\^nde' f around the curve ^' ' c' f (Fig. 7); 
and through the points T>\ a, b, c, d, e, and/ draw 
lines perpendicular to K L. Make a i equal to a I 
(Fig. 7), and ^ 2, ^ 3, ^4, ^5, and / D respectively 
equal to ^ 2, ^3,^4, ^ 5, and/ D (Fig. 7); and through 
the points D', I, 2, 3, 4, 5, and D draw an unbroken 









D' 


i 


/ 


a. 


\/ 


/ 


h 


Xs 


/ 


c 


V 


/ 


^ 


w 


/ 


\ 


\5 


/ 




\ \ 


A 




lii 


f 


K 



Fig. 8. 

curved line. Now from D' set off D' A' equal to 
D' A' (Fig. 7), and through A' draw A' M parallel to 
K L. From the points in A' M, where the lines a,b, 
c, d,e, and/ cut A' M, set off distances to the left 
of A' M corresponding to the distances /^ I, ^ 2, <^ 3, <^ 4, 
e 5, and/ D to the right of the line K L, and through 
the points there found draw an unbroken curved line. 
Then A' D' AD will be the pattern required. 



1 84 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

To draw the pattern for the D' C D C (Fig. 7) 
portion of the base. It will be at once seen from the 
plan that this differs from the A' D' AD portion, 
only in that the distance D' C is less than the distance 
A' D'; and thus that, if the lines A' M and LK 
(Fig. 8) are brought closer together, so that A' D' is 
equal to D' C (Fig. 7), the pattern so obtained will 
be the pattern required.. 

Problem V. 

To draw the pattern for an aquarium (or other) base formed 
of mouldings 7iot of one and the same design . 

The problem now before us is that of fitting to a 
given aquarium or other body, which has to stand in a 
given position, a position, that is to say, of which the 
dimensions are fixed, a base made up of mouldings. 
In the last problem there are no restrictions as to the 
dimensions of the base. 

(13) Let A' B' C D' (Fig. 9) be the plan of the 
aquarium or other body to which a moulding base has 
to be fitted, and A B C D the plan of the position the 
body has to stand in. Join A' A, B' B, C C, and D' 
D; these lines last drawn will be the plans of the mitre 
joints (§ 6). Looking at the plan, it is at once seen 
that the pieces of moulding on the B' A' and CD' 
sides of the body, though equal to each other, are not 
of the same dimensions as the pieces, also equal to 
each other, on theB' C, and A' D' sides. An im- 
perative condition of two pieces of moulding properly 
joining is that the sections of the pieces shall be the 
same on the mitre-plane (§ i). That is to say, that 
here, for the pieces A'D'DA, C'D'DCto prop- 
erly join notwithstanding the difference of their di- 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



i8s 



mensions, their sections on the mitre plane of D' D 
must be the same. When two pieces to be joined are 
of one and the same design, this condition of same 
section on the mitre-plane is fulfilled when the mitre 
line bisects in plan the angle that the pieces of mould- 
ing, as joined, make with one another (§ i). That 
condition has now to be fulfilled when, the two pieces 
being unequal in dimensions, the mitre does not in plan 




bisect the ang'e made with each other by the pieces; 
the line D' D, for example, does not bisect the angle 
A' D' Q\ 

The shape for one of the mouldings may be given or 
chosen; let it be, say, that for the moulding piece DX' 
C D, or the piece B' A' A B, which is equal to it; and 
let that shape be g e' c' a\ drawn on the lines T>' g (a 
continuation of the line A' D'), and D'^' part of D' 
C ' ). Regarding D ' g as the line of span of the mould- 
ing, \)' a' is the line of its depth, that is, of the distance 



1 86 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



the moulding reaches up on the side of the aquarium or 
other body. The depth of all four pieces of moulding 
round the body is the same; it is not affected by the 
want of correspondence between the plan A'BX'D' 
and the plan A B C D. From C ' on C ^ B ' set off this 
depth, C a\ equal to D^^' and draw C'^ perpendicular 
to C'B' and meeting the plan line B C of the outer 
edge of the piece of moulding BX' CB in a pointy. 
The line Q' g then is the span of this moulding, and we 
shall now be able to draw on the lines C^^, C a, the 
shape for it. 



C D' 


/ 


b 


\ 


/ 


c 


V 


/ 


A 


V 


/ 


e. 


V 


/ 


f 


V 


/ 




Y 


C J 


1 i 


i D 



Fig. 10. 

Divide ^^V^', the chosen shape for the moulding 
DX' CD, into any number of parts, here six, equal or 
unequal, in the points ^', ^', <^', ^',/'. Through these 
points draw lines parallel to C D, terminating in the 
mitre plan, lines C ' C and D ' D, and cutting D ^g- in d, c, 
d, Cy and/; the drawn lines being the lines i to i, 2 to 2, 
3 to 3, 4 to 4, and 5 to 5. From the points i, 2, 3, 4, and 
5 on the line CX draw lines parallel to B C, terminat- 
ing B'B, and cutting C g in b, c,d, e, and / From 
these last points b, c, d, e^ and/ set off distances bb' ^ 
cc\ dd\ e e' y diVid ff\ respectively equal to the 
distances of same letters from the line T>'g, and 
through the points a' (on C'B' ), b\ c' , d\ e' ,f ^ and 



~- 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



i§7 



^ on C B draw an unbroken curved line; this line will be 
the shape for the moulding B'C C B. 

Having the shapes of each of the mouldings, to draw 
the patterns for the pieces. First that for the D X X D 
pieces. Draw (Fig. lo) any line D'^, and from the 
point D' set off distances T>' by bc.cd, de, ef, and/^, 
equal respectively to the distances ^'/^^ b' c\ c' d' ^ d' e\ 
e'f\ and/'^' of the shape drawn on the lines T>'g, D^a 
(Fig. 9) and through the points D\ ^ Cy dy Cyfy and^ 
draw lines perpendicular to T>' g. Make g D equal to 
gV> (Fig. 9), and make/5, ^4» ^3» c2yb\ respectively 
equal to /5, ^ 4, ^ 3, ^ 2, and b i from the line D '^ ( Fig. 



B' 



C 



z 


h 


>k I 


n 


c. 


V 


/ 


A 




y 


e 


V 
>v4 


/ 


f 


X*^ 


i 


\ 



B h ^ C 

Fig. II. 

9); and from the point D' through the points i, 2, 3, 4, 
5 to D draw an unbroken curved line. Now make gj 
equal to gj\ (Fig. 9) and through/ draw/ C parallel 
to ^D'. Set offyC equal to^D' and then obtain 
points for and draw the curve C ' C exactly as with the 
curve D' 3 D, the two curves being alike. The pattern 
required will be C^D'D C. 

To draw the pattern for the B' C C B (Fig. 9) 
piece of moulding. Draw (Fig. 11) any line C gy and 
from the point C set off distances Q' byb Cy c dy d Cy 
e fy and f gy equal respectively to the distances a' b' y 
b' c' y c' d' y d' e' / and/ g of the shape drawn on the 
lines C gy Q' a' (Fig. 9), and from the points C byC^ 



l88 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

d, e,fy and^ draw lines perpendicular to C' g. Make 
g C equal \.o g C (Fig. 9) and make/ 5, ^ 4, ^ 3, ^ 2, ^ i 
respectively equal to /5, ^ 4, <^ 3, <: 2, and b i from the 
line C g (Fig. 9); and from the point C through the 
points I, 2, 3, 4, 5, to C draw an unbroken curved line. 
Now make^^ equal to g k (Fig. 9), and through k 
draw k B' parallel to C^ g. Set off ^ B equal to^ C, 
and then obtain points for and draw the curve B' B 
exactly as with the curve C 3 C; or copy the curve B' 
B from the curve C 3 C, the two curve lines being 
alike. The pattern B' C C B will be the pattern re- 
quired. 

The section or shape of either piece of moulding at 
the mitre plane is obtained as in Problem II, by draw- 
ing (Fig. 9) through the points D^ and i, 2, 3, 4, 5 on 
the line D' D, lines perpendicular to that line, and 
making D' D\ 11', 22', 33', 44', and 55', equal re- 
spectively to D' a\ d b\ c c' , dd\ e e\ and //', and 
drawing from the point D" through the extremities of 
these lines 11', 22', 33', 44', and 55' to D an unbroken 
curved line. This section, however, is not needed for 
the problem. 

Problem VI. 

To draw the pattern for an i7ic lined {raking) moulding, to mitre 
or join with a given horizontal moulding. 

(14) This is the case closely allied to Problem II, 
being that of section of a moulding by a mitre plane 
which contains neither the line of depth of the mould- 
ing, nor the line of its span. It is easy to work because 
the mitre plane, so far as the given horizontal mould- 
ing is concerned, contains both of those lines. The 
case is not one, the student must notice, of joining two 
pieces of moulding of the same shape at any angle, one 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



189 



of the pieces being inclined, but of so fitting to one 
shape of moulding a moulding of another shape that the 
plane of their junction shall contain the line of inter- 
section of the two surfaces to which the mouldings are 
to apply. As a typical instance of the problem, sup- 




Fig. 12. 

pose the mouldings to be gutters, fitting say on a dor- 
mer window, or some part of a roof where one gutter is 
inclined and the other horizontal. The walls or sur- 
faces (see Fig. 12) to which the mouldings fit are in this 
instance assumed to be perpendicular to each other, 
they may however be at any angle; this does not affect 



IQO WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

the work of the problem. The plane of junction of 
the mouldings, however, must contain the line of junction 
of the surfaces of the walls. 

l^Qtf,e\d\c\b\ a (Fig. 13) drawn on the lines 
A' /', A' ^ be the given shape of the horizontal 
moulding, the lines A' a being part of elevation line of 
the surface to which the horizontal moulding applies; 
it may in fact be regarded as representing the line of 
junction of the two flat faces or surfaces of the walls to 
which the mouldings are to fit. The shape given is not 
chosen as a good one for a gutter only, but rather as a 
useful shape to illustrate principles. Hence also the 
term mouldings is employed instead of gutters, all gut- 
ters being mouldings (§ 5). Perpendicular to A' a 
draw any line X X, produce A' a indefinitely, as ^z N 

A, and from any point A' in the produced line draw 
A K at an angle in plan equal to that at which the two 
pieces of moulding are to meet, now a square or right 
an^gle as above stated. Bisect the angle K A N by a 
line A Q, through f draw /' M F perpendicular to 
X X, and intersecting A Q in F, and let M be the point 
in/' F in which a line from any point N in A' A and 
perpendicular to it cuts /' F, and through F draw a 
line parallel to A K. Next choose division points in 
the curve d' a as most convenient (§ 10), the points 
here taken being c' and b' ; from the-points b' c\ and 
d' draw lines, each perpendicular to X X, to meet the 
line A Q, the lines namely ^'B,<:' C, ^' D, and through 

B, C, and D draw lines parallel to K A. Then N M F 
A will be the plan ot the horizontal moulding, and F 
K A that of the inclined moulding, and A F the plan 
of the mitre joint (§ 6). To draw the elevation of 
the inclined or raking moulding. From A' draw A' 
P at an angle to X X equal to the inclination of the 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



191 



L F 




Fig. 13- 



192 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

moulding, and from the points / e\ and d' (§ 10), 
c\ b\ and a\ draw lines parallel to A' P, the/ L a (L 
being a point in the line drawn from/' ) is the elevation 
required. 

To draw the shape of the raking moulding. From 
any point A" in the line from a parallel to A' P draw 
a line perpendicular to a h.\ meeting/' L in 4" and 
cutting the lines drawn parallel to A' P from e\d\ c\ 
and b' in the points respectively 4', 3', 2'. and i', and 
continue the line K A to cut the lines b' B, c'C^ d' D, 
and /'F in the points respectively i, 2, 3, and 4. As 
the inclination of the moulding does not affect span 
dimensions, set off i' B'^ equal to i B, 2' C" equal 
to 2C, 3' D' equal to 3 D, and 4' E% 4" F" each 
equal to 4 F, the points f and e' coinciding with each 
other, in the point F, in plan. Joining the points F'', 
E\ D\ C", B", A' as shown, gives the shape for 
the inclined moulding, the shape that will mitre ac- 
curately in mitre plan A Q with the horizontal mould- 
ing. 

To draw the pattern for the horizontal moulding 
N M F A. This is done by Problem III; in detail it is 
as follows: — Draw (Fig. 14) any line A/', and from 
A set off distances A b' b' c\ c' d' , d^ e\ and e' f re- 
spectively equal to ab\b' c\ c^ d\ d' ^',and^' f 
(Fig. 13), and through the points A, b\ c\ d\ ^',and 
f\ draw lines perpendicular to A/'. Make/' F, and 
e' E each equal to 4 F (Fig. 13), and d' D, c' C, b' B, 
equal respectively to 3 D,2C,and i B (Fig. 13). From 
A through the points B, C, and D draw an unbroken 
curved line, and join D E, E F. Then A B C D E F is 
the pattern required. The line N M corresponding to 
the line N M from any point N in A A' (Fig. 13) is 
drawn to indicate that the moulding may be of any 
length. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



193 



To draw the pattern for the inclined moulding F 
K A. Draw (Fig. 15) any line A'' 4/ and from A" set 
off A^' i', i' 2', 2' 3', 3' 4', 4' 4" equal respectively 
to A'' B\ B" C\ C" D\ D" E\ E" F\ (Fig. 13), and 
through the points A'', i', 2', 3', 4', and 4'', draw lines 



N 



r/ 


b' 


1 


c/ 


c» 


^ 


p/ 


d' 






e' 






f 





M 



Fig. 14- 



A" 



ZL 



a!_ 




4." 

Fig. 15. 

perpendicular to A'' 4", Make A' a equal to A" a 
(Fig. 13), and i' d\ 2' c\ 3' d\ 4' ^', and 4" f re- 
spectively equal to i' d\ 2' c\ 3' d\ 4' e^ and 4" f 
(Fig- 13)- Through the <^, b\c' ,d\ draw an unbroken 
curved line, and join d' e\ e' f ; then a b' c' d' e* f 
is the pattern required, 



194 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

In the instance where the mouldings form a gutter 
a straight piece equal in depth to a A' (Fig. 13) is 
necessary, with the horizontal moulding, to form a 
back to the gutter to fit against the wall (see Fig. 12). 
To the raking gutter also a back piece is required (see 
Fig. 12). The *'wall-line/' against which thetop of the 
gutter would have to fit, is A' P. The straight piece 
for the back would therefore be equal in depth to P' 
A'' (Fig. 13), P' being the point of intersection of A^ 
P with A'' 4" . The highest point at the back of the 
gutter is P\ the highest point in front is F''; the line 
F'' P' is drawn to make this clear; and the workman 
in drawing the pattern must be careful not to use the 
line A' P except as it has been used in the working of 
the problem. 

Although not needed it will be useful to show how 
to obtain the mitre section of the mouldings at A F 
(Fig. 13). Draw through point a a line ^/perpen- 
dicular to A' a, cutting b' B, c' C, d' D, and e' Fin 
the points b, c, dy and/ Through A, B, C, D, and F 
draw lines perpendicular to A F, and set off distances 
FF', Fpy, DD', CC, BB\ equal respectively to 
ff Je\dd' ,cc' , ^ndbb'. Join F' E', E' D', ana 
from D' through C and B' to A draw an unbroken 
curve; the section sought isF'E'D'C'B'A'. The 
lines AG and G F' represent the lines of depth and 
span of the horizontal moulding on the plane of junc- 
tion of the walls or surfaces to which the gutter fixes. 

Problem VIL 
To draw the pattern for a lobster-back cowL 

Draw an indefinite line A O (Fig. 16), and from any 
point O in it draw a perpendicular O T. With O as 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



195 



centre and radius equal to the diameter of cowl re- 
quired, describe an arc A A' T, cutting O T in T. Pro- 
duce O T downwards, and make O O equal to the depth 
of the rim required; through Q draw Q P, parallel to 
A O, and from A draw A P perpendicular to A O and 
cutting QPinP; AOOPis the elevation of the rim. 
To draw the hood T S R O, draw T S perpendicular to 




Fig. 16. 

O T, make T S and O R of the required dimensions tai- 
the hood, and join S R. This completes the elevation 
P A' S R O Q of the cowl. Now divide the arc A T 
into the same number of equal parts that the shell of 
the lobster-back is to have segments. Here we take 
the number of segments as three; A' and G are the 
points of division of the arc. Joining these points to 



196 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



O we have in G O T, A' O G, and A O A' the eleva 
tions of the segments of the shell. 

To draw the pattern for the segments. 

On either of the lines A O, A' O, G O, T O describe 
a semi-circle, it is here described on A O, and divide it 





into any convenient number of equal parts, here six, in 
the points by Cy d, e, and f. Through b^ c, d^ e^ and / 
draw lines perpendicular to A O, and cutting it in 
points B, C, D, E, and F respectively. With O as 
centre and radii O B, O C, O D, O E, and O F success- 



WORKSHOP MANUAL* I97 

ively, describe arcs BB' H, CC K',DD^ L, EE' M, 
and FF' N, cutting A' Gin the points B',C', D', E', 
and F' respectively, andT O in the points H, K, L, M, 
and N respectively. We now find the pattern for the 
segment A O A' ; the pattern for that segment, the seg- 
ments being all equal, will be the pattern for all. 

Bisect the arc A A' in >^ and join k O. Join A A', 
B B', C C\ D D\ E E', and F F by straight lines, 
cutting /^ O in points a\ d\ c\ d\ e\ a,nd /', respec- 
tively. Next draw an indefinite line <«' O (Fig. 17), and 
on it set off a' b' , b' c\ c' d\ d' e\ e' /, and/ O, 
each equal to Kb (Fig. i), one of the equal parts into 
which the semicircle A <3^ O is divided, and through each 
of the points a\ b\ c' , d\ ^', and/', draw lines per- 
pendicular to ^' O. Make a' K\b' B', c' C\ d' T>\ 
e' E', and/' F' respectively equal to a' A', b' B\ c' 
C, d' D', e' E', and/ F' (Fig. 16); also make a' A, 
b' B, ^' Q, d' T>, e' E' and/ F respectively equal to 
a' K\b' ^' ,c' C\d' D,e' E,and/ F (Fig. 16). Join 
A, B, C, D, E, F, and O, and also A', B', C, D', E\ 
F', and O by unbroken curved lines, then A O A will 
be half the pattern required, which can be completed 
by drawing A A' a figure exactly the same as A O A'. 

To draw the pattern for the hood T S R O. 

Draw (Fig. 18) an indefinite line T O, and on it set 
off T H, H K, K L, L, M, M N, and N O, each equal to 
A b (Fig. 16), one of the equal parts of semi-circle A d 
O. Through each of the points T, H, K, L, M, N, and 
O draw lines perpendicular to TO; and make T S, H 
H', K K', L D', M M', N N' and O R respectively 
equal to T S, H H', K K', L L', M IVI', N N', and O R 
(Fig. 16). Join S,H', K', L', M',N',and R by an 
unbroken curved line; TS R O will be the pattern for 
one-half of the hood; duplicating this on the line T S 
will complete the pattern. 



198 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

If closer approximation is necessary the lines a' O 
(Fig. 17) and T O (Fig. 18) should each of them be 
made equal to half the circumference of a circle having 
A O (Fig. 10) for its diameter, and then divided into as 
many equal parts as semi circle A dO (Fig. 16) is di- 
vided into. In practice, for convenience in making up, 
it is necessary to cut off the point O (Fig. 17) of the 
pattern. How much shall be cut off must be left to the 
experience of the workman; it varies according to the 
size of the **boss" used to cover the throat. Also, in 
practice, to ensure neatness of fitting, the rim at O 
(Fig. 16) is notched out a little. This, again, is a mat- 
ter in which experience must be the workman's guide. 

The rim being cylindrical, its pattern needs no de- 
scription beyond saying that it is a rectangle, one side 
of which is equal to the depth of the rim, and the other 
sides equal to the circumference of a circle having A O 
for its diameter. 

Note. — In practice the usual sizes of rim A O Q P 
and hood T S R O are as follows: 

Size of Hood at Widest and 
Diameter of Cowl. Depth of Rim. Narrowest Parts. 

8 inches 2 inches 4 inches and i inch. 

9 " 2% « 4>^ " 1% "^ 

10 « 2% « 41^ " iX " 

11 " 2U " 5 " iK " 

12 " 3 " S'A " iH " 

Problem VIII. 
Pattern for a tapering circular bend. 

The method here given is approximate, as indeed 
all ordinary practical methods must be for problems of 
this description. 

LetK' KB' BHH' ^' Q' (Fig. 19) represent in 
elevation the side of the ship's ventilator or fog horn. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



199 



Divide each of the curves BB'KK'andHH'QQ' 
into as many equal parts as it is determined there shall 
be segments, here say three parts, the points of division 
being B', K, and H' Q, respectively. Joining B' to 
H', and K to Q we have in B B' H' H, B' K Q H\ 
and K K' Q' Q elevations of the three segments of 




which the ventilator is to be made up; T R H B is an 
elevation of the mouthpiece of the ventilator. 

To draw the pattern for the segment B B' H' H. 

Bisect the arc B' B in ^' and H' H in /^', and join 
a' h' \ also join B' B. On /^'^' describe a semi-circles' 
e' h' and divide it into any number of equal parts — here 



200 WORKSHOP MANUAL* 

nix — in the points c' d^ e^ f and^'. From these points 
draw lines perpendicular to^'^', cutting a' h' in the 
points c^ dy e^ f and g respectively (to avoid confusion 
these lines are not shown in the figure), and through c^ 
d, e, f and g draw C C, D' D, E' E, F' F, and G' G 
parallel respectively to B^B. 

Next draw (Fig. 20) an indefinite line b h\ and set 
off on it distances b c, c d^ d e^ e f^ f g, and g h' ^ each 
equal to a' c' (Fig. 19), that is to one of the divisions of 
the semi circle a' c' h\ and through b draw B' B at 
the same angle to b h' that B' B (Fig, 19) is to b h' . 
Now through c^ d, e, f, ^ and h' (Fig. 20) draw C C, 
D' D, E' E, F' F, G^ G and H' H, parallel respec- 
tively to B' B. Make ^ B, ^ C, ^ D, ^ E, / F, ^ G, and 
h' H equal respectively to b By c C, d D, e E, /F, g G, 
and k' H (Fig. 19). Also b B', cC\dD\e E\/F', 
g" G\ and ^ ' H ' equal respectively to^B',^C',<^D', 
e E\ / F\ g G', and k' W (Fig. 19). Joining B, C, 
D, E, F, G, and H, and B', C', D', E', F\ G', and 
H' by unbroken curved lines gives in B H H' B' the 
pattern required. 

To draw the pattern for the segment K' K Q Q'. 

Bisect the arc K' K in/ and Q' Q in q\ and join / 
^'; also join K' K. On 7' q^ describe a semi-circle / 
n^ q' and divide it into any number of. equal parts — 
here six — in the points I' , m' , n' , o\ and/'. From 
these points draw lines perpendicular to j q\ cutting 
j q' in the points /, m, n, o^ and / respectively (these 
lines are not shown in the figure), and through /, m, n, 
o, and/ draw L' L, M' M, W N, O' O, and P' P, par- 
allel respectively to K' K. 

Next draw (Fig 21) an indefinite line k q' and set 
off on it distances k I, I m,mn, 71 o, o /, and / q' each 
equal to/' V (Fig. 19), that is, to one of the divisions 



Workshop manual. 



201 



of the semi-circle/ i^' ^', and through k draw K' K at 
the same angle \,o k q' that K' K (Fig. 19) is to k q' . 
Now through /, m, n^ 0, p, and q' (Fig. 21) draw L L', 
M M', N N^ O O', P P', and Q Q' parallel respec- 
tively to K K'. Make >^ K, / L, mM, /z N, ^ O, / P, 
and q Q, equal respectively to /& K, / L, m M, j^ N, o O, 





Fig. 20. 



Fig. 21. 



pP, ^'Q (Fig. 19). Alsomake^K^/L^;;^ M',/zN', 
o 0\p P', and ^^ Q' equal respectively to k K\ / L', 
;;^ M', n N', ^ O',/ P', and^' Q' (Fig. 19). Joining 
K, L, M, N, O, P, and Q, and K^ L% M\ N', 0\ P\ 
and Q' by unbroken curved lines gives in K Q Q' K' 
the pattern required. 



202 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

In practice it is found desirable to leave the ends 
H' H (Fig. 20) and Q' Q (Fig. 21) of the patterns 
full long. It is easier to cut a piece off if a pattern 
is too long than to add a piece if too short. 

The pattern for the segment KB' H' Q need not 
be drawn here. To do so would make a confusion of 
lines in the figure. It can be obtained in similar man- 
ner exactly to that by which the patterns are obtained 
of the other two segments. 

The mouthpiece of the ventilator can be stretched 
out of a disc, or can be made from a part cone and 
stretched. 



CHAPTER IX. 

SLATE. 

Strength of Building for Slate. 

It is the prevailing opinion of people not familiar 
with the use of slate for roofing purposes, that a build- 
ing should be constructed very much stronger for slate 
than for other roofing materials. This is a great mis- 
take, as any building strong enough for shingles^ tin or iron 
is strong enough for slate , iox \h^ following reasons: The 
weak points of any roof are the valleys or other breaks 
in the roof where snow drifts in and lodges, and when 
the snow melts with rain the weight at points where 
the snow has drifted is much heavier than any two slate 
roofs. It is well known that snow will not stick on a 
slate roof as it will on shingles or on a metal roof, as 
the slate being of a warmer nature causes the snow to 
melt and slide off; while with shingles or metal it 
freezes on, causing greater weight than a slate roof is 
ever called on to bear. Two by six rafters, eighteen 
feet long, two feet from centers, gives a roof all the 
strength necessary for a slate roof. The writer has 
seen hundreds of houses roofed with slate where the 
rafters were two by four, two feet from centers, sixteen 
feet long, with collar beam nailed across one-third of 
the way down from the top. 



204 workshop manual. 

Pitch of Roofs. 

Slate can be depended upon to make a roof perfectly 
water tight on any pitch down to one-fifth. Half pitch 
or steeper makes the best roof both for looks and 




The above shows the different pitch of roofs on which slate is usually 
laid. Slate should uot be laid ou a roof of less thau one-fifth pitch. 

strength, as it throws the weight on the walls more than 
the rafters, and causes the snow to slide off clean, 
thereby never overloading any one part of the roof. 

Sheathing Boards. 

Matched lumber is best for sheathing for any roof, 
surfaced boards from six inches to ten inches wide make 
a good job and are used on a large majority of the 
buildings now being put up. Sheathing boards, when 
not matched, should be nailed at bolrh edges on rafters, 
which should not be over two feet apart. Wide boards 
when used for sheathing are liable to warp and curl up 
at the edge, thus affecting the slate. While it rnay not 
break the slate it raises the courses, marring the appear- 
ance of the roof. Very often a roof that lays well and 
smooth when done apparently gets rough and the slates 
stick up. The roofer is often blamed for this when the 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 20$ 

cause is really in the sheathing. Great care should be 
used in putting on sheathing that there are no lump^ 
or uneven thicknesses in the boards, as they will surely 
show after the slate is put on. This especially applies 
on curved roofs or round towers, dormers, etc. In aL 
such, the rafters should be close together and the sheath- 
ing perfectly solid and smooth. Where the sheathing 
is not solici it is almost impossible to make a good 
smooth job, for the reason that in driving one nail it 
jars the next slate loose. Laths or strips are often used 
instead of sheathing boards on which to lay slate, but 
in such case the lath should be at least one and one- 
quarter by two and one-half inches, and must be spaced 
to suit the size of the slate used. They should be placed 
so that the upper end of each slate will rest in the cen- 
ter of the lath. This plan is a good one for barn roofs, 
as it allows some ventilation between the slate; but 
where a perfectly snow-tight roof is wanted, the slate 
should be pointed with hair mortar on the underside 
of the slate at the upper end of each course, also the 
joints between the slate. Tarred or other water- 
proofed paper should be used under slate where the 
same is laid on sheathing boards. This will insure a 
roof perfectly tight against fine snow. 

Comparative Size and Strength of Slate. 

A wide and short slate makes the strongest and 
best roof, and looks much better than the long narrow 
slate after one is accustomed to the appearance of 
roofs finished in this style. Slate lo X 14 is 40 per 
cent, stronger than that 7 X 14; 12 X 16 is 50 per cent, 
stronger than 8 X 16; 10 X 16 is 25 per cent, stronger 
than 8 X 16; 12 X 18 is 33 per cent, stronger than 



206 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

g X i8, and the same applies to other sizes both larger 
and smaller. The above sizes refer more particularly 
to dwellings, and the figures are based on facts which 
you can easily demonstrate by actual test. By the use 
of the above sizes the actual strength and wear of a 
roof can be increased from 25 to 33 per cent., while 
the cost is no more. The above should be thoroughly 
impressed upon all who intend using slate or going 
into the business. For barns, shops and other large 
buildings 14 X 24, 14 X 22 and 14 X 20 make the best; 
12 X 24, II X 22 and 12 X 22 make a fine roof. As is 
well known, the best material in the quarry is split and 
worked into the larger sized slate; the latter also takes 
less nails and can be put on much faster than the 
smaller sizes. About four-fifths of all the slate speci- 
fied by architects are either 8 X 16, 9 X 18 or 10 X 20; 
while not much more than one-tenth of all the slate 
made is cut to these sizes. This being the case, it is 
evident that a great many must use slate of a size 
different from that called for in the specifications. 

There is always a scarcity of medium sizes. The 
smaller the slate the more nails and time required to 
lay them on the roof, and the more small pieces are 
needed on hips and valleys. In quarrying and making 
the slate the rock is blasted out in large blocks, then 
broken and split up into blocks to as near the size of 
the slate as possible, then split with thin chisels and 
mallet to the thickness of the slate, then dressed square 
on a machine, each splitter and dresser making about 
thirty different sizes of slate, the size being regulated 
by the size of the blocks and sheets of slate split from 
the same — the dresser always trimming the piece to 
the largest size it will make. There is m great waste 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 207 

and extra expense in making any special size of slate 
in a larger quantity than the usual average. 

How Slate Roofs Are Damaged By Carelessness. 

After a roof is finished the slater should insist that 
tinners, painters, carpenters and others keep off the 
slate or lay boards or ladders to walk on, and if they 
will trample them and break the slate, they should pay 
for the repairing. It is a notorious fact that tinners, 
carpenters, painters, masons, and, worst of all, lightning- 
rod men, damage slate roofs more before the building 
is finished than will ten years' wear. This can only be 
stopped by the slaters insisting on their rights and not 
allowing themselves to be robbed by coming back and 
repairing a roof three or four times after the slate has 
been trampled up and broken by careless workmen. 

Ornamental Slate. 

Slate of one color with cut belts is very much used. 

The old style of red, green, black and purple spots 
and stripes is fast going out of date, as it should. A 
gaudy striped and spotted roof may attract the eye 
when new, but a plain, neat roof of all one color, or not 
more than two colors, always looks well. Black and 
green make the best contrast where more than one 
color is used. They should be run in belts, either 
through the center of roof or a belt at top and bottom. 
The less gaudy figures put in the better the roof will 
look. It is much less difficult to get at the amount of 
slate necessary to ornament a roof if belts are used in- 
stead of figures. 

The cust<jm which prevailed several years a^o. 



208 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

of using gaudy ornaments of different colored slate, 
has entirely changed and it is now very seldom that 
even two colors of slate are put on the same roof, but 
the custom of cutting the slate has increased with 
the decrease of colors. Many fine buildings now are 
roofed with all cut slate. Whole roofs of small red, 
or black slate, all cut, are very effective, and much 
used and admired by the best judges of such work. 

Cut Slate Maxe The Neatest Roof. 

It is much easier to make a smooth roof with cut 
slate, or with alternate belts of cut and plain slate, than 
with all plain. The reason of this is that the eye always 
detects a slight defect or unevenness on a plain surface 
much quicker than on broken surfaces. It is better to 
use from J^ to ^ of the slate cut to pattern for the 
best class of work. This adds little or nothing to the 
cost of the roof, as with the improved machines, now 
used by all leading roofers, the slate can be cut to 
almost any conceivable pattern. A great variety not 
shown here can be made according to the taste and 
skill of the workmen, and there is room for the display 
of a great amount of taste and judgment in laying out 
the cut slate for a roof, cut up by hips, valleys, gables, 
dormers, etc. The appearance of the whole building is 
often greatly improved by a neat, tasty arrangement of 
the cut slate in the roof. 

Piling Slate. 

It may appear, to a casual observer, of very little 
consequence how roofing slate are piled, either at the 
quarry or when hauled to the building ready for use. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



209 



It is not necessary to tell quarrymen how to pile slate 
except to caution them not to pile so high as is usually 
done, especially where room on the banks is scarce. 
The piles should in no case be more than three feet six 
inches high; if piled more than this height and allowed 




The proper way to Pile and Cover JSlsfte. 

to stand over winter there will be a heavy loss in break- 
age in the bottom rows of the piles. 

These remarks are intended more for beginners than 
for old hands, whether quarrymen or slaters, and should 
be carefully studied and followed. It is necessary to 
have a solid dry place to pile slate; then a plank or 




The imoroper way to Pile and Cover Slate. 



strips should be laid down (the first named being pref- 
erable), and there should be lath or strips between the 
piles. Where there is no wall to pile against there 
should be bulkheads built, as shown in the following cut: 
The above method of covering is intended for use in 



210 WOx<KSH0P MANUAL. 

the fall when much rain or snow is expected, to pre- 
vent the slate from freezing together, which makes it 
very disagreeable work handling, besides causing much 
waste. 

I am sorry to say this plan is the one more often 
followed than the first. This plan is very expensive in 
broken slate, the piles very often falling down or get- 
ting out of shape. The slate in a pile exert a great 
pressure in the direction of the slant at the top, and the 
more they settle the heavier the pressure. 

Selecting Slate. 

Much time can be saved in laying slate by carefully 
selecting when punching. Where there are corners off, 
thin corners or other imperfections, the slate should be 
punctured so the imperfect part will be the head of the 
slate when laid, unless the im perfection is of such a nature 
that it will damage the roof; in which case the imper- 
fect slate should be laid out to use on hips or valleys. 
The slate should be selected in two thicknesses; the 
thick slate to be laid at the eaves and the thin ones at 
top of the roof. Finishers, however, should be thick 
and all perfect slate. It is a great advantage in dress- 
ing to use a machine,as it makes a very much stronger job 
and neater hole. 

Punching Slate. 

Slate punched by hand is more liable to come loose 
than machine punched, for the reason that in punching 
by hand the slate is only supported on one side of the 
hole at the time the point of the hammer strikes the 
slate; and in consequence a large piece usually scales 
off, often leaving not more than one-half of the thick- 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



211 



ness of the slate to hold the nail. The result is the 
slate is so weak the nail head pulls through and the 
slate comes off. See the following cuts showing both 
hand and machine punched slate. 

Machine Punched Slate. 

The following cut shows a section through the slate 
at nail hole when punched with machine. It can read- 
ily be seen that this form of nail hole gives the greatest 
possible strength to the slate and the least possible 
chance for the nail pulling through, while the slate 




^Machine Punched siatc. 



punched by hand are greatly weakened, as nearly every 
slate is scaled off around the hole, reducing the slate 
nearly, if not one-half its thickness. This is the prin- 
cipal cause of so much repairing being required on 
roofs put on before the introduction of machines for 
punching. 

The following cut shows a section through the 
nail hole in hand punched slate. A comparison of the 
above cuts will quickly convince any man with rea- 
sonable judgment which method is preferable, and that 
as a matter of economy and durability the first is far 
in advance of the latter. 



212 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 




aaod Puoched Slate. 




Nails Driven too Tight. 




|JaiU 90t priveo I^ar Enough. 



workshop manual. 213 

Nailing. 

Nails driven too tight produce the effect shown in 
the above cut and should be carefully avoided by 
slaters; this applies more particularly to slate punched 
by hand, as the slate does not have much strength to 
hold the nail and consequently pulls through and al- 
lows the slate to slide out. 

Nails not driven far enough are nearly as bad and 
produce the effect seen in the above cut; while it does 
not allow the slate to slide off, it punches holes through 
the slate above the nail; this is caused by the weight 
of the bracket or by walking^ on the roof; nails should 
be driven down until the head is level with top surface 
of the slate but not tight enough to draw or spring the 
slate. 

Slating Nails. 

During the last few years there has been a change 
in this line from cut nails to wire nails. The principal 
reason for this has been the poor quality of the cut 
nails, nearly all makers producing clumsy, heavy nails 
with thick, ragged heads, while the wire nail is gener- 
ally clean cut, well made, with countersunk head. A 
clean, well made, cut steel nail with countersunk head 
is better than wire nails for the purpose of laying slate, 
for the reason that it is almost impossible to cut or 
break a wire nail in repairing, while a cut nail readily 
breaks or cuts with the ripper, making it much easier 
to repair. Another advantage in cut nails is that it re- 
quires more force to start a cut nail than a wire, al- 
though the wire nails hold more after starting to pull 
than the cut. Both make a good job. Galvanized or 
tinned nails are less liable to rust. Either cut steel or 
steel wire nails rust much less than iron nails. Copper 



214 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

nails are often used on fine work, but they cost much 
more and pull out of the sheathing very much easier 
than steel. 3 d nails are large enough for all sizes of 
slate up to and including 20 inches; unless the slate are 
extra thick above 20 inches 4 d should be used. 

Measuring Roofs. 

It is very essential that a slater should be able to 
understand and measure architects' drawings, as many 
of the largest and best jobs of slate roofing are let by 
contract from the architect's office. The greatest 
advantage derived by the slater, in being able to 
measure drawings, is the fact that his competitor does 
not know every job he bids on; just how much per 
square he figures at, as the variation in prices may be 
caused by measure and not price. Where the competi- 
tion bidding is all by the square, the result is generally 
to run the price down gradually but surely until there is 
no profit, and often an actual loss in many of the jobs 
done. Some roofers adopt the mistaken plan of not 
measuring hips and valleys extra; this is wrong, for 
while it may give a small margin of profits on a plain 
roof, at the same price per square it will cause consider- 
able actual loss on a roof badly cut up by hips and 
valleys. There is no more reason or sense in leaving 
off the measure of hips and valleys than there would be 
to leave it off the measure of the porches, as both take 
a great amount of extra time and material which the 
owner gets the benefit of, and should pay for, as he does 
for windows, doors, or any other part of his house. 

Rules For Measuring Slate Roofs. 

The following are the standard rules for measuring 
slate work. These rules are recognized and followed 



WORKSHOP iMANUAL. StJ 

by roofers, architects and engineers wherever slate 
roofing is used, and in all standard works on the sub- 
ject: 

For Plain Roof. — Measure the length of the roof 
and multiply by the length of the rafter. 

For Roof with Hips, Valleys, Gables, Dormers, 
Etc. — Measure each section through the center and 
multiply by the length of rafter; and in addition to the 
actual surface of roof measure the length of all hips and 
valleys by one foot wide, also what the first, or eave 
course, shows to the weather by the length of eaves. 
hi some localities this rule is not adhered to strictly y but hips 
a?id valleys are always measured wherever slate is used. 
The extra measure on eave course is to compensate for 
lost time in standing and laying the under-eave course, 
which does not show or count in the surface measure. 
The extra measure on hips and valleys is intended to 
compensate for extra labor and loss of material in cut- 
ting, fitting and laying same. No deduction is made 
for dormer windows, skylights, chimneys, etc., unless 
they measure more than four feet square. If more than 
four feet square and less than eight feet square, one- 
half is to be deducted. If more than eight feet square, 
deduct the whole. The reason for not deducting the 
whole of the openings is the extra work in cutting and 
fitting the slate, and putting in the flashings. Hips and 
valleys on spires are measured extra, same as above. If 
hips are mitred and flashed they should be charged for 
extra. If ridge-roll is put on it is charged extra. 
Gutters, valleys and all flashings are charged extra. 

It should always be remembered, in measuring roofs, 
that if the pitch of the roof is the same, size of building 
and projections the same, the mere fact that there are 
hips and valleys docs not add to the surface of roof. 



2l6 WORKSHOP MANUAL. 

As an example: Two buildings of the same size may 
be roofed — one with plain pitch and gable roof (this is, 
two plain sides), and the other may have four hips, 
four gables and eight valleys. If both roofs are the 
same pitch, the roofs will measure exactly the same, 
and two measures is all that is necessary in measuring 
either— that is, the length of one eave and the length 
over both rafters, except that the extra measure on hips 
and valleys would have to be added on the cut up roof. 

Layjng Slate and Felt. 

Before starting, the slater should be sure the roof is 
ready. The carpenter should put on a cant strip about 
one-quarter inch thick, nailed about two inches above 
the eave line of the slate. Carpenters often refuse to 
do this, saying it is the slater's work. This is not true. 
It is as much a part of the carpenter work as the sheath- 
ing. There should be cant boards put in behind all 
chimneys before the chimney back or gutter is put in. 
The cant board should fall to each end so that no water 
will stand in the gutter, as is the case where no cant 
board is used. This is the cause of more bad leaks on 
slate roofs than any other one thing; it is worse than 
broken slate, as the water will, where the end of a 
chimney gutter is higher than in the center, run over 
and follow along the under side of the tin to the lowest 
point, then drop off and run down, often allowing gal- 
lons of water to run into the building in a few hours. It 
is a good plan to keep small sea green slate on hand for 
under-eaves, as they are cheap and strong, making the 
very best for the purpose. When chimneys require 
braces they should be put on where practicable, so that 
the end that is fastened to the roof will be higher than 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



217 



the end fastened to the chimney; this will prevent water 
from following the iron rod down through the slate, 
but where the braces must be lower at the end next to 
the roof, then the brace should be built so that there 
will be a drip formed near the roof. 




Braces. 



The slaters should be very particular to put boards 
in the gutters, so that the metal cannot be injured by 
tramping or by pieces of slate. In nailing slate on, 
great care should be used that the nails should not be 
driven down too tight, as they will pull through, and 
on the other hand they should be driven down even 



2lB 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



with the slate, so that the nail will not punch the slate 
above when pressure is put on from above by stepping 
on the slate, or by the scaffolding. 



■ ' . 


— a • 


• 


< #1 • . 

"1 


-^f^^z^ 




-~— ~ — -"^ ~ • 








— -: 













Finishers. 



;d Course. 



2(1 Course. 

ist Course. 

Uuder- 
eaves. 



SiartiDg aud Finishiug. 

The above shows how to start and finish a roof. 
The lap is the amount the tail of the third course 
laps over the head of the first course. 



Flashing and Counter- Flashing. 
Flashing and counter-flashing should always be 
separate. The single-flashing should be laid in with 
the courses of slate, one piece under the lower end of 
the first slate or half slate intersecting any wall or 
chimney, and should be two inches longer than the 
gauge of the slate (the slate are laid to weather), and 
six or seven inches wide. Turn up square two and one- 
half to three inches. The part turned up against a 
chimney or wall should never be nailed to same, for 
the reason that the wood work of the roof will settle 
more than brick or stone work in chimneys or walls 
and cause the flashings, if nailed, to tear up the slate. 
The counter-flashings should be let into the brick or 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



219 




Head Lines on Felt. 




Flashing and Counterflashing. 



220 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



stone joints one inch, well wedged in and pointed with 
mortar. The pointing is a part of the masons' work^ 
If grooves have to be cut in the stone or brick work to 
receive counter-flashing, it is the masons' work to cut 
them. Counter-flashing is usually done by the tinner. 
If lead is used for flashing, no heavier than two and 
one-half pounds to the square foot should be used for 
the part interlapping with slate. If thicker is used it 
makes the slate lay badly. Flashing should never be 
put in in long strips, but always cut and. laid in with 
the courses. A great source of trouble and leaks is the 
manner in which chimney backs are usually put in. 



Ridge and Hip Rolls. 

Galvanized iron ridge and hip rolls make a much 
better job than slate finish, as they hold the finishers 
and pieces to hips so that wind cannot catch them. 




RidireRoU 



^Ri4^ Saddle. 



Whenever possible, a wood strip should be nailed on 
each side of hips and along comb, to nail ridging to. 
The ridging should be so shaped that it will press down 
tight on the slate when nailed on. 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 221 

Neither hips nor ridge should ever be finished with- 
out ridging, as it is inexpensive and adds so much to 
appearance and durability of the work. Ridge and hip 
rolls are always figured separate from the slate and 
charged for at so much per foot. The reason for this 
is that often a large job has very little hips or ridges, 
while often a few squares, such as spires, may have 
hundreds of feet of ridge or hip roll. 

Ridging. 

Ridge and hip rolls used on plain work should be 
put on by the slater, so that when the slate are broken 
they can be replaced, leaving the roof complete; 
another reason why the slater should put the ridging 
on is, that a slater knows where to drive a nail so as 
not to break the slate better than other mechanics who 
are not accustomed to doing such work. Two inch 
steel wire nails are the best for fastening ridgings. 
Great care is necessary in nailing on ridging not to 
drive the nails too tight, thereby cracking the slate or 
making kinks in the flange of the ridging. 

Ridging, flashing, etc., is not considered a part of a 
slate roof and is charged extra per foot, according to 
the amount of the same. 

How TO Use Several Sizes of Slate on One Roof. 

On account of the long distance that slate has to be 
shipped and the length of time it takes to get a car 
load through, it often happens that the slater may 
have slate enough for a job but not enough of one size, 
or even for one side of the roof. We have prepared the 
accompanying cut to show the nianner of using different 



222 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



sizes of slate on the same section of roof. The cut 
shows four sizes, but more can be worked the same 
way; for example: take a roof twenty feet long and 
twenty feet rafter — there are four squares — now sup- 
pose you have one square lo X i6, one square 8 X i6, 
one square lO X 14, one square 8 X 14. Start with 




Sizes of Slate. 

10 X 16, when half way across the eave run 8 X 16 the 
other half, then run up ten feet on the roof with these 
two sizes, the two sizes joining in the center; then start 
on the 10 X 16 with 10 X 14, and over the 8 X 16 lay 
8 X 14. If more than four sizes are to be used divide 
the roof into sections according to the slate to be used. 



workshop manual. 223 

Round Tower. 

In some classes of work it is necessary to also cut 
the upper end of the slate. This is called shoulder 
cutting, and makes the slate lay down much better 
than will slate with full corners. This especially ap- 
plies to slating round towers, which is now coming 
into much favor. It is really impossible to make nice 
close xob on round towers or dormers without shoulder 
cutting. In slating a round tower or dormer it is best 
to start with wide slate, lo X 12, 10 X 14 or 10 X 16 
are good for starting them. As each course narrows 
down you get up much higher. Before the slate gets 
too narrow to cover the nails below, after running up 
until the slate gets down to 3 J^ to 4 inches, it is best 
to start again with a course double the width of the 
last course, and thus have the width to narrow down 
on again, as two inches is about as narrow as it is safe 
to make the last course, and even then it is well to 
carefully double felt and lay several of the last courses 
in oil cement. 

Repairing of Slate Roofs. 

Many slaters think they have a perfect right to 
charge a ruinous price for repairing because they do it 
by the day. This class of so-called slaters never suc- 
ceed in building up a permanent business and are 
almost certain to finally bring up in the hands of the 
sheriff, no matter how prosperous they may appear at 
first. They do more damage to the slate business than 
any other one thing known. They do a poor job of 
roofing and depend on making money by repairing. In 
putting on a new roof every slate should be left whole 
and perfect, both nails should have their full hold, and 



224 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



the slater should feel that each slate is right before 
covering it up with the next. The same care should 
be used in repairing. Take out every slate that can 
possibly cause a leak, and carefully replace it. If the 
roof is steep and the slate twenty inch or larger, put in 
two nails — the upper one as close up in center joint as 
possible, the other two inches lower down. Over the 
head of the nails slip a piece of painted tin, about 
3x6 inches; bend the tin so it will bind and not slip 




Repairing a Slate Roof. 

out. Putty or cement is sometimes used for the nail 
heads, but neither is good. Leaks are often caused by 
cracks in the slate above the gauge line, so that it is 
only by close scrutiny the leak is found. Leaks are 
also caused by a rough surface on the slate near the 
head, causing the water to run across the slate. This 
is very often the case with hand punched slate, as large 
pieces are frequently scaled off, which catch the water^ 
running it in around the nail, 



Workshop manual. 22§ 

The dotted lines show the piece of tin over the nail; 
the light shaded space shows where the broken slate is 
taken out and replaced. 



Tin slipped over nail head. 

This shows the shape of the piece of tin before 
being slipped in over nail head. Putty or cement 
should never be used in repairing to cover nail head, 
as they will not last. 




Slaters' Scaffold Bracket. 

The above cut shows the method now generally 
adopted by slaters for scaffolding a roof. The scaffold 
can be made in two ways, the old way being to nail up 
a bracket at the building from pieces of board. This 
is a slow, expensive plan and often very dangerous. 
The safer and better plan is to have adjustable brackets 



2^6 Workshop* manual. 

that can be changed to any pitch or roof instantly and 
folded up when not in use. The above cuts shows a 
very convenient bracket and the plan of using the same 
on the roof. A light and convenient extension ladder 
is the most convenient way to get slate upon small 
buildings; for buildings more than two stories it is bet- 




^«cafifold Bracket Ready for Plauk. • 




Bracket Closed when not in Use* 



ter to use a rope pulley and pull the slate up to the 
gutter, using a ladder to carry the slate from the gutter 
up to the scaffold where slaters are at work. 

Spire Slating 

Is done in two different ways. The first and usual 
way being to use the carpenters' scaffold for putting 
on the slate, leaving out slate where the scaffold 
timbers come through until done; then take the scaf- 
fold down from the top, finishing the ridge and repair- 
ing as you come down. The other and more difficult 
plan is to put the slate on from a chair or swinging 
scaffold, as shown in the engraving. This is the plan 
used when there is no carpenters' scaffold. When this 
plan is used it is customars to build a small scaffold 
around the spire at the highest point that can be 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 



227 



reached from the inside through an opening. It is 
very handy to have a scaffold around the base of spire 
from which to start. 




Swuigiug Scaffold. 



228 



WORKSHOP MANUAL* 

The German Style, 



In which the slate are laid horizontal instead of verti 
cal, is often used on convex roofs, towers, etc., and 
makes a very fine appearing roof, as the slate lay down 




liiii 


iiiilili!ililll!iililliii!iiiiiiiiliilliiiliill!i!iiiliii;;i!l 




'■■- - » 


1 







German Style. 

much closer on curved roofs than if laid in the ordinary 
way. For this plan a short, wide slate works and 
looks best; 8 X lo, lO X I2, lO X 14 and similar sizes 
being preferable. The slate should lap about three 



WORKSHOP MANUAL. 229 

inches on the end and about 2 inches on the side, 
which would be at the top. One hole is punched at 
the top and one in the end, as shown in engraving 
The slate can be laid square or one corner can be cut 
as shown. Nothing but the best and strongest slate 
should be laid in this way, as a broken slate leaves the 
roof exposed. This plan is not suitable for large slate 
and when the same are used they make a very poor 
roof. 



INDKX. 



Accidents to Mechanics, Suggestions for 132 

Acre, Dimensions of 89 

Alloys i39> 1 53> 1 57-i6i 

« Fusible 158 

* Melting Temperature of 83 

" of Copper and Tin 159 

** of Copper and Zinc 159-162 

" of Tin and Lead 162 

Aluminum. Solder for 21-22 

Ancient Weights 99 

Angle of Section of the Moulding, to Draw, Having Shape 

of Mouldmg Given 174-179 

Annealing 147 

Antidotes to Poisons 131-132 

Apple, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Aquarium Pattern for 180, 184-188 

Area of Circle 99 

Area of Ellipse 100 

Area of Rectangle 100 

Areas Internal of Wrought Iron Pipe 114 

Arm, Broken Treatment of 133 

Ash, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Austrian Mile in English Miles 82 

Autogenous Soldering 157 

Babbitt Metal 9 

Ball, Metal Pattern for ^6 

Bar Brass, Weight of 104 

Bar Copper 105 

Bar, Iron Round No. Pounds per Foot 114 

Bar Iron, Weight of Foot of 103 

Barn Roofs 205 

Bar Steel, Weight of 113 

Bar Steel, Weight of Foot of 120 

Beeswax, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Bessemer Process of Making Steel 153 

Birch, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Birmingham Gauge Iron, Weight of ' 103 

Bismuth Solder 22 

Bites, Dog, Treatment of 134 

Blackening Zinc 29 

Black Solder 22 



232 INDEX. 

Black Varnish 26-27 

** « for Iron 28 

Bleeding, To Stop 132 

Blende 156 

Blue Print, Formula for p 

Board Measure go 

Boards, Sheathing 204-205 

Boiler Cover, Pattern for 52 

" ** with Circular Top 40-42 

Borax 168 

Bossing Lead 157 

Box, Grooved Seam 170 

Boxwood, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Bracket, Scaffold .* 226 

Brass 158, 159-161 

** Bar Weight of 104 

** Cut Chemically 10 

** Formula for Cleaning „ 10 

** Kettles Spun 115 

** Lacquer for 16 

* Sheet Weight of 104 

** Solder 23 

« To Tin in the Cold 26 

** Varnish for 26 

" Weight of Cubic Foot of 82 

Brazing, Cold Without Fire or Lamp 10 

" Joint 170 

Breast, Can Pattern for 52-54 

Bricklayers' Measurements 92 

Bricks, Number of in a Cubic Foot of Masonry 89 

** Number Required to Construct Any Building ']^ 

" Volume of in a Cubic Foot of Masonry 89 

Brick, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Bright Iron Work, Varnish for 27 

Brilliant Black Varnish 27 

Britannia Metal 158-161 

** Ware, Solder for Hardening 23 

« « Solder for Soft 23 

" " Raised Solder for 23 

Broken Arm, Treatment of 133 

" Collar Bone, Treatment of 134 

" Leg, Treatment of 133 

" Ribs, Treatment of 134 

** Thigh, Treatment of 133 

Bronze 158 

Bronzing for Tin 25 

Builders' Measurements 92 

Building Material, Wear of 142-143 

Buildings, Weight of 143 

Bull Metal 158 

Burns, Treatment for ... , , — , , , , , 133 



INDEX. 233 

Butternut, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Butter, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Calamiue 1 56 

" Brass 159 

Calculating: Radiating Surface 141 

Can Breast, Pattern for 52-54 

" Number of Gallons in 90 

Capacity, Carrying of a Ten Ton Freight Car 79 

** of Spun Brass Kettles 115 

Carbon in Iron 152 

Carpenters' Measurements 92 

Carrying Capacity of a Ten Ton Freight Car 79 

Castile Soap, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Casting Brass 160 

Castings, Cement for 11 

" Formulas for Enameling 10 

** Shrinkage of 141 

Cast Iron, Mendmg 11 

" Weight of Cubic Foot of 82 

« « " Square « 128 

Cause of Leaks in Slate 224 

Cedar, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Celluloid, Cement for 11 

Cement for Castings 11 

** for Celluloid 11 

" for Glass Letters 11 

" for Iron 12 

" for Joints 12 

" for Kerosene Lamps 12 

" — Metals to Glass 13 

" Rubber to Metal 13 

" Rubber to Wood ; 13 

" — Steam Fittings 13 

" Steam Pipes 13 

" Submarine 14 

" Transparent 14 

" Wood Roofing 14 

" for Zinc and Glass 15 

Chemical Method for Cutting Brass 10 

Cherry, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Chestnut, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Chimney, Prairie Pattern for 59-6o 

Chimneys, Dimensions, Wilson's Table of 115 

Chimney Top, Pattern 56-57 

Chloride of Zinc 165 

Circle, Area of 99 

" Circumference of 99 

Circular Bend, Tapering, Pattern for 198-202 

Folded Seam 168 

" Lap Seam 168 

" Measure ..,..,,,,. qz 



234 INDEX. 

Circular Tank, Volume of loo 

** Top Boiler Cover 40-42 

Circumference of Circle gg 

Cistern Measure 94 

Cities, Population of 80 

Clay, On Crystallization of Iron 148 

** Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Cleaning Brass, Formula for 10 

* Silver, Wash for 21 

Cloth, To Tin 15 

Coal, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Coating, Lead for Iron or Steel Plates 16 

" Metals, Varnish for 27 

Cold Brazing 10 

*• Soldering Without Fire or Lamp 23 

** Tinning for Brass 26 

•* " for Copper 26 

" " for Iron 26 

Collar Bone Broken, Treatment of 134 

Colored Varnish for Tin 27 

Coloring Zinc 29 

Colorless Lacquer 16 

Comparative Size of Slate 205-207 

Table of Weights 93 

Conductivity of Metals 149 

Cone, Right Volume of loi 

* Volume of Frustrum of loi 

" With Oval Base and Round Top 30-32 

Contents of Vessel loi 

Copper 155-156 

" and Tin, Alloys of 159 

" and Zinc, Alloys of 159-162 

** Gutter 105 

" Hand Rolled 155 

** Overpoling 155 

" Oxidizing 18 

" Poling 155 

« Pyrites I55 

** Sheathing, Tinned 105 

** Sheet 104 

« Solder for 23 

« To Tin in the Cold 126 

*• Tough Cake 156 

** Underpoling 155 

" Weight of Cubic Foot of • 82 

** « Square * 28 

Corn Crib, Contents of 95 

Corn, Ear, Measure for 92 

Cost of a Patent in Different Countries 140 

Cost of Public Buildings 143 

Cost Qf Tin Roofing per Square , , 1 16-1 17 



INDEX. 235 

Cotton, Pressed Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Counter-flashing- 218 

Countersunk Lap Seam 168 

Cover for Boiler with Circular Top 40 

Covering Tin for Slate Nails 225 

Cover, Pitched Pattern for 52, 54-62 

Cover for Wash Boiler, Pattern for 52 

Cowl, Lobster Back, Pattern for 194-198 

Crib, Corn, Contents of 95 

Crystalline Surface for Tin Foil 25 

Crystallization of Iron 148 

Cubic Foot of Various Substances, Weight of 82 

Cubic Measure 95 

Cubic Metric Measure 97 

Cut and Wire Nails, Relative Holding Power of 144-145 

Cut Slate 208 

Cutting Brass Chemically 10 

Damaging Slate Koofs 207 

Danish Mile in English Miles 82 

Dimensions, Inside Tables for Taking 91 

** of an Acre 89 

" of Chimneys, Wilson's Tables of 115 

Dog Bites, Treatment of 134 

Dormer Slating 223 

Double Folded Seam 169 

Drowning, What to Do in Case of 134 

Dry Metric Measure 97 

Ductility of Metals 149 

Dutch Metal 158-161 

Ear Corn Measure 92 

Earth, Loose Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Ebony, Weight of Cubic Foot of , 83 

Effect of Heat on Various Substances 84 

Elbow, Four Piece, Pattern for 70-71 

Elbows, Round Rule for 74-75 

Ellipse, Area of 100 

" Description of 63 

" Pattern for 32-35 

Enameling Castings, Formula for 10 

Engine, Stationary, Horse Power of 90 

English Mile Compared with other European Measures 82 

Equivalent of British Money in American Money 78 

Estimates of Materials '. 91 

Fainting, Treatment of 134 

Feet Laying 216 

Files Hardening 15 

Fire Grenades, Solution for 15 

Fits, Treatment of 134 

Fittings, Steam Cement for 13 

Flaring Vessel, Pattern for 50-5 1 

Flashing 218 



236 INDEX. 

Flat Seam Roofing, Cost of 117 

Flesh Wounds, Treatment of 1 34 

Fluxes Soldering- 163 

Flux, Soldering for Steel 24 

Folded Seam 168 

Foot of Flat Bar Iron, Weight of 103 

Formation of Mouldings 1 70 

Four-Piece Elbow, Pattern for 70-7 1 

Freight Car, Carrying Capacity of 7g 

Frustrum of Right Cone, Volume of loi 

Fusible Alloys 158 

Galena 157 

GallipoliOil : 168 

Galvanized Iron 154 

« Paint for 19 

" Sheet Iron Pipe, Table of Weights Per Foot of . . . 126 

" « a Net Cost and Weight of 108-113 

" " « Weight of 107 

German Silver 1 58 

« Style Roof 228 

Gilded Articles, Varnish for 28 

Given Square, To Obtain Side of Octagon of 57 

Glass and Metals, Cement for 13 

Zinc « 15 

" Letters, Cement for 11 

« Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

" Window, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Glazier's Solder 24 

Gold, Value of Ton of 82 

" Varnish 28 

" Weight of Cubic Foot of 82 

" " $1,000,000 Worth 82 

Gothic Profiles 66-68 

Grain Measure q4 

Grecian Long Measure 98 

" Mouldings 42-44 

Greenwich Mean Time 87 

Grenades, Fire, Solution for 15 

Grooved Seam 170 

Gun-Metal' 158 

« Weight of Square Foot of 128 

Gutter Copper 105 

Hammer Hardening on Iron 148 

Hand-Rolled Copper 155 

Hardening Files 15 

" Solder for Britannia Ware 23 

Hardness of Metals, How Estimated 150 

Hard Solder 158, 161-24 

Hay Measure 94 

Hay Pressed, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

lieigHt of Tank, To Find from Contents , . . 103 



» DEX. 237 

Henkel's Discovery of Zinc 156 

Hickory, Red, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

" Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Hips on Roofs, To be Measured Extra 214 

Hip Rolls 220 

Holding Power of Wire and Cut Nails 144-145 

Holidays Legal in the Various States 129-131 

Hopper, Pattern of by Triangulation 37-40 

Horse Power of a Stationary Engine go 

Impure Water, Tests Jor 138-139 

Inclined Moulding, Pattern for 188-194 

India Rubber, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Ink for Rubber Stamps 16 

Insensibility, Treatment of 134 

Inside Dimensions, Tables for Taking 91 

Interest, Method of Finding 143 

Interest Table 78 

Internal Areas of Wrought Iron Pipe 114 

Iron 151-153 

" Bar Round, No. lbs. per Foot 114 

" Bar, Weight of Foot of 103 

« Black Varnish for 28 

" Carbon in 152 

" Cast, Mending 11 

" Cement for 12 

" Coated with Zinc 154 

" Galvanized 154 

" Galvanized, Paint for 19 

" Hammer Hardening 148 

" or Steel Plates, Lead Coating for 16 

" Oxide of 152 

" Roofs, Paint for 19 

" Solder 24 

" Sheet, Measurement of 106 

" " Paint for 19 

" To Prevent from Rustmg 20 

" To Remove Rust from 20 

" To Tin in the Cold 26 

" Varnish for 28 

" Work, Bright Varn ish for 27 

" " To Preserve from Rust 19 

" " Varnish for 1 37 

Italian Marble, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Joining Two Pieces of Moulding at any Angle, 
Pattern for Shape of Moulding Bein<4' Given. 179-180 

Joint, Brazing 170 

" Zinc Roofing 170 

Joints , 168 

" Cement for 12 

" Steel Solder for 25 

Kerosene Lamps, Cement for 12 



238 INDEX. 

Kettles, Brass Spun, Weight of 115 

Killed Spirits 165 

Kilometer, In English Miles 82 

Labels, To Attach to Tin 137 

Lackawanna Coal, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Lacquer, Colorless 16 

" for Brass 16 

Lamps, Kerosene, Cement for 12 

Land Measure 91 

Lap Seam 168 

Lard, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Laying Felt 216 

Slate 216 

Lead 157 

" and Tin, Alloy of 162 

** Burning 157 

" Coating for Iron or Steel Plates 16 

" Colored Paint ig 

« Pipe, Weight of 118 

« Weight of Cubic Foot ot 82 

** Weight of Square Foot of 120 

Leaks in Slate 224 

Legal Holidays in the Various States 129-131 

Leg Broken, Treatment of 133 

Lehigh Coal, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Length, Measures of 93 

Letters, Glass, Cement for 11 

Lignum Vitse, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Linear Metric Measure 96 

Lip Measure, Pattern for 60-62 

Liquid Measure 95 

" Metric Measure 97 

Liquids, Specified Quantity of 85 

Weights of 85 

« Weight of per Gallon 84 

Lobster-Back Cowl, Pattern for 194-IQ8 

Loose Earth, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Lubricant 17 

Lustre, Metallic 146 

Machine-Punched Slate 211 

Mahogany, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Malleability I47 

" of Brass .• 160 

Manchester Plates 154 

Man, Stature of 79 

" Weight of 79 

Maple, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Marble, Italian, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Vermont, « " « 83 

Marks and Weights of Tinplates 106 

Materials, Estimate of 91 



INDEX. ^39 

Mean Greenwich Time 87 

Measure for Ear Corn 92 

« Land 91 

" Lip, Pattern for 60-62 

Measurements for Bricklayers 92 

** Builders 92 

** Carpenters 92 

Measures of Weight 95 

« " Length 93 

« « Water 93 

** Scriptural e . . 98 

Measuring Roofs 214 

" Roof with Hips, etc 214 

* Slate Roofs, Rules tor 214 

Mechanics, How to Treat in Case of Accident 132-135 

Melting Points of Metals 158-15 1 

Melting Temperature of Alloys 83 

Mending Cast Iron 11 

Mensuration, Useful Rules in 99-102 

Mercury, Weight of Cubic Foot of 82 

Metal Ball, Pattern for 76 

Metallic Lustre 146 

Metal Polish Paste 17 

Metals and Glass, Cement for 13 

Metals 146 

" Conductivity of 149 

" Ductility of 149 

** Hardness of 150 

* Melting Points of 158 

" Relative Weights of 81 

" Specific Gravity of 170 

** Table of Melting Points of 151 

« Tenacity of 148 

" Varnish for Coating 27 

« Weight of 128 

" Welding of 149 

Metal Work, Soap for 21 

Method of Describing an Ellipse 63 

Method of Finding Interest 143 

Metric Measure, Liquid 97 

Cubic 97 

* Dry 97 

" " Linear 96 

« « of Weight 97 

« System 95-98 

Mild Steel 154 

Milled Lead 157 

Mineral Statistics, U. S 84 

Mitre- Joint 170 

Moist Sand, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Mordant Varnish 29 



240 IISiDEX. 

Mortar, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Moulding, Inclined Pattern for 188-194 

Mouldings 170-194 

" Grecian 42-44 

" Roman 63-66 

Moulding, To Draw Angle of Section of Having Given the 

Shape of Moulding 174-179 

Moulding, To Draw Pattern for Joining Two Pieces of it at 

any Angle, the Shape of the Moulding being Given 179-180 

Moulding, To Draw Pattern for with Shape and Length 

Given 172-174 

Moulding, To Draw Shape of, Having Given the Section of a 

Moulding at any Angle 174-179 

Mucilage 17 

Muntz Metal 158-161 

Nails, Slating 2V^ 

Net Cost and Weight of Galvanized Sheet Iron 108-113 

Nickel Alloys. 139 

" Plate, to Remove Rust from 20 

Platii^g ' 17 

Polish.... 18 

Norwegian Mile in English Miles 82 

Number of Bricks in a Cubic Foot of Masonry 89 

" of Bricks Required to Construct any Building 77 

" of Gallons in a Can 90 

Oak, \¥hite. Weight ot Cubic Foot ot 8;^ 

Octagon, Side of 50 

" to Obtain Side of one cf any given Square 57 

Ornamental Slate 207 

Oval of any Length or Width 5^ 

" ''String and Nad" 49 

" Vessel, Tapering Pattern for 35-37 

Overpoling Copper i55 

Oxide of Iron 152 

Oxidization of Metals 14 7 

Oxidizing Copper 18 

Silver 18 

Paiot for Galvanized Iron 1 - > 

Faint for Iron Roofs 19 

" tor Sheet Iron 19 

" for Tin Roofs 19 

" Lead-Colored 19 

Paper, Tarred 205 

" Transparent 18 

Paste, Metal Polish 17 

Patent, Cost of in Different Countries MO 

Pattern for Aquarium 180, 184-188 

« Can Breast 5^-54 

** Chimney Top 5^-57 

** Circular Top Boiler Cover 40-42 

** Cone with Oval Base and Round Top 30-30 



INDEX. 241 

Pattern for Ellipse 32-35 

" Flaring Vessel 50-5 1 

" Four-Piece Elbow ; 70-71 

" Hopper by Triangulation 37-40 

" Inclined Moulding 188-194 

" Lobster Back Cowl 194- 1.98 

** Measure Lip 60-^2 

Metal Ball 76 

** Piece of Moulding 172-174 

" Pitched Cover 52-54 

« « « 62 

" Prairie Chimney 59-6o 

" Raking Moulding 188-194 

** Smoke Stack 45-49 

" Tapering Circular Bend 198-202 

" Tapering Oval Vessel 3S-37 

Tee Pipe 68-6q 

^ "" "Y" 54-55 

Pewter 162-158 

Pewterer's Soft Solder 24 

Pewter Solder 24 

Philosophers' Wool 147 

Piling Slate 208 

Pine, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Pipe, Lead, Weight of 118 

Pipes, Sheet Iron, To Prevent from Rusting 21 

" Steam, Cement for 13 

Pipe, Tee, Pattern for 68-69 

" Wrought Iron, Internal Areas of 114 

Pitched Cover Pattern 52, 54-62 

Pitch of Roofs 204 

« Pine, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Plating, Nickel 17 

Platinum Solder 24 

Weight of Cubic Foot of 82 

Plumbers' Solder 24-163 

Poisons, Antidotes to 131-132 

Poling, Copper 155 

Polish for Stoves 25 

" Metal Paste 17 

* « Nickel 18 

Poplar, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Population of The Large Cities 80 

of U.S. by States 86 

Prairie Chimney, Pattern for 59-^ 

Pressed Cotton, Weight of Cubic Foot 83 

Hay, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Print Blue, Formula for 9 

Printers Type 158 

Production of Sheet Copper 155 

Profiles, Gothic 66-68 



242 INDEX. 

Public Buildings, Cost of 143 

Punching Slate 210 

QuarryiDg: Slate 206 

Kadiatiug- Surface, To Calculate 141 

Raised Britannia Ware, Solder for 23 

Raking Moulding, Pattern for 188-194 

Reaching Roofs 226 

Rectangle, Area of 100 

Rectangular Tank, Volume of 100 

" " Vessel, Volume of 100 

Red Hickory, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Registers and Ventilators Vertical Wheel 119 

Relative Weights of Metals 81 

Repairing Slate Roof 223 

Reservoir, Square 72-73 

Resin 165 

Ribs, Broken, Treatment of 134 

Ridge Rolls 220 

Ridging 221 

** Strip 220 

Right Cone, Volume of loi 

Riveted Lap Seam 168 

Rolls, Ridge and Hip 220 

Roman Long Measure 99 

« Mouldings 63-66 

Roof, German Style 228 

Roofing, Tin, Cost per Square 1 16-1 17 

" Wood, Cement for 14 

Roof Scaffolding 225 

Roofs, Iron, Paint for 19 

" Measuring 214 

** Pitch of 204 

** Slate Repairing 223 

** Tin, Paint for 19 

Round Bar Iron, No. lbs. per Foot 114 

" Cornered, Tapering Square Reservoir 72-73 

Round ElboviTs, Rule for 74-75 

Round Tower Slating 223 

Rubber and Metal, Cement for 13 

" and Wood, Cement for 13 

" Stamps, Ink for 16 

Rule for Obtaining the Side of an Octagon of any given Square 57 

Rule for Round Elbows 74-75 

Rules for Measuring Slate Roofs 214 

Rules in Mensuration 99-102 

Rule to Find the Horse-Power of a Stationary Engine 90 

Rule to Find the Number of Gallons Contained in a Can 90 

Rupture, What to do in Case of 135 

Rusting, To Prevent Sheet Iron Pipes from 21 

" To Keep Tools from 21 

** To Preserve Steel from 20 



Rusting, To Prevent Iron from 20 

Rust , 152 

" Preserving Iron Work from ig 

" To Remove from Iron 20 

" To Remove from Nickel Plate 15-20 

** To Remove from Steel 20 

Sal- Ammoniac 167 

Salts, Spirits of 165 

Sand, Moist, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Scaffold Bracket ^ 226 

Scaffolding a Roof * 225 

Scalds, Treatment for 133 

Scale 152 

Scripture, Long Measure 98 

** Measures 98 

« Weights 98 

Seam, Box Grooved 170 

« Circular Folded 168 

Lap 168 

" Countersunk Lap • 168 

« Double Folded 169 

« Folded 168 

** Grooved 170 

** Grooved Countersunk 170 

« Lap 168 

« Riveted Lap 168 

Seams : 168 

Selecting Slate 210 

Shape of Moulding, To Draw, having given the Section of a 

Moulding at any Angle 174-179 

Sheathing Boards 204-205 

• Copper Tinned 105 

Sheet Brass, Weight of 104 

" Copper 105 

** Copper, Its Production 155 

" Iron, Measurement of 106 

" Iron, Paint for 19 

" Iron Pipes, to Prevent from Rusting 2! 

« Iron, Table of Weights of 127 

Shellbark Hickory, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Shop Hints, Useful 135 

Shoulder Cutting 223 

Shrinkage of Castings , 141 

Side of an Octagon 5^ 

Side of an Octagon of any Given Square 57 

Siemens Process of Making Steel 153 

Silver Oxidizing 18 

" Value of Ton of 82 

** Wash for Cleaning 21 

« Weight of Cubic Foot of 82 

" Weight of §1,000,000 in Silver Dollars 82 



244 INDEX. 

Size of Slate 205-207 

Slate 203-229 

** Comparative Strength of 205-207 

" Laying 216 

** Leaks in 224 

" Machine Punched 211 

" Nails, Tin Covering for , 225 

" Ornamental 207 

** Piling 208 

" Punching- 210 

" Roofs, How Damaged by Carelessness 207 

" Roofs, Repairing 223 

" Selecting. 210 

* Size of 205-207 

" Tables : 118 

Slating Nails 213 

** Round Tower 223 

" Spire 226 

Smokestack, Patterns , 45-49 

" Varnish for 29 

Soap, Castile, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

" for Metal Work 21 

Soft Solder 158 

" for Britannia Ware 23 

* for Pewterers 24 

Solder 162-163 

" Bismuth 22 

« Black 22 

" Brass 23 

Solder for Aluminum 21-22 

" ** Britannia Ware, Hardening 23 

« *• ' « Soft 23 

" ** Copper 23 

" ** Iron 24 

** " Iron and Brass 24 

** • Iron and Steel 24 

« *" Raised Britannia Ware 23 

" " Steel and Brass 24 

" " Steel Joints 25 

« ** Zinc 24 

" Glazier's 24 

« Hard 25 

Soldering, Autogenous I57 

" Cold, Without Fire or Lamp 23 

« Fluxes 163 

Flux for Steel 24 

Solder Pewter 24 

" Pe wterer's 24 

" Platinum 24 

" Plumbers' 24, 163 

" Spelter y 24 



INDEX. 245 

Solders, Table of : 164 

Solder, Tinner's 25-163 

Solid Measure 95 

Solution for Fire Grenades 15 

Specific Gravities of Liquids 85 

* Gravity of Metals 150 

Stones 88 

Speculum, Metal 158 

Spelter 156 

" Solder 24 

Sphere, Volume of loi 

Spinning Brass 160 

Spire Slating 226 

Spirits, Killed 165 

of Salts 165 

Springy Steel Plates 154 

Spruce, Weisfht of Cubic Foot of 83 

Spun Brass Kettles 115 

Square Reservoir 72-73 

" Rule to Obtain Side of Octagon of 57 

Stack, Varnish for 29 

Stamps, Rubber, Ink for 16 

Standards, Wire Gauge 119 

Standing Seam, Rooting Cost of 117 

States, Legal Holidays in Various Ones. 1 29-131 

Stationary Engine. Horse Power of 90 

Statistics of U. S Minerals 84 

Stature of Man 79 

Steam Fittings, Cement for 13 

" Pipes, " " 13 

Steel 1 51-153 

" Bar, Weight of 113 

" Joints, Solder for 25 

« Mild 154 

" Soldering, Flux for 24 

" Temper of 148 

" To Prevent from Rusting 20 

" To Remove Rust from 20 

" Varnish for 28 

" Weight of Cubic Foot of 82. 

** Weight of Square Foot of 128 

Stones, Specific Gravity of 88 

Weights of 88 

Stove Polish 25 

String and Nail , Oval 49 

Strip to Nail Ridging to 220 

Submarine Cement 14 

Sugar, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Suggestions Useful in Cases of Accident to Mechanics 132 

Surface Metric Measure 96 

Swedish Mile in English Miles 82 



246 INDEX. 

Swiss Stunde in English Miles 82 

System, Metric 95-98 

Table for Tiiiplate Workers 120 

" of Interest 78 

" Melting Points of Metals 151 

« Solders 164 

" Weights per Foot of Common Sheet Iron 127 

" " " Galvanized" " Pipe.... 126 

" Wilson's Dimensions of Chimneys 115 

Tables for Taking Inside Dimensions 91 

Taggers, Tin 125 

Tallow, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Tank, Circular Volume of 100 

" Elliptical, Volume of 100 

" Height of, To Find from Contents 102 

" Rectangular, Volume of 100 

Tapering Circular Bend, Pattera for 198-202 

* Oval Vessel, Pattern for 35-37 

" Round Cornered Square Reservoir 72-73 

Tarred Paper 205 

Tee Pipe Pattern 68-69 

Temperature Melting of Alloys 83 

Temperatures, Weight of Water at Different 84 

Tempering Steel 153 

Temper of Steel 148 

Tenacity of Metals 148 

Terne Plates 154-125 

Tests for Impure Water 138-139 

Thigh Broken, Treatment of 1 33 

Timber Measure 90 

Tin and Copper, Alloys of 1 59 

" and Lead, Alloys of . 162 

" Bronzing 25 

" Colored Varnish for 27 

" Covering for Slate Nails 225 

** Foil, Crystalline Surface for 25 

" Lined Lead Pipe, Weight of 118 

Tinned Iron 154 

" Sheathing Copper 105 

Tinner's Solder 25-163 

Tinning, Cold for Brass 26 

" " for Copper 26 

"" for Iron 26 

Cloth 15 

Tin Plates 154 

" Marks and Weights of 106 

* Marks, Weights and Numbers 124-125 

" Workers, Tables for 120 

Tin Roofing, Cost of per Square 1 16-1 17 

" Roofs, Paint for 19 

" To Attach Labels to 137 



INDEX. 247 

Tin, Weight of Cubic Foot of 82 

" " Square Foot of 128 

To Attach Labels to Tin 137 

" Compute the Volume of Bricks in a Cubic Foot of Masonry 8q 

" Describe an Oval of Any Length or Width 58 

** " Pattern for a Four-Piece Elbow 70-71 

** ** Patterns for a Flaring Vessel 50-5 1 

* Draw Angle of Section of the Moulding, Having Shape of 

Moulding Given 174-179 

" Draw Shape of the Moulding, Having Given the Section 

of a Moulding at Any Angle 174-179 

** Find Contents of a Corn Crib 95 

Tools, To Keep from Rusting 21 

"Tough Cake" Copper 1 56 

Transparent Cement 14 

" Paper 18 

Triangulation, Hopper Pattern by 37-40 

Type Metal 158 

Underpoliug, Coppe*- 155 

United States Mineral Statistics 84 

" Population of by States 86 

Ure in English Miles 82 

Useful Rules in Mensuration 99-102 

" Shop Hints 135 

" Suggestions in Cases of Accident to Mechanics 132 

Valleys on Koofs to be Measured Extra 214 

Value of Ton of Gold 82 

" of Ton of Silver 82 

Varnish, Black 26 

Black for Iron 28 

** Brilliant Black 27 

" Colored for Tin 27 

" for Brass 26 

** Bright Iron Works 137-27 

" Coating Metals 27 

Gilded Articles 28 

Iron 28 

Steel 28 

Gold 28 

" Mordant 29 

" Smoke Stack 29 

Ventilators, Vertical Wheel 119 

Vermont Marble, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Verst in English Miles 82 

Vertical Wheel Registers 119 

Vessel, Circular, Volume of 100 

« Elliptical, " 100 

" Pattern for Flaring 50-5 1 

** Rectangular, Volume of 100 

" To Find Contents of loi 

Volatile Metals 147 



248 INDEX. 

Volume of Bricks in a Cubic Foot of Masonry 89 

" Circular Tank 100 

" Elliptical Vessel 100 

" Frustum of Right Cone loi 

** Right Cone loi 

" Sphere loi 

Wash Boiler Cover, Pattern lor 52 

" for Cleaning Silver 21 

Water, Impure, Tests for 138-139 

" Measures of 93 

** Proofed Paper 20$ 

" Weight of at Different Temperatures 84 

Weight, Metric, Measure of 97 

" of Bar Steel 113 

" " Buildings 143 

** ** Cubic Foot of Various Substances 82 

** ** Foot of Flat Bar Iron 103 

** ** Galvanized Sheet Iron 108-1 13 

« Lead Pipe 118 

« Liquids 85 

** ** « Per Gallon 84 

** ** Man 79 

** « Metals 128 

** " $1,000,000 Worth of Gold 82 

" " 1,000,000 Silver Dollars 82 

** " One Foot of Bar Steel 120 

« Tin-Lined Lead Pipe 118 

" " Water at Different Temperatures 84 

Weights, Ancient 99 

** Comparative Table of 93 

" Scriptural 98 

** of Metals, Relative 81 

Stones 88 

** Tinplates 100 

** Per Foot of Common Sheet Iron 127 

" *• Galvanized Sheet Iron Pipe 126 

Welding of Metals 149 

White Brass Solder 23 

" Oak. Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

" Poplar, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Wilson's Tables of Dimensions of Chimneys 115 

Window Glass, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Wire and Cut Nails, Relative Holding Power of 144-145 

Wire Gauge Standards 119 

Wood Roofing Cement 14 

Wood's Alloy 158 

Workers, Tinplate Tables for 120-123 

Wounds, Flesh, Treatment of 134 

Wrought Iron Pipe, Internal Areas of 114 

Wrought Iron, Weight of Square Foot of 128 

**Y^ Pattern 5^-55 



INDEX. 249 

Yellow Brass Solder 23 

« Pine, Weight of Cubic Foot of 83 

Ziuc. 156-157 

" and Copper Alloys of 159-162 

** and Glass, Cement for 15 

** Chloride of 165 

" Coating for Iron 154 

" Discovered by Henkel. .0 156 

" Roofing Joint , 170 

« Solder 25 

** To Blacken , 29 

" Color 29 

** Weight of Cubic Foot of ............. , = ;...... 82 



Paragon Hot Air Furnaces 

satisfy the purchaser because they do their work 
easily, thoroughly and ECONOMICALLY. 

Small first cost, small fuel cost, SMALL REPAIR COST. 



With 
Steel 
Radiator 
for 
Hard 
Coal 







With 

Cast 

Radiator 

for 

Soft 

Coal 



SIX POINTS and Their Meaning: 

I. FEWEST JOINTS:— No leakage of gas or dust. 
3 EQUALIZED DRAFT:— Perfect combustion throughout 
entire mass of fuel. 

3. LARGEST RADIATING SURFACE: — Plenty of Pure, 

Warm Air, — Not Parched Air. 

4. ABSOLUTELY SELF=CLEANING:— Flues always clear- 

no bother about it. 
^. BALL=BEARING GRATE:— Shakes so easily that a child 

can manage it. 
(S. PERFECT ADAPTABILITY:— Any kind of fuel, hard or 

soft coal, or coke, can be used. 

Every PARAGON sold sells another. If you want 

A GROWING TRADE 

this is the furnace for you to handle. Exclusive rights given, 

Isaac A. Sheppard & Co., nfrs. 

1801 N. Fourth St., Philadelphia, Pa. 

250 



Fidelity Ranges 

Have more selling points, and yield more profit to the dealer 
than the common every-day sort. When sold, they stay sold* 
No complaints, no worry, no after-expense in satisfying cus- 
tomers. 



HOYRU 

piDHIilTV 

HRfiQBS 

POH 

HOUSES 




FIDELilTY 

smfliiiiEJ^ 

HOUSES 



R FEW HEflSOISlS WHY: 

Fidelity Ranges possess 

1. COMPACTNESS :— Take up less room in kitchen. 

2. CAPACITY :— Large Ovens. Large Flues. 

3. CONVENIENCE -.—Best form of Grate. Best Dust Flue. 

4. ECONOMY: — Large saving in cost of plumbing. 

5. NOVELTY: — ^^'Eclipse Covers" — the most meritorious in- 

vention in stove-making of late years. 
6 : EFFICIENCY :— Water heated twice as fast as by ordinary 
ranges. 
Many more good things about them. Exclusive territory given 
to live dealers. 

Isaac A. Sheppard & Co., ^*»*s. 

1801 N. Fourth St., Philadelphia, Pa. 

251 



w 



E publish at the price of ^3.50 each, three of the 
best technical books extant. 
These are: 



TinsrDltt\s' Pattern fy^ariual. 

THE leading sheet metal work in the market. 238 
pages, 97 illustrations. Warmly endorsed by the 
trade and trade press. 



Furnace # Work * iy^anual. 

TELLS everything the furnace worker desires to 
know about his business. 249 pages, 230 illus- 
trations. No other book covers this particular field as 
this one does. 



House WarrT\}ng fy^anual. 

(in print.) 

CONTAINING the $300 essays in The American 
Artisan House Warming Competition for cash 
prizes. The latest and most up-to-date practical 
articles on steam heating, hot water heating and warm 
air heating by the brightest minds in the trade. 

ISeiit poistpalcl for $3.50 each. 

For sale by all book sellers. 



DANIEL STERN, Publisher, 

69 Dearborn St., CHICAGO. 

252 



lOO Orinne^'s^ I^atterns. 



The American Artisan Full Size Patterns 

Comprise patterns for a full line of tinware, in numerous sizes, square and 
round elbows, cut-offs, etc. These full-size patterns, numbering upward 
ot I OO, are printed en manilla paper, from which they are readily trans- 
ferred to heavy sheets and cut out ready for use. 

The list contains the following patterns: 



Tea Steeper 

Two-pint Tea Pot 

Three-pint Tea Pot 

Four-pint Tea Pot 

Five-pint Tea Pot 

One-auart Coffee Pot 

Two-quart Coffee Pot 

Three-quart Coffee Pot 

Four-quait Coffee Pot 

Five-quart Coffee Pot 

No. 1 Coffee Boiler 

No. 2 Coffee Boiler 

No. 3 Coffee Boiler 

Lamp Filler 

One-pint Dipper 

One-quart Dipper 

Two-quart Dipper 

Four-quart Flaring Pail 

Six-quart Flaring Pail 

Eight-quart Flaring Pail 

Ten-quart Flaring Pail 

Tweive-quart Flaring Pail 

Fourteen-quart Flaring Pail 

Ten- quart Dish Pan 

Twelve quart Dish Pan 

Fourteen-quart Dish Pan 

Sixteen-quart Dish Pan 

Dinner Bucket 

Five-inch T-Joint 

Six-inch T- Joint 

Eave Trough Mitre Joint 

"Snap" 2-inch Conductor Elbow 

Cullender 

Two-inch Square Elbow 

Two-and-a-halt-inch Square Elbow 

Three-and-a-half-inch Square Elbow 

Four-and-a-half-inch Square Elbow 

Five-and-a-half-inch Square Elbow 

Six-and-a-half-inch Square Elbow 

Seven- and-a-half-inch Square Elbow 

One-pint Funnel 

Two-pint Funnel 

Three-pint Funnel 

Four-pint Funnel 

Large Milk Strainer 

Small Milk Strainer 

Ten-quart Milk Pail Breast 



Fourteen-quart Milk Pail Breast 

Two-inch Four-Piece Round Elbow 

Three-inch Four-Piece Round Elbow 

Four-inch Four-Piece Round Elbow 

Five-inch Four-Piece Round Elbow 

Five-and-a-half-inch Round Elbow 

Six-and-a-halt-inch Round Elbow 

Seven-and-a-half-inch Round Elbow 

Small Grocers' Scoop 

Medium Grocers' Scoop 

Large Grocers' Scoop 

Apple Corer 

Oval Foot Bath 

Oval Pudding Pan 

Half-gallon Can Breast 

One-gallon Can Breast 

Two-gallon Can Breast 

Three-gallon Cau Breast 

Hall-pint Measure 

One-pint Measure 

One-quart Measure 

Half-gallon Measure 

One-pint Basin 

Two-pint Basin 

Ihree-pint Basin 

Four-pint Pan 

Six-quart Pan 

Ten-quart Pan 

Small Cake Pan 

Medium Cake Pan 

Large Cake Pan 

Small Wash Basin 

Large Wash Basin 

Sprinkler Breast 

Four-gallon Churn 

Five-gallon Churn 

Small Dust Pan 

Large Dust Pan 

Five sizes F'unnel Patterns 

Oval Dinner Bucket 

Rain Water Cut-off 

No. 7 Boiler Cover 

No. 8 Boiler Cover 

No. 9 Boiler Cover 

No. 7 Boiler Bottoms 

No. 8 Boiler Bottoms 

No. 9 Boiler Bottoms 



THE AMERICAN ARTISAN full-size patterns are a great convenience, and in no 
other way can they be obtained at so small a cost. Price, sent post-paid for the 

FULL SET OF 100 PATTERNS $1.00. 

"r> /\ JJIEi Xj S1"£3ZUNr, 

69 DEARBORN STREET, = = CH1CAQ0,1LL, 



253 



Formerly James B. Scott &, Co. 

Tin Plate, Sheet Iron, Metals. 

Manufacturers of 






Guaranteed Roofing Tin. 

Made by the strictly PALM OIL PROCESS AND 
THOROUGHLY SQUARED AND RESQUARED. 

Each sheet is SEPARATELY DIPPED BY HAND and 

remains in the metal bath under boiling Palm Oil until the pores 
are opened and the metal is absorbed into the iron as well as 
heavily coating it. 

Afterwards each sheet is SEPARATELY REDIPPED BY 
HAND and separately inspected. Only perfect sheets are 
stamped with the 

I^€grst€r€d "Jradc N\ark. 



Offices and Warehouses: 

328, 330 and 332 Second Ave., 



PITTSBURGH, PA. 



254 






ROOFING Slate. 




"BANGOE UNION," 

Black . 

The finest genuine 
Bangor Slate in the 
Market, very strong 
and durable, a beauti- 
ful black in color. 



MAMMOTH VEIN 
POULTNEY, Sea 
Green . 

Finest Sea Green 
Slate ever produced. 



THE LIGHTNING 
SLATE DRESSER, 

Will cut and punch 
slate at one opera- 
tion. 



Can furnish 

Roofing Slate of all kinds, 
Slate Blackboards, 
Roofers' Supplies, Tools, etc. 



"THE SLATE ROOFER," a book for Roofers. 

BY MAIL, ^I.OO. 



AULiD &' GONGRR, 
100 Euclid Avenue, - CLEVELAND. 



255 



MeClure's 

REDIPPED 

ROOFING 

TIN 



American Hade 



Guaranteed to be more evenly 

and heavily coated than any ^ 

Old Style or Redipped Plate 

made. . . 



Every sheet perfect 
^ and stamped with 

brand and thickness. 



"[in Plates and Jy^ctals 
PITTSBURG PA. 

Office and Warehouse: 

211m213m215 SHCOflD flVH. 

256 



r;Y^ 



Sipe's Japar\ Oils 

Over twelve hundred tinners ^^ 

are now using 

siPE's mm OILS 



for painting Tin and 
7'i\ Iron Roofs. 



, They are 



QUICK DRYING. EM STIC, AND 
HOLD THE TAINT ON TIN 
OR OTHER METALLIC SUR- 
FACES 

better than any other oil known. 

Cneapep and t)ettep than Linseed Oil for 
tinners use. 

SIPE'S JAPAN OIL has been used FOR 

OVER TEN YEARS by leading tin roofers all over 
the United States. 

SEND FOR PRICES AND TESTIMONIALS. 

Sole 
Manufacturers 

Allegheny, Pa. 

257 





THE FOX FURNACES. 




FOI? fl^V FUEli... 

You snouid nave otip eataiogue. 

THE FOX FMRNilQE CO. 

CLEVELAND, OHIO. 



mm 



izm 



The. 



Chicagfo 

Stove 

Works 




Promises the Trade many new Patterns in Gold Coin Stoves for 
1896. Prominent among these, the Handsomest and most 
complete Line of Steel Manges ever offered. Bear this in 
mind and see our new Lines before placing your orders for 
Spring Trade. 

Leading Trade MarK Line 
Evepy Stove Fully Wappanted 
Send fop Illustpated Catalogue 



Ch'fQago Stov^ Worf(s, 



BLUE ISLAND AVENUE AND 22ND STREET. 



259 



A NEW ROOF PLATE. 



Turner's 
Flexible 
Venetian 
fy^etal Roof 
piate. 



Handsome, durable and absolutely rain and storm proof. 
Made in tin and copper. For prices, etc., write to the manufacturer, 

JOHN HAMILTON, Pittsburgh, Pa. 




Hamilton's Best Redipped American Roofing Tin. 

WE GUARANTEE THIS PLATE TO BE 

Strictly Hand Coated. 
Strictly Palm Oil Coated 

with best refined tin and lead and to be evenly coated^over the 
entire surface of the sheet. A trial of this plate will convince 
anybody of its merits. 



MADE BY 



3^0HN HAMILTON, 

PITTSBURGH. PA- 



260 



'Ml/ S iqn3 



TINSniTHS' 

AND 

SHEET 

HETAL 

WORKERS' 

POCKET 

REFERENCE 

BOOK. 





A collection of practical in- 
formation including rules,tables, 
receipts, explanations, etc.,used 
daily by the tinsmith at his 
work. Presented in a compact 
form convenient to carry in 
the pocket, by C. E. Bodley. 
This work is substantially bound 
in cloth and is sent postage pre- 
paid for 60 cents. 



FOR SALE BY 



69 DEARBORX ST. CHICAGO. 



